Home

Ocularis LS / Ocularis ES

1. Within selected lime in lime proide w Outside selected lime in lime prole Within the time period startime to endlime Day of week is days o Inthe rule description click the link in the sentence Start patrolling on and select a patrolling profile matching your nighttime requirements rather than your daytime requirements Sreet a Profile E3 PA a Profile z C All Lanea 8 FIZ Comers Chay terre x teen 2 Click Finish Pause PTZ patrolling and go to PTZ preset on input rule In this example we assume that patrolling has already been set up for the PTZ camera and that the external input unit is a door sensor connected to an input port on a device on the system When the door sensor is activated the PTZ camera will pause patrolling move to a preset position covering the door area remain at the preset position for 15 seconds then resume patrolling Prerequisites This rule is based on an input being activated and on a patrolling PTZ camera moving to a specific preset position Therefore an external input unit must be available i e connected to the input port of a device on the system Furthermore the preset position to which the PTZ camera should move when the rule is applied must have been defined Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e An external input unit is successfully connected to an input port on a device and the states of the input unit ac
2. Darr Products Section gt i i Frozen F bds Section C Frozen Foods Sechon gt 4 Specify the estimated transition time in number of seconds in the Expected time secs field On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 95 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Expected lime secz 5 Use the Speed slider to specify the required transition speed When the slider is in its rightmost position the camera will move with its default speed The more you move the slider to the left the slower the camera will move during the selected transition Tip A number indicating the exact speed is displayed near the top right corner of the slider When required the number from 0 0001 very slow to 1 0000 default speed allows you to define exactly the same custom speed across transitions 6 Inthe Plug ins to disable list specify any plug ins you want to disable during the selected transition By default the plug in used for motion detection on the camera MotionDetectionPlugin is disabled in order to avoid irrelevant motion being detected during transition To add a plug in to the list click Add and select the required plug in This requires that one or more other plug ins are available and that they can be disabled To remove a plug in from the list for example if you do not want motion detection to be disabled during the transition select the plug in and click remove 7 Repeat as required for other transitio
3. It is not possible to mix domain s and workgroup s i e connect sites from a domain to sites from a workgroup and vice versa Licensing of OnSSI Federated Architecture To learn about licensing in general refer to About Licenses on page 47 Federated architecture can be used freely within the same legal entity as many times as needed In a federated setup all sites share the same software license code see Manage Software License Codes on page 48 SLC and device licenses are shared between all sites In the case of different legal entities running federated architecture each system requires a valid set of base and device licenses Furthermore in order for a device to be accessible across a federated setup one OnSS Federated Architecture Device License is required per device accessed in the federated site To get additional licenses for your system contact your product dealer Basic rules of federated sites e One parent many children A child can only have one parent but a parent can have an unlimited number of children e Parent requests child not the other way around A new parent child link is always requested by the parent and if necessary authorized by the child Refer to Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 221 e One level at the time A parent knows about all its children children s children etc but only controls them one level down Furthermore a child only knows about and answers to its parent
4. Time range Stat 1 30 FM w End Dura 1 5 hours w Fiecumence partem Cisy Recureven 1 week s on 2 Weekly C Monthi C Suds 4 Monday Tuesday C Wednesday Crea Thursday Friday C Saturday Hanga of recurrence Stat Mon 3 5 2005 v Ng end date OEnd after 10 eccumences End by Mon 11 7 2005 w x lime and date format may be different on your system 1 Inthe Select Time window specify time range recurrence pattern and range of recurrence 2 Click OK Tip A time profile is able to contain several periods of time If you want your time profile to contain further periods of time add more single times or recurring times 1 When you have specified the required time periods for your time profile click OK in the Time Profile window Your new time profile is added to the Time Profiles list in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 If at a later stage you wish to edit or delete the time profile you can do that from the Time Profiles list Edit a time profile 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s Time Profiles list right click the required time profile and select Edit Time Profile Tip Instead of right clicking to select Edit Time Profile you can select the required time profile and press F2 on your keyboard This will open the Time Profile window 2 Inthe Time Profile window edit the time profile as required When you have made the required changes to the time
5. 2 Click the l button located below the Storage configuration list 3 Click Yes EDIT SETTINGS FOR A SELECTED STORAGE AREA OR ARCHIVE 1 In the Recording and archiving configuration list to edit a storage area select its recording database To edit an archive select the archive database Tip A selected database is marked by a dark frame 2 Click the w button located below the Recording and archiving configuration list 3 Either editing a recording database see Add a storage area on page 71 or editing an archive see Create an archive within an existing storage area on page 71 If you change the maximum size of a database recordings that exceed the new limit are auto archived to the next archive or deleted depending on archiving settings MOVE NON ARCHIVED RECORDINGS FROM ONE STORAGE TO ANOTHER 1 Moving of contents from one recording database to another is done from the Record tab of the device in question 2 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices select the wanted device type In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the wanted device 3 Inthe Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 click the Record tab In the upper part of the Storage area click Select 4 Inthe Select Storage dialog that follows select the wanted database 5 Click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 73 Management Client
6. About rules on page 166 About rules In short rules specify actions which should be carried out under particular conditions Example When motion is detected condition a camera should begin recording action The following are examples of what you can do with rules e Start and stop recording e Set non default live frame rate e Set non default recording frame rate e Start and stop PTZ patrolling e Pause and resume PTZ patrolling e Move PTZ cameras to specific positions e Set output to activated deactivated state e Send notifications via e mail e Generate log entries e Generate events e Apply new device settings for example a different resolution on a camera e Start and stop plug ins e Start and stop feeds from devices How is stopping the feed from a device different from manually disabling the device Stopping a device means that video will no longer be transferred from the device to the system in which case neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a device on which the feed has been stopped will still be able to communicate with the recording server and the feed from device can be started automatically through a rule as opposed to when the device is manually disabled in the Management Client IMPORTANT Some rule content may require that certain features are enabled for the devices in question For example a rule specifying that a camera should record will not work as intended if recording is not
7. Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard 6 On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started gt In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would make the PTZ camera start patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile but it would never stop Based on the elements in our rule description we therefore must select a stop criterion Since our rule is triggered when a time period starts the wizard automatically suggests that stop action is performed when the time period ends First Select stop ciena e Feito shop action when lime interval ends On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 153 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES The suggestion is also reflected in the rule description However we still need to specify exactly which stop action we want performed Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 7 Inthis step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions 7 In this example Based on the start action start patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action stop patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is stopped immediately when the time period ends jext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval ithin selected ti
8. The management server requires access to a relational database Later in this installation process you must choose between using an existing SQL Server on the network Administrator rights on the SQL Server are required or setting up a SQL Server Express Edition a lighter version of a full SQL server on the management server itself If you select an SQL Server Express Edition you might need to have Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 installed on the server running the SQL Server even though Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 is already installed Refer to System requirements on page 9 2 x Windows Server 2003 Fix If you use Windows Server 2003 OnSSI recommends that you install two supported fixes before starting Fix 1 and Fix 2 Otherwise the installation of your management server might fail due to Microsoft Windows Installer process having insufficient contiguous virtual memory to verify that the msi package or the msp package is correctly signed Alternative installation for workgroups If you do not use a domain setup but a workgroup setup do the following when installing 1 Login to Windows using a common administrator account 2 Depending on your needs start the management or recording server installation and click Custom 3 Depending on what you selected in step 2 select to install the Management or Recording Server service using a common administrator account 4 Finish the installation 5 Repeat step
9. microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 input see Manage input on page 109 and output see Manage output on page 113 events in item lists E T A A LZ B W LE A d cb PF qd do oP rj About device groups Item enabled Can communicate with the recording server and can if required be started stopped automatically through a rule Item recording Speaker being recorded Note that what is being said through the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible Item database being repaired Item requires attention Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as
10. EBECREORNOTU RISE ROEGOEDN ED SUR OH ROCA ROG ROUGE Add Mew Rule CTRL H Delete Rule DELETE Copy Rule Validate Rule Validate All Rules z Refresh F5 The wizard Manage Rule opens In the wizard rename and or change the rule as required If you selected Copy Rule the wizard opens displaying a copy of the selected rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 171 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 4 Click Finish Deactivate and activate a rule A rule is by default active meaning that your system applies the rule as soon as the rule s conditions apply If you do not want a rule to be active you can deactivate the rule When the rule is deactivated the system does not apply the rule even if the rule s conditions apply A deactivated rule can easily be activated later Deactivating a rule 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required rule 2 Clear the Active check box in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Poles d Piae beer gin g z E Rules 5 Big Fest Rule Mura i Big Second Rule us Trad Fite Bip Tha ici Depi re ay ee ol M Tg a ekadi Iai ii eee on PE br TUTUP a GM Fee toes arn i nor cin inpr Erw ee Blue Sector Back Deor Blue Ser Enfin 3 Save the setting by clicking Save in the Management Client s toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 4 The deactivated rule will be indicated by a different
11. Q Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no re information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server as opposed to when an item is disabled On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 133 Management Client 134 Micro Spea Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Description Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible Item database being repaired Item requires attention Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Clients About clients In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you are able to work with the following under Clients see Manage view groups on page 135 Here you manage your View Groups which are basically containers for one or more logical groups of views About view groups The way in which video from one or more cameras is presented in clients is called a view A view group is basically a con
12. See also the ULI UE TEMES LE ITSO next description of Prebuffered Seconds setting Determines the number of seconds for which video from the camera should Prebuffer Seconds be stored for possible later use What does prebuffer mean Prebuffering is essentially the ability to store video from before the initial boundaries of a recording It allows you to view video from before an event occurred If for example you are going to use the event in an rule specifying that recording should start when the event occurs being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may also be important An example could be if you are using five seconds of prebuffering video from the camera will always be stored provisionally for five seconds If the event occurs five seconds worth of video will be available for attaching to any recording triggered by the event as specified in a rule PTZ tab video encoders The PTZ tab lets your enable PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom for video encoders It is only available if the selected hardware is a video encoder What is a video encoder A video encoder also known as video server is a piece of hardware which is able to stream video from a number of connected cameras Video encoders contain image digitizers making it possible to connect analog cameras to a network For video encoders the use of PTZ must be enabled on the hardware level before you can use the PTZ features of PTZ cameras attached to t
13. Set up a secure connection on all items in a device group 151 Settings tab overview 97 100 121 122 129 147 169 174 263 Index Setup and enable failover recording servers 299 302 Setup with one way trust 29 325 Site Navigation pane 283 Site Navigation pane and Federated Hierarchy pane 32 SNMP 322 Speaker 152 Specify a time profile 226 Specify an end position 114 Specify AVI compression settings 230 272 Specify common settings for all devices in a device group 128 Specify common settings for all items in a device group cameras microphones and speakers 149 Specify common settings for all items in a device group hardware 150 Specify datagram options 91 Specify event properties 160 Specify for how long to stay at each preset position 111 Specify hardware and device info properties 64 145 Specify input properties 132 Specify IP address range 92 Specify manual PTZ session timeout 114 Specify output properties 137 Specify preset positions for use in a patrolling profile 109 Specify rights of a role 233 235 238 239 242 Specify which devices to include in a device group 127 264 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Speech rights 246 Spring Switch from standard time to DST 323 SQL database administration 311 Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service 308 Start the server service 314 315 Status icons o
14. So when run on a virtual server the normal gain of virtualization disappears to a large extent since in many cases it will use all available resources If run in a virtual environment it is important that the hardware host has the same amount of physical memory as allocated for the virtual servers and that the virtual server running the recording server is allocated enough CPU and memory which it is not by default Typically the recording server needs 2 4 GB depending on configuration Another bottleneck is network adapter allocation and hard disk performance Consider allocating a physical network adapter on the host server of the virtual server running the recording server This makes it easier to ensure that the network adapter is not overloaded with traffic to other virtual servers If the network adapter is used for several virtual servers the network traffic might result in the recording server not retrieving and recording the configured amount of images Download Manager download web page The management server has a built in web page This web page enables administrators and end users to download and install required RC L RC E system components from any location locally or remotely The web page is capable of displaying two sets of content both by default in a language version matching the language of the system installation e One is targeted at administrators enabling them to download and install key system components Most
15. Some of this prerequisite information is only relevant for users of SQL Server Express Edition If you use any other SQL setup ask your IT department for backup details Prerequisites 230 Your software installation file for installation on the new management server Your initial license lic file i e the one you used when initially installing your system not the lic file which is the result of your license activation see Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline on page 44 License activation is among other things based on the specific hardware on which the activation took place therefore an activated lic file cannot be reused when moving to a new server Note that if you are also upgrading your system software in connection with the move you will have received a new initial lic file together with your new Software License Code SLC SQL Server Express Edition users only Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express a tool downloadable for free from www microsoft com downloads Among its many features for managing SQL Server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Backup restore and move system configuration Express databases are some easy to use backup and restoration features Download and install the tool on your existing management server and on the server which will be your future management server you will need it for the entire copy process backup as well as restoration Manage
16. The Settings tab has convenient functionality for quickly switching between settings for the device group and settings for individual devices Manage speakers On many devices you are able to attach external loudspeakers some devices even have built in speakers Devices speakers are automatically detected when you add the devices to your system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 53 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Speakers do not require separate licenses you can use as many speakers as required on your system You can use speakers completely independently of cameras Who is able to talk through speakers Users of the Ocularis Client can provided speakers are available and the users have the rights to use them click a button to talk through speakers Roles determine users right to talk through speakers You cannot talk through speakers from the Management Client What happens if two users want to speak at the same time Roles determine users right to talk through speakers As part of the roles definition you are able to specify a speaker priority from very high to very low If two users want to speak at the same time the user whose role has the highest priority will win the ability to speak If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time the first come first served principle applies Tip Your system comes with a default rule which ensures that audio feeds from
17. including the sequence for moving between preset positions timing settings etc When the specified part of the day ends the PTZ camera will stop patrolling e Use different PTZ patrolling profiles for day night Ensures that during daytime a PTZ camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile And during nights according to another patrolling profile e Pause PTZ patrolling and go to PTZ preset on input Ensures that a specific external input is activated a PTZ camera will pause its patrolling move to a specific preset position and remain at the preset position for a specific period of time after which it will resume patrolling Use higher live frame rate on motion rule In this example the camera has a default live frame rate of 10 frames per second FPS and the rule increases the live frame rate to 25 FPS when applied The effect is live video of a higher quality for as long as motion is detected on the camera Note that recording frame rate the frame rate with which video sequences will be saved is specified separately and is not affected by this rule If you want to permanently change the default frame rate for a camera do not use a rule Change the camera s default frame rate on the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 121 instead Motion is normally detected by the system when video received from cameras is analyzed This is the type of motion detection dealt with in this example However som
18. is visible at the top of the pane The Management Client s features are grouped into categories reflecting the functionality of the software Tip Right clicking items in the Site Navigation pane gives you quick access to management features Federated Site Hierarchy pane Your navigation element dedicated to displaying OnSSI Federated Architecture sites see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 and their parent child links The parent server you are logged in to your home site is always at the top and adopting its point of view you can view all its linked children and downwards in the parent child hierarchy What if only have one server and don t run OnSSI Federated Architecture Your user interface looks the same but you only see the one server in your setup Overview Pane Provides overview of the item you have selected in the Site Navigation Pane typically in the form of a detailed list Selecting a particular item in the Overview pane will typically display the item s properties in the Properties pane Right clicking items in the Overview pane gives you access to management features Properties pane Displays properties of the item selected in the Overview pane In many cases properties are displayed across a number of tabs E Setting Info fia Storage Preview pane You will see the Preview pane when you deal with recording servers and devices It displays preview images from selected cameras or states information
19. lt gt Onss Ocularis LS Ocularis ES RC L RC E Recording Component User Manual 2014 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Legal Notice This product content is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty 2002 2013 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc All rights reserved OnSSI and the Eye logo are registered trademarks of On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis Ocularis Client Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Video Synopsis Ocularis X NetEVS NetDVMS NetDVR ProSight NetGuard NetGuard EVS NetSwitcher NetMatrix NetCentral NetTransact NetPDA and NetCell are trademarks of On Net Surveillance Systems Inc All other trademarks are property of their respective owners Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Disclaimer This text is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty All names of people and organizations used in the examples in this text are fictitious Any resemblance to any actual o
20. select a device group to define settings for all inputs in the group or expand a device group and select the required input The properties of the selected input or the common properties for all inputs in a selected device group will be displayed on the following tabs Settings Info and Events VIEW THE CURRENT STATE OF AN INPUT The change of an input s state is regarded as an event by the system Events can be used in rules and hereby trigger actions when the state of an input is changed Refer to Define input and output related rules see Define in and output related rules on page 117 for more information about how to include an input event in a rule To view the current state of an input in the Management Client do the following 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices and select Inputs 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required inputs folder and select the required input Tip You may select a group of inputs to view the current status of all inputs in the group 3 Information about the current status of the selected input is presented in the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 When an input is deactivated it is shown by a gray indicator Haj Deia Enhaeea hya 110 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client When the input is activated the indicator lights up green Fed Setu Emacs i
21. these can be connected by requesting a Federated Architecture link from one site the parent to another the child When the link is established the two sites automatically create a Federated Architecture hierarchy to which more sites can be added to grow the federated hierarchy Illustration of OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 218 In this example the federated hierarchy consists of six sites As illustrated each site can be both a parent and a child at the same time making it possible to create a hierarchy with as many levels as needed It is also evident that a site can link to several child sites on the same level in a hierarchy Once a federated hierarchy is created it allows users and administrators logged in to a site to access that site and any child or sub child sites it may have Access to child and sub child sites in the hierarchy is not gained automatically but dependent on appropriate user and administrator rights It is only relevant to speak of a parent child setup for management servers see Management Server on page 8 not for recording servers However due to their relations to management servers recording servers will automatically become part of the parent child setup Refer to Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 for details on how to work with federated architecture Important prerequisites when running federated sites The easiest way to make federated architecture work correctly is to prepa
22. will determine what will be interpreted as motion Merely enabling motion detection may thus not be sufficient to meet your requirements Time spent on finding the best possible balance of motion detection settings under different conditions day night calm windy weather etc will help you later avoid unnecessary recordings etc Creating the Rule 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and Events then right click Rules and select Add New Rule IE add Rule CTRL N 23 E ry E Validate All Rules c Refresh F5 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 143 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 2 The Manage Rule wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field nd In this example the rule will cover a specific camera Camera 1 We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Mame Camera 1 Live Speedup on Motion Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type gt In this example we want to base the rule on an event namely detected motion Therefore we select Perform an action on lt event gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half of the wiz
23. A brief dialog informs you that you are being connected to the new site When connection is complete your view in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane will change to reflect that you are connected to a different site In this example the user was logged into the home site Rome Server and next connects to the child Paris Server Federated Site Hierarch Federated Site Herarch L W Rome Sene i London Serve Pans Server Do I log out of my home site when I connect to another site in the hierarchy Both yes and no Embedded in your home site log in is an automated and seamless log in to its children as well using the same credentials as your home site log in However even though you technically log out of your home site when connecting to one of its children you still see the world as your former home site sees it Detach a site from hierarchy Detaching Removing a site from its hierarchy involves two different results depending on where in the federated architecture you are located If you are within your hierarchy except your home site this will detach the selected site from the rest of the hierarchy You will no longer be able to see the detached site If on the other hand you are located at your home site your home site will be detached from the rest of the hierarchy including any sites located under your home site Your home site becomes the new top site Detach child from hierarchy Location Any site Prerequisites The
24. Add publish it see Add publish Download Manager installer components on page 20 to the Download Manager by calling it with the ss registration see About installer commands on page 18 Tip If you do not have a network connection you can reinstall the entire recording server from the Download Manager The install files for the recording server is placed locally on your machine and in this way you automatically also get a reinstall of the device pack On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 21 Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Download Manager and virus scanning If you are using virus scanning see Virus scanning information on page 249 software on the management server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager If allowed in your organization disable virus scanning on the management server Port numbers of special interest Your system uses particular ports when communicating with other computers cameras and so on What is a port A port is a logical endpoint for data traffic Networks use different ports for different types of data traffic Therefore it is sometimes necessary to specify which port to use for particular data communication Most ports are used automatically based on the types of data included in the communication On TCP IP networks port numbers range from 0 to 65536 but only ports 0 to 1024 are reserved for pa
25. Automatically adjust chock For daylight saving changes o cmm ev When the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is cleared recordings from the entire DST period will be Standard Time or one hour off compared to DST This means that recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour can now be viewed IMPORTANT When you are done viewing recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box again to avoid confusion We recommend not to clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box unless you specifically need to view recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 253 Multi domain with one way trust Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Multi domain with one way trust Setup with one way trust If you run your system in a multi domain environment you can configure this setup with one way trust The system is installed on the trusting domain and users log in from trusting and trusted domains 1 Create a service account in the trusted domain You can name it whatever you want for example svcOnSSI 2 Add svcOnSSI example name only to the following local Windows user groups on the server running the system in the trusting domain o Administrators o 6IIS_IUSRS Windows Server 2008 necessary for Internet Information Services IIS Application Pools o IIS_WPG W
26. Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Recording must be enabled for the item before you are able to record i e save video or audio from the camera A rule see Manage rules on page 165 specifying that an item should record under particular circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the item in question RECORDING FRAME RATE CAMERA Specifying recording frame rate is only possible for MJPEG a video codec technology for compressing and decompressing data with which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image 1 Select or type the required recording frame rate in FPS Frames Per Second in the Recording frame rate MJPEG box 2 Clicking the Recording frame rate MJPEG box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of 1 FPS Tip If you click inside the Recording frame rate box two decimals will be added to the value By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of 1 unit This way you are able to specify a very specific recording frame rate average over time for example of 20 15 FPS Recording frame rate MIJPEG 20 15 EM FPS PREBUFFER Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save video and audio in the camera s or microphone s database before the initial boundaries of a recording It can be highly advantageous as it allows you to save video and audio from before the events or times used to start recordings Camera
27. Download Manager installer components eeeseeeesseeseenneennennnn 20 Hide remove Download Manager installer components sssssssssseeeeeennem eee 21 Device pack installer must be downloaded eseessesssesssssesenneen nennen 21 Download Manager and virus ScahnillQ 2 goess cp ratae sa ebacet saura eng UNE va vy cusraBa eO pacer kabel rere eD ss rens rusru dE rds 22 ORT NUMBERS OF SPECIAL INTEREST ise uci occ a ecda adr eoru e cu esto Ta pude opus UAR ROO Ru mua Rua od va adn d dU 22 Pons used DY ING Ec PR n 22 MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT SERVERS CLUSTER 0 lt ccs sc csceesasesceedeodscdeneexeasevaccncdeunecteleddendsadescbaiecceedeesesanetacsdesdees 23 Prerequisites TOM clustering E m EE 23 Tas ia CUSE mec 23 WJOGRACE iat Fel UI testo RR EE 24 MULTIPLE RECORDING SERVER INSTANCES usa dia pratid acahusrusuucusicd bu Dav eara d dufeua d dentur Cus Rie Dau Raddkrd ouai esed na 25 Install multiple recording server instances ssssssssssssssseseeeeneeeen nene 25 UPGRADE FROM PREVIOUS VERSION s Dus pides cond etapa Yd ekdscac e Pede d conc edu pat cud scade g died eure ducc dedu mr ned iba dude 25 mici OWS OS c TT 26 Alternative upgrade for workgroup ccccccceseecceeececceeeeeceesceeceececseeeecsuuseeseaseesseueeessaeeeessuesesseneeenes 26 INSTALLATION TROUBLESHOOTING ioni cut uper c svurcRi qui ra po
28. El rm anm m B 1 p wit E Floating panes To move a pane to a floating pane drag the pane to its new position without using one of the layout elements H uil i LISTS i LOS Damm eeu 1 E La Adm a FEI 40 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client T ae cea oL d kema Move a pane to a docked outer position If you move a pane to a docked outer position it fills the area with a horizontal or vertical split that goes from top to bottom or left to right 1 Drag the pane to one of the outer layout elements Tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Hours ES im Css i LN Dey Camus 1 bk LA M m LL sr ssa r i VoL A Damm e E E B en Move a pane to a docked inner position If you drag the pane to one of the inner layout elements the pane will be positioned along one side of one of the other panes 1 Drag the pane to one of the inner layout elements On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 41 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Dipara aaee i 0 pam q QW dd Lans pm pum TED 1 ER T Dass F Passes T ram m 1 ol L AMD ea Move a pane to a shared positio
29. Export Log window s Filename field specify a name for the exported log file By default exported log files will be saved in your My Documents folder However you are able to specify a different location by clicking the browse button L next to the field 5 Any criteria you have selected in order to target the content of the exported log will be listed in the Filters field The field is non editable if you find that you need to change your criteria close the window and repeat steps 2 4 6 Specify the time period you want the export to cover You do this by specifying the required boundaries in the Start date and time and End date and time fields respectively By clicking the arrow you are able to select the required date from a calendar Stat date and ire 02 01 2071 10 00 00 m EZR 3 Li 7 amp 35 10 i 12 14 15 16 17 18 Z D S2 23 24 25 7b a2 3 Today 1 4 2011 To specify an exact time overwrite the required time elements hours minutes seconds with the required values In this example the hours element is being overwritten Slat dale anc me aapi 2001 T0000 v Tip When you have selected time elements in order to overwrite them you are also able to use your keyboard s UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit 7 Click Export to export the required log content to the required location Handle log settings Your system has a number of default settings related t
30. If you do not have Microsoft IIS installed this is automatically installed during the process Afterwards you may be prompted to restart your computer Do so and after restart depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear Accept these and the installation continues When done your installation completes and you can get started with see Get started on page 35 your surveillance system Install your system Distributed option Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 14 steps 1 2 Select Distributed A non editable list of components to be installed appears Click Continue Choose the type of SQL server database you want see Select SQL type on page 17 Also specify the name of the SQL server Click Continue Select either Create new database or Use existing database and name the database see Select SQL type on page 17 If you choose the latter select to Keep or Overwrite existing data Click Continue Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 14 step 4 5 Install your system Custom option Note that with this option you can select or clear all of the components to install except the management server The management server is by default selected in the component list and will always be installed If one is already installed it will be updated 1 2 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 14 steps 1 2 Select Cus
31. Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 6 Inthe Recordings Action dialog that follows select whether already existing but non archived recordings should be moved along to the new storage or deleted 7 After selecting click OK See also Record tab overview on page 125 ABOUT UPGRADING Some information in this section may not be relevant due to differences in software versions If you are running Ocularis ES and your system is upgraded to Ocularis ES version 4 0 or future versions you might experience that you end up with a lot more storages than before upgrade This is due to the fact that from version 4 0 and forwards database structure is somewhat different than it used to be and during the update process the system creates a number of extra databases However since your original naming convention is respected you can reconstruct your former database structure with only little moving about of devices and deletion of obsolete storages or databases Failover tab recording server properties Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable If your organization uses failover recording servers use the Failover tab to assign failover servers to recording servers For any other details on failover recording servers their settings failover groups and their settings refer to About failover recording servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 ASSIG
32. Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the required recording server to see its device groups Select the relevant hardware under the wanted device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s hardware will be listed 2k KORR NOE RON ey p Camera 6 dp Input 1 UA Qutput 1 Anis 2100 Camera 10 1069 4 2 Select if you want to enable HTTPS on the hardware device This is not enabled by default Enter the port to which the HTTPS connection is connected The port number can be any numeric value between 1 and 65535 4 Make changes as needed 5 Click Save HTTPS is enabled for the entire hardware device that is for example a hardware device s camera microphone and speaker 124 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Record tab overview Recordings from an item camera microphone speaker or OnSSI Interconnect remote systems see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 will only be saved in the item s database when recording is enabled and recording related SEO ih ee ie 1E 3 LE I DIETE ee arae M CAMERA Lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected camera What does recording mean In IP video surveillance systems the term recording means saving video from a camera in the camera s database on the surveillance system In many IP video surveillance systems all of the video received from cameras
33. PTZ camera on the Presets tab see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Move to default preset Moves one or more particular cameras to their respective default preset positions on devices with PTZ however always according to priority When selecting this type of action Manage Rule priority priority will prompt you to select which devices the action should apply for If your system is upgraded to version 4 0 or future versions rule priority settings is a new feature Existing rules created without priority automatically get priority 1 It is strongly recommended to reconsider this lowest possible priority for all affected rules This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one preset position has been defined for those On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 139 Management Client Set device output to lt state gt Create bookmark on lt device gt Send notification to lt profile gt Make new lt log entry gt Start plug in on lt devices gt Stop plug in on lt devices gt 140 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES devices You define preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets tab see
34. Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group or Hot standby server If relevant select the needed server or groups from the dropdowns You cannot select the same failover group as both primary and secondary failover group Also regular failover servers already part of a failover group cannot be selected as hot standby servers Tip From the Primary Secondary failover server group dropdowns select Add new to create new failover groups and add failover recording servers 4 Next click Advanced failover settings this opens the Advanced Failover Settings window listing all devices attached to the selected recording server Tip Even if you selected None Advanced failover settings will be available Any selections are kept for later failover setups 5 To specify the level of failover support select Full Support Live Only or Disabled for each device in the list Click OK 6 Finally in the Failover service communication port TCP field edit the port number if needed Failover tab properties e None Select a setup without failover e Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group Select a regular failover setup with one primary and possibly one secondary failover server group Also from the attached dropdown select a primary failover group and possibly a secondary failover group e Hot standby server Select a hot standby setup Also from the dropdown select a hot standby server e Ad
35. Tip The effect of your selections is summed up in the lower part of the dialog Use the summary to verify that your selections reflect your intentions 12 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Tip If required you can always adjust the archive s settings including its scheduling once the archive has been created Tip It is possible to reduce frame rates to less than 1 FPS for example as low as 0 1 FPS which means 1 frame every 10 seconds DELETE AN ARCHIVE FROM WITHIN AN EXISTING STORAGE 1 To delete an archive select the wanted archive from the Recording and archiving configuration list by clicking it A selected archive is marked by a dark frame It is only possible to delete the last archive in the list The archive does not have to empty 2 sick nel 3 Click Yes button located below the Recording and archiving configuration list DELETE AN ENTIRE STORAGE AREA The storage area you want to delete must not be set as default storage area Furthermore it cannot be used by any devices to hold recordings This means that you must possibly move devices and their not yet archived recordings to another storage area see Move non archived recordings from one storage to another on page 73 before you are allowed to delete the storage area 1 Select the wanted storage area by clicking it Storage configuration Device Usage Default 25 days storage Local Default 28 x
36. a temporary place on the machine where the log server is installed and run the included file VideoOS Server ChangeSqlAdaress exe The Update SQL Server Address dialog appears Select Log Server and click Next 4 See steps 4 5 and 6 above On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 243 Services administration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Services administration Management Server service and Recording Server service When the management server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Management Server service by looking at the Management Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the management server Likewise when the recording server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Recording Server service by looking at the Recording Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the recording server in question The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Management Server service Recording Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is also known as the system tray It is located at the far right of the management recording server s Windows taskbar IMPORTANT When the Recording Server service is running it is very important that neither Windows Explorer nor other programs are accessing Media Database files or folders associated with your system setup Otherwise the recording server might not be able to rename or
37. all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the system Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required You have two entry points for managing speakers e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices select Speakers expand the required device group and select the required speaker If no device groups are available you must first group your speakers Refer to About Device Groups on page 104 for information about creating groups as well as adding speakers to your groups e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server and select the required speaker Check the product release notes to verify that speakers are supported for the devices and firmware used ENABLE SPEAKERS When speakers are detected with the wizard Add Hardware they are by default disabled You can enable speakers when needed If a device has several speakers you can enable one some or all of them as required On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 107 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which th
38. amp d is information is transferred to the system In which case f it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server 7 A e Je abe In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible 3j 33 F Item database being repaired ex P F en oF Item requires attention cub PF qd d o 9 Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this example Sp Fa a where Item is enabled is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item Manage output On many devices you are able to attach external units to output ports on the device This allows you to activate deactivate lights sirens etc through the system On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 113 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Output may be used when creating rules see Manage rules on page 165 You can create rules that automatically activate or deactivate outputs and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed Output can also be triggered manually from the Management Client and the Ocularis Client Devices output ports are automatically detected when you add the devices to the system t
39. and close the window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 183 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e You add users to roles through the Management Client almost as when adding users from Active Directory However when adding users you must refer to particular users on particular computers as in this example where the user USEROO 1 on the computer PC007 is added Seleched upers and aeue ga pi Select Users or Groups ax Be T 1 ei M Select this obeect Type Lees or Grop bye Types From tees kcalhien Loco E niei the oberi names ba paled 101 mem Check Hames xx Ceea a omm When users added this way log in to the system the user must not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of their user names Example of a correctly specified user name USEROO1 Example of an incorrectly specified user name PCOOT1 USERO0 1 The users should of course still specify their passwords etc Manage roles Roles determine which of your system s features users and groups see Manage users and groups on page 182 are able to use In other words roles determine rights and handles security within the application You define roles first Added roles automatically also become view groups One role is predefined in the system and cannot be deleted the Administrators Role In addition to th
40. and description Click Next On the wizard s second step verify that Email is selected click Next 4 Onthe wizard s third step specify recipient subject message text and time between e mails Add Motification Profile EJ Ena Pcpseni s SES AUS S ubyect SDence iren detection a TT agger imet Kes sieges beet Aude systen adora ck inks bo incer vaias wi baid Becode Server name Hatchin Dink nae Fluis rere Ingger me Taree bh eah DA tuni eit E mul Daa ide mager decade A1 Heg Firath Cancel On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 177 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES If you want send a test e mail notification to the specified recipients click Test E mail If you want to include pre alarm still images in e mail notifications under the notification profile select nclude images and specify number of images time between images and whether images should be embedded in e mail or not 7 If you want to include AVI video clips in e mail notifications under the notification profile select Include images and specify time before and after event and frame rate 8 Click Finish Use rules to trigger e mail notifications You use the Manage Rule for creating rules The wizard takes you through all required steps You specify the use of a notification profile during the step on which you specify the rule s actions First Select actions bo perform Start recoding Set live frame rate o
41. and status details on cameras and Ocularis CS servers but not on any other device types Also you cannot define cameras user rights scheduling or other settings for the Ocularis CS installation or see previews of the cameras in your system All necessary Ocularis CS settings must be made in Ocularis CS s Administrator application or other relevant Ocularis CS applications For client users it will be completely transparent whether feeds come from an Ocularis CS server or from a recording server in your system The users have access to cameras depending on their roles defined in the Management Client If a role has borrowed user rights from an added Ocularis CS server users with that role have access to data from the Ocularis CS server according to the borrowed user rights Prerequisites for access roles for Ocularis CS servers On the Ocularis CS server open the mage Server Administrator window to see if one of the Ocularis CS users has user rights that can be used in connection with a role in your system Write the Ocularis CS user s user name and password or Windows account down You will need this information when you use the Management Client to define roles with access to Ocularis CS servers Note that user names and passwords are case sensitive You can also create a new user in Ocularis CS and assign the required user rights in Ocularis CS so they match the role in your system Refer to the Ocularis CS documentation for more inform
42. and will not be able to send data to the surveillance system If you exceed the grace day period before you activate a license the license is not lost You can activate the license as usual Configuration added cameras defined recording servers and other settings will not be removed from the Management Client if a license is activated too late About licenses When you purchase the system you also purchase a certain number of licenses for device channels Device channels are typically cameras but could also be dedicated input output boxes At first when you have installed the various system components configured the system and added recording servers and cameras through the Management Client the surveillance system runs on temporary licenses which need to be activated before a certain period ends This is the grace day period When the new surveillance system is working we recommend that you activate your licenses see Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline on page 44 before you make the final adjustments The reason is that you must activate your licenses before the grace day period expires since all recording servers and cameras for which no licenses have been activated will not be able to send data to the surveillance system if the grace day period is expired Devices which require a license You need licenses for the number of device channels you want to run on the system Device channels are typically cameras but coul
43. archive is located on a network drive which is temporarily unavailable the system will retry archiving after one minute If that fails another retry will take place after yet another minute and so forth If the time of the next scheduled archiving is reached between two retries an archiving attempt will be made at the scheduled time if that attempt fails the system will retry archiving after an hour and so forth What happens if archiving is not finished before the next scheduled archiving Your system inserts a compulsory period of archiving free time after each finished archiving job This ensures that archiving jobs do not overlap in time About recording servers Recording servers are used for recording video feeds and for communicating with cameras and other devices A surveillance system will typically contain several recording servers although only a single recording server is required for the system to work Recording servers on your system i e computers with the recording server software installed and configured to communicate with a management server will be listed in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 when you expand the Servers folder in the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and then select the Recording Servers node On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 65 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Site Navigation E3 Recording Server BE XServe i Rec
44. arngned to new mulicadt resmi that apa etad onthe seconding pies IP adde Shige 232 0 1 0 End 232 011 0 Pol 5 lat EDO End 70D Source IP address For all multicast dream nam IPs OO Wee deik rbedace Pee Wine delet nieracs Daiege am options HTU 1 TIL 128 brio Setting od Storage Fake Multicast Jg Mehak s WHAT IS MULTICASTING In regular network communication each data packet is sent from a single sender to a single recipient a process known as unicasting With multicasting however you can send a single data packet from a server to multiple recipients clients within a group Multicasting can help save bandwidth e When using unicasting the source must transmit one data stream for each recipient e When using multicasting only a single data stream is required on each network segment Multicasting is an interesting option for streaming live video from recording servers to Ocularis Client s since video streams are not duplicated on each network segment Multicasting as described here is not streaming of video from camera to servers With multicasting you work with a clearly defined group of recipients based on options such as IP address ranges the ability to enable disable multicast for individual cameras the ability to define largest acceptable data packet size MTU the maximum number of routers a data packet must be forwarded between TTL and so on So multicasting should not be confused wi
45. as part of the basic administration on the Recording server service Failover Server service 16 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal The path to the media database The media database is the recording server failover recording server s default Media database storage area that is the default location in which recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases If required you can later change the path and or add paths to more storage area locations Select SQL type In the installer dialogs see Install your system Custom option on page 15 you must decide what to do regarding SQL database see Install your system Distributed option on page 15 The options are Install SQL Server 2008 Express on this computer Use the installed Microsoft SQL Server Express database on this computer or Use an existing SQL Server on the network As indicated the wording used for selecting SQL server type varies depending on whether you already have installed an SQL database on the current machine o First option when you have no SQL database installed Install SQL Server 2008 Express on this computer First option when you have an SQL database installed Use the installed Microsoft SQL Server Express database on this computer o Second option Use an existing SQL Server on the network is the second option However it can be difficult to determine which SQL server type is
46. change the settings that are available for both devices namely settings B and C No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Set NetMatrix Makes video from the selected cameras appear on a computer capable of displaying to view devices NetMatrix triggered video When you select this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to select a NetMatrix recipient and one or more devices from which to display video on the selected NetMatrix recipient This type of action lets you select only a single NetMatrix recipient at a time If you want to make video from the selected devices appear on more than one NetMatrix recipient you should create a rule for each required NetMatrix recipient NetMatrix is not used with Ocularis Send SNMP trap Generates a small message which logs events on selected devices The text of SNMP traps are auto generated and cannot be customized It will typically contain the source type and name of the device on which the event occurred To configure who receives SNMP trap messages refer to SNMP support see About SNMP support on page 251 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Retrieve edge st
47. computer from which the remote user caused the logged incident e Rule Name o Rule Log only Name of the rule triggering the log entry e Generator Type o Rule Log only Type of equipment on which the logged incident was generated Since the log entries are administrator defined and relate to incidents in your system generator type will normally be System e Generator Name o Rule Log only Name if any of the equipment on which the logged incident was generated Navigate log If a log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane m 7 Pulli g amm xii Lx lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries Lunan indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page Le lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries Furthermore il in the lower left corner lets you jump to a specific date and time in the log 198 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Change log language 1 In the bottom part of the log pane in the Show log in drop down box select the wanted language Show login English United Sates bed 2 The log is displayed in the selected language Next time you open the
48. device drivers If you choose to update it might take a few minutes for your hardware devices to make contact with the new video device drivers after restarting your system This is due to several internal checks being performed on the newly installed drivers Prerequisites e Have your temporary license ic file ready The license file changes when your SLC changes so you are likely to have received a new license file when you purchased the new version When you install the management server the wizard asks you to specify the location of your license ic file which the system verifies before you can continue If you do not have your license file contact your Ocularis product vendor e Have your new product version ready If you have not purchased the software on a DVD you can download it from www onssi com e The management server stores your system s configuration in a database The system configuration database can be stored in two different ways 1 Ina SQL Server Express Edition database on the management server itself 2 Ina database on an existing SQL Server on your network If using 2 Administrator rights on the SQL Server are required whenever you want to create move or upgrade the management server s system configuration database on the SQL Server Once you are done creating moving or updating being the database owner of the management server s system configuration database on the SQL Server is sufficient Alternat
49. ee dace ee eee 209 Outgoing SMTP mail server settings ccccccseececesseeeceeseecceueeecsegeeeceaseesseeeecseneeesseseesseusesssagenenss 209 AVi Compression Settings ESTEE ahs Sane UESTRE 210 Manage local IP address ranges ccccseccsesceceseeseeececeeeeceueeseueesseeeecscessueesseeseeesessesessaeesseesenseesens 210 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 5 Contents Ocularis LS Ocularis ES ONSSI FEDERATED ARCHITEC TURE ccc orcs vcs oad edet emu Ga svo au ae dote dua tec o cubus e ae 212 ABOUT ONSSI FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE morron rir a ite peret s comm ovas ue cU Hb ade eda pub E AU Rie vn a 212 Important prerequisites when running federated sites seesseeesssesesseeeennene 212 Licensing of OnNSSI Federated Architecture eese nennen nnn nnns 214 Basic rules of federated sites 20 0 0 cecccecccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeececeseeeesseeeeseueesecessaeesseeeeseueesseeessneeesseeess 214 Principles for setting up federated SITES ceccccecccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseecesaeeesseeeeseeesseessneetsnaaeess 214 Administrators role and federated sites cccccccccccseccceececeeeeceeececeececeecesseeeeseeeesaeessaeeeseeeesseeessaeees 215 Possibilities and constrains of federated sites sessssssssssesssseeeeeeeeneen ener 215 Frequently asked questions to federated sites ccc ceccccecccceececeeceteeeeeseeeeceeseceasessaeeeseeesseeessaeeees 215 Federated sit
50. event from devices recordar xarvar Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content O Event Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply for example Motion Started O Devices recording server management server When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link lets you specify the devices on which the event should occur in order for the rule to apply Depending on your event specification you may be able to select from a list of cameras inputs outputs etc In this example illustration the selectable devices are all cameras On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 169 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Select Group Members Device Groups Recorders Senad mp Cersa 1 on Ses 209 HFD Camera 1010573 H Recording Serwa 1 CP Daraa 1 on Boas ZVIM Camera 10 10 50 74 Carag 1 anis 2005 ls Damen onse 212 PIS Camera 10 10 50 71 Tp Camera on Asia 2103 Fb Camera 1 ones 233D Camera 10 10 5053 up Camera 1 on doo AA Sp Camera 1 on sis 211 Sp Camera 1 ons 212 p Camera ondoxt 223 CP Camera on Axis P33 Cp Camera Ton tsar Q7 Cara l oon s OS Fisco cher ey Seno You specify the required devices by moving them from the Available devices list to the Selected devices list To move a device from the Available devices list to the Selected devices list
51. example a description of the server s physical location The Sequence tab e Specify the failover sequence Use Up and Down to set the wanted sequence of regular failover recording servers within the group Assign failover recording servers On the Failover tab of a recording server you can choose between 3 different types of failover setups a No failover setup b A primary secondary failover setup c A hot standby setup If you select b and c you must select the specific server groups With b you must also select a primary and optionally a secondary failover group If the recording server becomes unavailable a failover recording server from the primary failover group will take over If you have also selected a secondary failover group a failover recording server from the secondary group will take over in case all failover recording servers in the primary failover group are busy This way you only risk not having a failover solution in the rare case when all failover recording servers in the primary as well as in the secondary failover group are busy 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select Servers Recording Servers This opens a list of recording servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the wanted recording server go to the Failover tab 3 To choose failover setup type see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 select either None
52. external factors The following are examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera databases e Vibration make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable e Strong heat make sure the server has adequate ventilation e Strong magnetic fields avoid e Power outages make sure you use a UPS see Power outages Use a UPS on page 242 e Static electricity make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk drive e Fire water etc avoid 242 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES SQL database administration SQL database administration Update SQL server address When a system is installed as a trial or if a large installation is restructured a need for using a different SQL database may arise This can be handled with the Update SQL Server Address tool With it you can change the addresses of the SQL servers used by the management server and the log server Only limitation is that you cannot change the management server SQL address at the same time as the log sever SQL address It is however possible to do so sequentially IMPORTANT This SQL update must be done locally on the machine where the management server or log server are installed you cannot do it from the Management Client If your management server is not located on the same machine you can still use the tool but you will have to run it on both the machine where
53. fm Cas You can still select or clear such square filled check boxes but note that your choice will in that case apply for all devices within the device group Alternatively select the individual devices in the device group to verify exactly which devices the right in question applies for PTZ RIGHTS Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Relevant only if PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are available on your system the PTZ tab lets you specify which features users groups with the selected role should be able to use in the Ocularis Client The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client Note that only PTZ cameras and device groups containing PTZ cameras are available for selection The following rights are available e Allow PTZ Control Determines if the selected role is able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s o False Users groups with the selected role will not be able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s o True Users groups with the selected role will be able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s e PTZ Priority Determines the priority of PTZ cameras When several users on a surveillance system wish
54. following items under Devices have an Info tab Cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 e Hardware see About hardware on page 55 Microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 Speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 Properties Cys eo Dome nist Fd anres Hid S ta Foecepheon Cam Dueienpisen Caner mumie on tall bear tecephon derk Corner Heceplon aea lucky doo ho g ce supplies iwe Hamas belephone ext 4T Hbrdesmie rores Boss ATO Widen Sawa 00 TOLSO Z3 GoTo Lik runner SPECIFY HARDWARE AND DEVICE INFO PROPERTIES Name Name of the item Not compulsory but highly recommended Used whenever the item is listed in the system and clients Does not have to be unique To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 119 Management Client Description Hardware name Unit number Shortcut Serial number Version MAC address Model Driver Software license code Windows user name Windows password 120 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Description of the item Optional Will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing t
55. for each required PTZ camera PTZ Protocol Absolute wr Absohte po Relative X o Absolute When operators use Pan Tilt Zoom controls for the camera the camera is adjusted relative to a fixed position often referred to as the camera s home position o Relative When operators use Pan Tilt Zoom controls for the camera the camera is adjusted relative to its current position Refer to the camera s documentation if in doubt 5 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save You are now able to configure preset positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 and patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 for the PTZ camera s in question Remote Retrieval tab The Remote Retrieval tab lets you handle remote recording retrieval settings for remote site hardware in an OnSSI Interconnect setup see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 132 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Properties Remote reinewal Rietieve recordings at max Hehneve recordngs bebhween SH Remote Retiaval Specify the following properties e Retrieve recordings at max Determines the maximum bandwidth in Kbits s to be used for retrieving recordings from a remote site camera Select the check box to enable limiting retrievals e Retrieve recordings between Determines that retrieval of recordings from a remote site camera shoul
56. from selected microphones speakers inputs and outputs The example shows a camera preview image with information about the resolution and data rate of the camera s live stream On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 33 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Live 6404460 SakB Camera 5 By default information shown with camera preview images will concern live streams shown in green text If you want recording stream information instead shown in red text in the Management Client s menu select View gt Show Recording Streams Toggle the Preview pane on and off in the View menu To resize the Preview pane drag its borders The larger the Preview pane the larger preview images and state information will appear Performance can be affected if the Preview pane displays preview images from many cameras at a high frame rate To control the number of preview images and their frame rate in the Tools menu select Options gt General 34 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Basics Get started Here the tasks typically involved in setting up the system are listed Note that although information is presented as a checklist a completed checklist does not in itself guarantee that the system will match the exact requirements of your organization To make the system match the needs of your organization it is highly recommended that you monitor and adjust the system once it is running F
57. hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to your system The wizard offers you two ways of detecting and adding hardware devices With automatic hardware detection the system automatically scans for available hardware within one or more specified IP address ranges With assisted hardware detection you manually specify the IP address of each required device Both options offer the possibility of automatically detecting the correct hardware drivers LI verity that each recording server s storage areas will meet your needs see About storage and archiving on page 61 What is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which the databases containing recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server are stored each individual camera database by default has a maximum size of 5 GB A default storage area is automatically created for each recording server when the recording server is installed on the system Connected cameras databases are stored in the recording server s default storage area unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for storing the databases of particular cameras If required a wizard lets you add further storage areas on the recording server computer itself or at another location for example on a network drive edit which storage area should be the default area and so on LJ verity that each recording server s archiving settings will meet y
58. icon in the Rules list Activating a rule When you want to activate the rule again select the required rule select the Activate check box and save the setting Validate rule s You are able to validate the content of an individual rule or all rules in one go Why would I need to validate the content of rules When you create a rule the Manage Rule ensures that all of the rule s elements make sense However when a rule has existed for some time one or more of the rule s elements may have been affected by other configuration and the rule may no longer work For example if a rule is triggered by a particular time profile the rule will not work if the time profile in question has subsequently been deleted Such unintended effects of configuration may be hard to keep an overview of rule validation helps you keep track of which rules have been affected IMPORTANT Validation takes place on a per rule basis each rule is validated in isolation It is currently not possible to validate rules against each other for example in order to see whether one rule conflicts with another rule not even if using the Validate All Rules feature Furthermore it is not possible to validate whether configuration of prerequisites outside the rule itself may prevent the rule from working For example a rule specifying that recording should take place when motion is detected by a 172 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Managem
59. in this example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item You are able to group different types of devices cameras microphones speakers inputs outputs on your system by using device groups The use of device groups has several benefits e Device groups help you maintain an intuitive overview of devices on your system 104 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client e You are able to specify common properties for all devices within a device group in one go e When dealing with roles see About roles on page 182 you are able to specify common security settings for all devices within a device group in one go e When dealing with rules see Manage rules on page 165 you are able to apply a rule for all devices within a device group in one go You can add as many device groups as required you are completely free to decide which devices to include The only restriction is that you cannot mix different types of devices for example cameras and speakers in a device group Red Sector Cameras Red Sector Back Door Car Red Sector Entrance Carn Red Sector Reception Car i3 Retail amp rea PTZ Cameras OTF amara E Lab Cambis espanding If a device group contains 400 devices or more the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing For camera groups the Streams tab is also unavailable for editing and viewi
60. input on page 109 and output see Manage output on page 113 events in item lists 108 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Item enabled Can communicate with the recording server a and can if required be started stopped automatically through a Item recording 4 qd Speaker being recorded Note that what is being said through i the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no 7B CE d e information is transferred to ie em In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule of and will not be able to communicate with the recording server R x In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible 26 x d 33 33 F Item database being repaired oe d d ea Item requires attention p PF qd do 9 Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this example E Fa where Item is enab
61. installation The following is only relevant if you use Windows Server 2003 If you try to install a large Windows Installer package or patch package in Windows Server 2003 this problem might occur if the Windows Installer process has insufficient continuous virtual memory to verify that the msi package or the msp package is correctly signed Solution A supported fix is available for Windows Server 2003 28 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal Issue Multi domain environments one way trusts not working Refer to Setup with one way trust on page 254 Remove system components The following procedure describes standard system component removal in recent Windows versions the procedure may be slightly different in older Windows versions 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and then o If using Category view find the Programs category and click Uninstall a program o If using Small icons or Large icons view select Programs and Features 2 Inthe list of currently installed programs right click the required OnSSI program or service Select Uninstall if you wish to uninstall all components Select Change if you only wish to uninstall some components 4 Follow the removal instructions Remove recording server To remove a recording server installed on another machine than the management server use the following procedure on the computer on which the recording server
62. is installed 1 Stop the Recording Server service by right clicking the recording server icon in the computer s notification area also known as the system tray then select Stop Recording Server service EN 2 Hy 10 23 AM 2 To remove follow the general removal procedure see Remove system components on page 29 3 Right click the Recording Server in step 2 of the general removal process What happens to the recording server s recordings During the removal process you are asked whether you want to keep the recording server s recordings On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 29 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Management Client Overview The Management Client is the administration client used for configuration and day to day administration of the recording component Management Server The Management Client software is typically installed see Installation overview on page 13 on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Management Client s elements Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable The Management Client window is divided into a number of panes The number of panes will change depending on your task The following illustrations outline the Management Client window s default layout the window layout can be customized see Customize the Management Client s layout on page 39 and may therefore be different on
63. is used for example for handling PTZ camera control Web server URL commands and for handling browse and live requests from Ocularis Clients The URL will include the port number used for web server communication typically port 7563 Non editable field displaying the time zone in which the recording server is Time zone located Storage tab recording server properties Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable On the Storage tab you are able to setup manage and view storage areas for selected recording servers Refer to About storage and archiving on page 61 for at more general introduction to recoding an archiving What is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which database content primarily recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server is stored in at least a recording database and possibly archived in a number of archiving databases A default storage area with a default recording database is automatically created for each recording server when the recording server is installed on the system Unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for particular cameras recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases in the recording server s default storage area Archives can be added to a storage area at any time convenient To access the Storage tab select the required recording server in the O
64. log it is reset to the default language Search log To search a log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane 1 Specify your search criteria by selecting the required user name location etc from the lists Tip You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get 2 Click Refresh to make the log page reflect your search criteria Tip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click Clear Export log You are able to export logs and save the exported logs as tab delimited text txt files at a location of your choice Example of an exported log txt file Example of an exported log txt file viewed in Notepad E Mysysbeesl egExpert td Masegad c ed Fie Ede Fons Wee Heb ITimest yp Level Event Type Source Dexcriptinn A BRE Pra ie Re ee PM EFP F cCommunlcarila n Error Camara l4 vice cCommu nlcarion Error PE r007 1 733 PH Error cCmsunlcation Error casera 10 Device communication Error 1 4 2007 1 47 37 PM Error Communication error Camara 17 Device communicarion error 1 4 2007 1 47 39 PM Error Communication Error Camera 11 Device communication Error avo 1 4B 24 PM Error Commun cation Error camara 18 Dewvica communlcariaon Error IlG z007 Lids PM Error communication Error Cameri LA Device Communication Error 1 707 1 40 1 7 PM EFror cCommunic
65. make sure that the recording server is ready to store recordings again Only then is the responsibility for storing recordings handed back to the standard recording server So a loss of recordings at this stage of the process is very unlikely How will clients experience a failover setup Clients should hardly notice that a failover recording server is taking over There will however be a short break usually only some seconds when the failover recording server is taking over During this break there will be no access to video from the affected recording server Clients will be able to view live video as soon as the failover recording server has taken over Since recent recordings are stored on the failover recording server they will also be able to play back recordings from after the failover recording server took over Clients will not be able to play back older recordings stored only on the affected recording server until that recording server is functioning again and has taken over from the failover recording server It will be possible to access archived recordings stored at accessible locations i e on available network drives but not archived recordings stored at inaccessible locations i e on the unavailable recording server itself or on an unavailable network drive When the recording server is functioning again there will usually be a merging process during which failover recordings are merged back into the recording server s database Dur
66. move relevant media files Unfortunately this might bring the recording server to a halt If this situation has already occurred stop the Recording Server service close the program accessing the media file s or folder s in question and simply restart the Recording Server service d EN KA Ly 10 33 aM EN gO Hy 10 33 AM RC O hi n Access the server service on page 244 Start the server service on page 244 Stop the server service on page 245 Change recording server settings on page 245 View status messages on page 245 View version information on page 245 Work with recording server settings in details see Recording server settings on page 246 Read server service state icons See Read server service icons management recording and failover on page 246 Access the server service 1 Right click the notification area s server service icon 2 From the menu that appears depending on server type select the needed icon If using multiple instances see Multiple recording server instances on page 25 of the Recording Server service a sub menu lets you select whether you want to start a particular instance or all instances Start the server service 1 Access the server service on page 244 2 Select either Start Management Server service or Start Recording Server service 244 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Services administration Stop the server service While the
67. non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table repertas IM E 4 E General Enghireszs 5 Cobak Ti Compression 5 RHesolulsn eet a rra Flotahon i El JPEG zirnamed Fits puer vecond E Tip Some organizations may be required to establish a secure HTTPS connection using SSL Secure Sockets Layer To establish such a connection you must upload a certificate to the hardware device to enable HTTPS support on the hardware device Certificates are generated differently by camera vendors Consult your camera vendor to find out how to get a certificate for your hardware device 1 Inthe Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the required recording server to see its device groups Select the relevant hardware under the wanted device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s hardware will be listed j amp BU RIP R ELA RCR RONDA EUR RON ROSOOECN RCH ROSOD RON RON MOM RON RON MOD N RON NOS OR EDU RON RC RON p Camera 6 dp Input 1 we Output 1 Ams 2100 Camera 10 10 69 4 2 Select if you want to enable HTTPS on the hardware device This is not enabled by default 3 Enter the port to which the HTTPS connection is connected The port number can be any numeric value between 1 and 65535 4 M
68. not available a stop criterion must be defined for this type of rule We still need to define exactly which kind of stop action should take place when the time period ends Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 8 Inthis step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions gt In this example Based on the start action start patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action Stop patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is stopped immediately when the time period ends ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval thin the time period 1 00 to 3 00 and day of week is Saturday tart patrolling on Retail Area PTZ using Retail Area Saturday Afternoon with PT priority SC erform an action when time interval ends top patrolling immediately This is just what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g 60 seconds Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window Mang Retail Area F1 aa Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later Acte 9 Click Finish This will add your new rule
69. on a hardware or device see Events tab overview on page 128 Predefined events devices Bookmark Reference Requested N A Occurs when a connection to a device is lost or when an attempt is made TEESE BCI HEIDE to communicate with a device and the attempt is unsuccessful Communication Started Device Occurs when communication with a device is successfully established Communication Stopped Device Occurs when communication with a device is successfully stopped Feed overflow a k a Media overflow occurs when a recording server is unable to process received video as quickly as specified in the configuration and therefore is forced to discard some images If the server is healthy feed overflow usually happens because of slow disk writes It can be resolved either by reducing the amount of data written or by improving the storage system s performance Reduce the amount of written data by reducing frame rates resolution or image quality on your cameras This will in general degrade recording quality If you are not interested in that instead improve your storage system s performance by installing extra drives to share the load or by installing faster disks or controllers Tip This rare event can be used for triggering actions that will help you avoid the problem e g for lowering the recording frame rate Feed Overflow Started Occurs when feed overflow see description of the Feed Overflow Started Feed Overflow Stopped
70. one Multiple recording server instances Some information in this section may not be relevant due to differences in software versions It is only recommended to install multiple instances of the Recording Server service on the same server under the following conditions If you e are running Ocularis ES and are upgrading from Ocularis ES version 4 1 or older and e are already running more 32 bit Recording Server service instances on the same server Since it is not possible to move devices cameras from one recording server to another setups running more than one 32 bit Recording Server service instances on the same server will need to maintain this structure For all other setups the newer 64 bit recording server eliminates the need for running more 32 bit instances on the same server Install multiple recording server instances During the recording server installation see Installation overview on page 13 select the required number of instances A maximum of 99 recording server instances is allowed on a single server Using multiple recording server instances does not require additional licenses In the Management Client each recording server instance will be displayed separately allowing you to configure each instance separately When managing the Recording Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 by right clicking its icon in the notification area on the server itse
71. one level up e Synchronization of hierarchy A parent always contains an updated list of all its currently attached children children s children etc But when distant communication is needed it takes place level by level each level forwarding and returning communication until it reaches the server requesting the information Depending on the number of levels that must be updated changes to a hierarchy might take a little time to become visible in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 refer to Refresh site hierarchy on page 223 The federated hierarchy has a regularly scheduled synchronization between sites as well as management triggered synchronization every time a site is added or removed This synchronization only contains site configuration data and each time will send less than 1MB In addition to the data sent during synchronization video or configuration data will be sent when a user or administrator views live or recorded video or configures the system The amount of data in this case depends on what and how much is being viewed It is not possible to schedule your own synchronizations Principles for setting up federated sites When working with federated architecture the link between management servers is established from the management server wanting to become parent to another management server Theoretically establishment of a parent child relationship happens as follows 1 The parent sends a l
72. or a rule can be set up In some scenarios remote sites are on line and in others off line most of the time This is often industry specific For some industries it is common for the central site to be permanently on line with its remote sites for example a retail HQ central site and a number of shops remote sites For other industries like transportation the remote sites are mobile for example busses trains ships and so on and only able to establish network connection randomly Should the network connection fail during a commenced remote recording retrieval the job continues at next given opportunity Note that if an automatic retrieval or request for retrieval from the Ocularis Client is received outside the time interval specified on the Remote Retrieval tab it will be accepted but not started until the selected time interval is reached New remote recording retrieval jobs will queue and start when the allowed time interval is reached Pending remote recording retrieval jobs can be viewed from the System Dashboard s Current Tasks see About current task on page 195 After connection failure missing remote recordings are per default retrieved from remote sites Uses remote sites like a recording server uses the edge storage on a camera see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 Typically remote sites are on line with their central site feeding it a live stream that the central site records Should the network
73. page 161 in the system Technically they occur on the actual hardware device rather than on the surveillance system HARDWARE Some hardware is capable of creating events itself These events can be used when creating event based rules see Events overview on page 161 in the system Technically they occur on the actual hardware device rather than on the surveillance system In OnSSI Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but user defined see Manage user defined events on page 180 events must be added manually To view events added after an OnSSI Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 60 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 129 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES ADD AN EVENT 1 Onthe Events Tab click Add This opens the Select Driver Event window 2 Select the required event You can only select one event at a time 3 Click OK The selected event will be added to the Events tab s list of configured events 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save Note that deleting an event when possible affects any rules in which the event is used In OnSSI Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but user defined see Manage user defined events on page 180 events must be added manually To v
74. profile click OK in the Time Profile window You will be returned to the Overview pane s Time Profiles list 4 Odober2010 gt SMTWTFS 12 34587829 10 11 ie 15 16 17 18 45 85 22 23 24 25 BEES 20 30 31 i Y OU prowse mol i l5 DY clic K lI IQ UIC olfld VDAUCK IULWal DUITOnS Tip In the Time Profile Information window edit the time profile as required Remember that a time profile may contain more than one time period and that time periods may be recurring Tip The small month overview in the top right corner of the Time Profile Information window can help you get a quick overview of the time periods covered by the time profile as dates containing specified times are highlighted in bold In this example the bold dates indicate that time periods have been specified on several days and that a recurring time may have been specified on Mondays On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 175 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Manage day length time profiles When cameras are placed outside it is often required to lower the cameras resolution enable black white or change other settings when it gets dark or vice versa when it gets light The further north or south from the equator the cameras are placed the more the sunrise and sunset time varies during the year This makes it impossible to use normal fixed time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 173 to adjusts camera settings according to light conditions To o
75. recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server x In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible 26 x d x 33 33 F Item database being repaired oe d d ea Item requires attention Cn PF qd do 9 Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this example E Fa e where Item is enabled is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item Define in and output related rules To be able to automatically e activate an output or trigger an event activated by an output you must after you have enabled an output e trigger an action activated by an input you must after you have enabled the input and created an event based on the input include it in a rule refer to Manage Output on page 113 or Manage Input on page 109 for more information For example you may create a rule specifying that e a siren should sound if motion is detected on a particular camera or you may create a rule specifying that a camera should start recording if a siren sounds output e acamera should record if a particular input is activated input On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 117 Management Client Ocularis
76. relevant site right click and click Accept Inclusion in Hierarchy On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 221 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 2 Click Yes 3 The new parent child link is established and the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated with the normal site l gt icon for the selected site Due to synchronization issues any changes made to children located far from your home site might take some time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 214 Synchronization of Hierarchy Connect to another site in hierarchy You can connect to all sites in the federated architecture if your administrator settings are correct Prerequisites To connect from one site in your hierarchy to another one of the following two scenarios must be true e The management server is installed as a network service Both computers involved must be added as users to each other s Ocularis system administrator role Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles e The management server is installed as a user account This user account must be a member of the administrator group of the server being linked to Refer to Administrator role and federated sites section see Administrators role and federated sites on page 215 Connect to another site in hierarchy Click the wanted site in the Federated Site Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33
77. required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the relevant recording server and find the device on which the output is placed 3 Right click the required output and select Enabled SPECIFY OUTPUT PROPERTIES Each output has several properties which can be found on the output s Settings and Info tabs You can access these tabs in two ways e Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices and select Outputs then in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required outputs folder and select the required output Of e Inthe Overview pane select a device group to change the settings for all outputs in this group or expand a device group and select the required output The properties of the selected output or the common properties for all outputs in a selected device group will be displayed on the following tabs Settings and Info AUTOMATIC MANUAL ACTIVATION OF OUTPUT Output can be activated automatically or manually e Automatic activation of output With the Management Client s rules see Manage rules on page 165 feature you are able to create rules that automatically activate or deactivate output and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed 114 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis E
78. required and group them as needed However a failover recording server can only be a member of one group at a time Failover recording servers in a failover group are ordered in sequence This sequence determines in which order the failover recording servers should take over from a recording server when needed By default this sequence will reflects the order in which the failover recording servers have been incorporated in the failover group first in is first in sequence but this can easily be changed Failover recording servers are installed like regular recording servers refer to Install failover recording server see Install failover recording server recording server on page 16 Once failover recording servers are installed they automatically become visible in the Management Client Tip If a new failover recording server does not become visible in the Management Client verify that the failover recording server has been configured with the correct IP address hostname of the management server Also verify that the user account under which the Failover Server service runs has access to your system with administrator rights By default failover recording servers are enabled If you have disabled it you must enable it see Setup and enable failover recording servers on page 237 before it can take over from recording servers All failover recording servers should always be installed on separate computers It is possible to specify
79. seconds you require This setting is used to specify the end of the AVI file By default the AVI file will end 4 seconds after the notification profile is triggered You can change this to the number of seconds you require Specify the number of frames per second you want the AVI file to contain Default is five frames per second The higher the frame rate the higher the image quality and AVI file size 179 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Manage user defined events If the event you require is not on the Events Overview list you can create your own user defined events Such user defined events can be useful if you want to integrate other systems with your surveillance system Example With user defined events you can use data received from a third party access control system as events in the system the events can subsequently trigger actions This way you can for example begin recording video from relevant cameras when somebody enters a building User defined events can also be used for manually triggering events while viewing live video in the Ocularis Client or automatically if used in rules see Manage rules on page 165 Example When user defined event 37 occurs PTZ camera 224 should stop patrolling and go to preset position 18 Through roles see Specify rights of a role on page 187 you define which of your users should be able to trigger the user defined events User defined events can be used in tw
80. see About current task on page 195 Here you can get an overview of tasks under a selected recording server e Configuration Report see About configuration report on page 195 From here you can decide what to include in your system configuration reports and print them About system monitor From the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand System Dashboard and click System Monitor This brings up the System Monitor using embedded browser technology If you access the system monitor from a server operating system you might experience a message regarding Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration Follow instructions in the message in order to add the System Monitor page to the Trusted sites zone before proceeding A Data Collector Server service is dedicated to collect performance counter values on servers and cameras to be used in the System Monitor functionality About Data Collector Server service The Data Collector Server service is automatically installed on the same machines as the management recording and log server s Normally the Data Collector Server service requires no maintenance However if the service does stops it will result in missing live feed to the System Monitor clearly indicated in the system monitor by error texts On the machine where the Data Collector Server service is installed do the following to restart it 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and then o
81. see why Once collection is complete click Next 5 Choose to enable or disable successfully detected hardware and cameras Detected hardware such as hardware device camera microphone and speaker is listed individually allowing you to for example add a hardware device s camera without enabling its speaker if needed 6 Select a default group for all device types or group the devices individually The devices are listed according to type for example camera microphone speaker Click Finish Tip Select the Show hardware running on other recording servers check box to see if detected hardware is running on other recording servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 53 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Address Range Scanning The Address Range Scanning option scans your network for relevant hardware devices and OnSSl Interconnect remote systems see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 based on your specifications regarding required IP ranges drivers and device user names and passwords 1 Select Address Range Scanning and click Next 2 Specify user names and passwords if your hardware devices are not using the factory default user name and password You can add as many user names and passwords as required by clicking Add Remember to select the nclude check box for each required device You must add and include at least one user name and password in order for the wizard to continue When ready click Next 3 Sele
82. select a notification profile and which devices to include pre alarm images from Only one notification profile can be selected it is not possible to select several notification profiles Tip Even though you are only able to select a single notification profile bear in mind that a single notification profile may contain several recipients This type of action requires that at least one notification profile see Manage notification profiles on page 176 has been set up Pre alarm images are only included if e mail notification is used and the nclude images option has been enabled for the notification profile in question No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Generates an entry in the rule log see Manage logs on page 197 When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify a text for the log entry Tip When specifying the log text you will be able to quickly insert variables such as DeviceName EventNamed etc into the log message wording No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Starts one or more plug ins When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to select
83. select which stream is the default one pr 2 w ge In the Record column select the check box if you want to use the stream for recorded video or leave it cleared if you only want to use it for live video 6 Inthe Edge Recording column it is indicated whether the selected stream supports edge recording see Record tab overview on page 125 or not T Click Save Manage Microphones On many devices you are able to attach external microphones and some devices even have built in microphones Devices microphones are automatically detected when you add the devices to your system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 53 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Microphones do not require separate licenses you can use as many microphones as required on your system You can use microphones completely independently of cameras Who is able to listen to audio recorded by microphones Users of the Ocularis Client can provided microphones are available and the users have the rights to use them listen to audio from microphones Roles determine users right to listen to microphones You cannot listen to microphones from the Management Client Tip the system comes with a default rule which ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the system Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required You have two entr
84. services 58 About roles 19 108 115 124 229 234 235 237 239 240 248 265 About rules 214 About rules and events 73 167 About security 235 About SNMP support 173 322 256 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES About storage and archiving 40 71 81 85 212 213 244 320 About system dashboard 250 About system monitor 250 About updates 8 About upgrading 88 About view groups 166 Accept inclusion in hierarchy 277 278 284 285 Access registered services configuration 267 Access the server service 314 315 Action menu items 42 Actions and Stop actions 158 167 184 186 192 193 201 203 253 Activate Register Licenses Offline 55 Activate Register Licenses Online 53 Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline 52 55 56 64 295 Activate licenses after grace day period 55 Active Directory 12 Active Directory user and group concepts 236 Add a configuration report 251 Add a device group 125 Add a patrolling profile 109 Add a preset position type 1 115 Add a role 225 238 Add a rule 71 217 Add a storage area 83 88 Add a stream 120 121 Add a user defined event 234 Add a view group 166 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Add an event 160 Add and edit registered services 267 Add basic user 248 Add hardware 39 61 63 68 78 96 121 122 128 131 132 137 270 Add hardwar
85. takes a very long time to initialize try turning the lens back and forth a bit This long initializing time might be due to the lens no being fitted optimally 100 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Fropertiez J60 Lens 4 Enable pancmomh supper immer ion Enables S panomorph APL number NIV Camera posten onenbation Ceding mount ss Lens hd Enable and disable panomorph support The panomorph feature is disabled by default To enable disable it select clear the 360 Lens tab s Enable panomorph support check box Panomorph settings When enabling the panomorph support functionality you must also select a Registered Panomorph Lens RPL number from the mmerVision Enables panomorph RPL number list This is to ensure identification and correct configuration of the lens used with the camera in question The RPL number is usually found on the lens itself or on the box it came in For details of ImmerVison panomorph lenses and RPLs see http www immervision com en home index php You must also indicate the physical position orientation of the camera in question This is done by selecting its position from the Camera position orientation list STREAMS TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable To access the Streams tab expand Devices in the Management Client s Site navigation pane see Panes O
86. the Surveillance database and make sure to e Select to backup from device e Select backup media type file e Find and select your backup file Surveillance bak e Select to overwrite the existing database 2 Follow the instructions in the tool to the end If you also backed up the SurveillanceLog database from the old management server restore it on the new management server using the same method Note that the system basically does not work while the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 is stopped it is important to remember to start the services again once you have finished restoring the database Manual backup and restore of system configuration Backing up your system database is always recommended In case of a disaster recovery scenario this offers you the ability to quickly restore your system configuration Furthermore being able to easily do a manual backup of your entire system configuration via your Management Client no need for third party tools offers you flexibility security and full control of your configuration The type of backup described in this topic is best suited if you have a smaller system setup and wish to do a one time non scheduled backup Besides manual backups it is strongly recommended to also configure regular scheduled system backups see Scheduled backup and restore of system configuration on page 226 especially if you run a larger system
87. the camera licenses Registering camera licenses may be done online or offline If the computer where the Management Client is installed has connectivity to the internet use the online method If not use the offline method Keep in mind that if there are multiple recording servers in the system cameras on each recorder must go through this process and be registered You can view the status of the recorder s camera licenses from the Site Navigation Pane Select License Information from the Basics node 44 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Activate Register Licenses Online 1 You must first register with the OnSS Licensing Portal This process need only be done once Open a browser and go to the following URL https rclicensing onssi com CustomerRegistration Enter your email address This will become your user name for the OnSSI Licensing Portal lt gt On To continue enter your E mail address and Recorder SLC Email Address Recorder SLC OnSSI License Portal Page Enter the SLC for the recorder This is the alohanumeric value found on the license file For instance the code should have 11 characters and be in the form similar to XXX XXXX XXXX Click Submit You will receive an email with your OnSSI Licensing Portal user name and password In the Management Client right click License Information and select Activate License Online An Activate Online p
88. the local time of your system s server e Description o All logs Description of the logged incident e Source Type o Rule Log only Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since log entries are administrator defined and relate to incidents in your system source type will normally be System o Event and System Logs only Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred for example Management Server or Device o Audit Log only Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since remote user access is handled by the management server source type will typically be Server o All logs Identification number of the logged incident On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 197 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e Event Type o All logs except Audit Log Type of event represented by the logged incident For more information about event types refer also to the events overview on page 161 e Source Name o All logs Name of the management server device etc on which the logged incident occurred e Service Name o Event and Rule Logs only Name of service on which the logged incident occurred e Audit Type o Audit Log only Type of logged incident e Granted o Audit Log only Information about whether the remote user action was allowed granted or not e User o Audit Log only User name of the remote user causing the logged incident e Location o Audit Log only IP address or host name of the
89. the procedure may be slightly different in older Windows versions 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and then o If using Category view find the Programs category and click Uninstall a program o If using Small icons or Large icons view select Programs and Features 2 Inthe list of currently installed programs right click the required OnSSI program or service 3 Select Uninstall if you wish to uninstall all components Select Change if you only wish to uninstall some components 4 Follow the removal instructions Note that you should not remove the device pack when upgrading you can install the new version on top of the old one The device pack should only be removed when whole system is uninstalled On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 233 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Failover recording servers regular hot standby About failover recording servers regular and hot standby Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable A failover recording server is a spare recording server which takes over from a normal recording server in case this becomes unavailable In the following the term failover recording server is used as an umbrella term for both regular failover recording servers and hot standby servers You can configure a failover recording server in two ways as a regular failover recording server or as a hot standb
90. the recording server and all of its associated hardware from the system If you are sure click Yes 5 The recording server and all of its associated hardware will be removed Replace a recording server If a recording server is malfunctioning and you want to replace it with a new server while letting the new server inherit the settings of the old malfunctioning recording server do the following 1 Retrieve the recording server ID from the old recording server a In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select Recording Servers then in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the old required recording server b In the Management Client s Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Storage tab c Press and hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting the nfo tab d Copy the recording server ID found in the lower part of the nfo tab Do not copy the term D but only the ID number itself ID FF BEZ AB RAE EE TA E fl f Mulicast N On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 67 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES IMPORTANT Stop the Recording Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 on the old recording server then in Windows Services set the service s Startup type to Disabled Replace recording server ID on the new recording server Make sure that the Recording
91. the service manually you can start and stop it the following way 1 Right click the notification area s failover recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Start Failover Recording Server service or Stop Failover Recording Server service depending on your needs Change the management server address The failover recording server must be able to communicate with your system s management server You therefore specify the IP address hostname of the management server during the installation of the failover recording server Should you later need to change the address of the management server you do it the following way In order to be able to change the management server address the Failover Recording Server service must be stopped 1 Stop the Failover Recording Server service see Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service on page 241 2 Right click the notification area s Failover Recording Server service icon again From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Failover Recording Server Settings window appears You are able to change the following setting o Management server hostname IP address Lets you specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the management server with which the failover recording server should be able to communicate View status messages 1 Right click the notification area s OnSS Failover Server service icon 2 F
92. this is that surveillance systems inherently rely on cameras whereas the use of microphones and so on is highly individual depending on organizations needs In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 under the required server enabled disabled devices are indicated the following way examples show indications for an output p Disabled e Enabled The same method for enabling disabling is used for cameras microphones speakers inputs and outputs To enable a camera input or output 1 In the Overview pane expand the required recording server and the required hardware device Right click the camera input or output you wish to enable 2 From the menu that appears select Enabled 3 Add the corresponding events to the camera input or output About OnSSI Interconnect Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable OnSSI Interconnect allows you to integrate a number of smaller physically fragmented and remote installations with an Ocularis ES central site These smaller sites called remote sites may even be installed on mobile units for example boats busses or trains and may not even be permanently connected to a network On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 57 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Overview of OnSSI Interconnect 1 1 OnSSI Interconnect central site 2 2 O0nSSI SMB Ocularis VMS Products and Ocularis CS driver handles the conne
93. to specify the stop action Restore default live frame rate Without this stop action the default frame rate would potentially never be restored You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Sets a particular frame rate to be used when saving recorded video from the selected cameras in the database instead of the cameras default recording frame rate When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify which recording frame rate to set and on which cameras Specifying recording frame rate is only possible for MJPEG a video codec technology for compressing and decompressing data with which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image This type of action also requires that recording has been enabled on the cameras to which the action will be linked You enable recording for a camera on the Record tab see Record tab overview on page 125 The maximum frame rate you will be able to specify will depend on the camera types in question and on their selected image resolution Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of Manage Rule the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Restore default recording frame rate Without this stop action the default recording frame rate would po
94. to the list of rules Rules JE G Rules s My First Rule i My Second Rule E Retail Area PT Z Saturday Aftemoon 150 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Use different PTZ patrolling profiles for day night rule In this example daytime is defined by a time profile covering the period between 08 00 and 20 00 on all days of the week and nights are defined as periods not covered by the daytime time profile This requires two near identical rules one for each patrolling profile When you have created the first rule you can make a copy of it and quickly create the second rule based on the copy Both rules are covered in this example Prerequisites This rule is based on a PTZ camera being able to patrol according to two different patrolling profiles and a time profile being used to determine which patrolling profile should be used Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e You have specified a time profile covering at least one of the time periods you want to differentiate between You could specify time profiles covering both time periods but it will not be necessary since rules can be set up to apply within as well as outside a time profile How to specify a time profile To specify a time profile expand Rules and Events in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select Time Profiles The Time Profiles list will a
95. triggered rule A third party SNMP management console can then receive information about the rule triggering event and operators of the SNMP management console can configure their system for further action as required The implementation uses Microsoft Windows SNMP Service for triggering SNMP traps The SNMP Service must therefore be installed on recording servers This will when the SNMP Service has been configured through its own user interface enable recording servers to send mib Management Information Base files to the SNMP management console Install SNMP service 1 On the required recording servers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe left side of the Add or Remove Programs dialog click Add Remove Windows Components This opens the Windows Components wizard 3 Inthe wizard select the check box next to Management and Monitoring Tools then click Details to open the Management and Monitoring Tools dialog 4 Inthe Management and Monitoring Tools dialog select the check box next to Simple Network Management Protocol then click OK 5 Backin the Windows Components wizard click Next and follow the wizard s further steps Configure SNMP service 1 Onthe required recording servers select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 2 Double click the SNMP Service 3 Select the Traps tab 4 Specify a community name and click
96. user activity e Event Log records event related information see Events overview on page 161 e Rule Log records rules see Manage rules on page 165 in which the Make new log entry gt action see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 has been specified e System Log records system related information Your system has a number of default settings related to the different logs refer to Handle log settings on page 200 Furthermore you are able to view logs in a number of different languages export them and save the exported logs as tab delimited text txt files at a location of your choice refer to Export log on page 199 View log To view a log expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select appropriate the log Read and copy logs Each row in a log represents a log entry A log entry contains a number of information fields which are listed and briefly explained Note it is also possible to double click any row and have all its details presented in a Log Details window From the Log Details window it is also possible to copy paste any log contents e Level o All logs Display an icon indicating the level of the log entry indicates info Gindicates error indicates warning e UTC Time o All logs Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard e Local Time o All logs Timestamp in
97. video device drivers on page 233 and other devices Typically installed on one or more separate computers rather than on the machine where the management server is installed The needed video device drivers are automatically installed along with the recording server Tip Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the cameras connected to a recording server As mentioned you get the drivers automatically during installation However new versions of the drivers are released from time to time and must be downloaded from the management server s download web page and installed manually e Management Client used for configuration and day to day management of the system Typically installed on the system administrator s workstation or similar e Log server provides the necessary functionality for logging information from your system By default installed on the management server but if you need to increase performance it can be installed on another server When installing the log server the URL address of the management server is expressed like this http 123 123 123 123 If installing the log server on the management server itself this should be specified as localhost The address can also include a port like this http 123 123 123 123 2356 or http Localhost 2356 The common installer saves all components on the management server s download web page no matter whether you install them or not Onc
98. want to move the component to Even though the Download Manager lets you control which components users can download and install you cannot use it as a users rights management tool Such rights are determined by roles see About roles on page 182 defined in the Management Client You access the Download Manager on the server running the management server software From Windows Start menu select A Programs OnSSI OnSSI Download Manager Download Manager s default configuration As indicated the Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard components right from the start The default configuration provides administrators a default setup with access to downloading extra or optional components Even though the web page in most cases opens automatically on the management server computer you will often want to install key components on other servers than the management server itself This is no problem since the web page can easily be accessed from other computers The Download Manager s configuration is represented in a tree structure The first level of the tree structure simply indicates what product you are working with On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 19 Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES The second level refers to the two targeted versions of the web page Default refers to the web page version viewed by end users Admin refers to the web page v
99. ways Network SQL Server If you are storing your system configuration in a database on an existing SQL 2005 or 2008 Server on your network you can point to the database s location on that SQL Server when installing the management server software on your new management server In that case only the following paragraph about management server hostname and IP address applies and you should ignore the rest of this topic Management server hostname and IP address When you move the management server from one physical server to another physical server it is by far the easiest to give the new server the same hostname and IP address as the old one This is due to the fact that the recording server will connect to the hostname and IP address of the old management server In case the new management server has been given a new hostname and or IP address the recording server will not be able to find the management server Manually stop each recording server in your system change their management server URL and when done restart them SQL Server Express Edition If you are storing your system configuration in a SQL Server Express Edition database on the management server itself it is important that you back up the existing management server s system configuration database before the move By backing up the database and subsequently restoring it on the new server you will avoid have to reconfigure your cameras rules time profiles etc after the move
100. what type of failover support you want on device level see Assign failover recording servers on page 74 For each device on a recording server you can select full live only or no failover support This helps you prioritize your failover resources and for example only set up failover for video and not for audio or only have failover on essential cameras not on less important ones A failover recording server has two services installed e A Failover Server service which handles the processes of taking over from the recording server By default this service is always running constantly checking the state of relevant recording servers e A Failover Recording Server service on page 240 which enables the failover recording server to act as a recording server In a failover group setup this service is only started when required i e when the regular failover recording server should take over from the recording server Starting this service typically takes a couple of seconds but may take longer depending on local security settings etc In a hot standby setup this service is always running allowing the hot standby server to take over faster than the regular failover recording server 234 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Failover recording servers regular hot standby Illustration Failover process in details Involved servers numbers in red 1 Recording server 2 Failover recording server 3 Mana
101. when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type nd In this example we want to base the rule on a time period Therefore we select Perform an action in a time interval First Select the nde tape to generate O Peon an action on ewent Perom an action in a time interval Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 4 Onthe wizard s next step specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply 7 In this example we want the rule to apply between 1 00 and 8 00 on Saturdays so two time conditions are required one which specifies use of a start time and end time and one which specifies use on a particular day of the week We therefore select Within the time period lt start time gt to lt end time gt and Day of week is lt day gt On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 147 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES First Select conditions to apply Within selected lime in lime profe Gutside selected time in time profile Within the time period startime to lt endime Dan of week is days Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half of the wizard window Next Edit the rule descnption iclick an underlined tem Perform an action in a time interval within the time period starttime to emdtime and day of week if days Tip If we had previously created a suitable time profile cov
102. will open the Time Profile window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 173 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Top Piia aisar l In the Time Profile window type a name for the new time profile in the Name field Optionally type a description of the new time profile in the Description field In the Time Profile window s calendar select either Day View Week View or Month View then right click inside the calendar and select either Add Single Time or Add Recurrence Time Tip If you select a time period by dragging in the calendar before right clicking the selected period will automatically be used in the dialog that appears when you select Add Single Time or Add Recurring Time Specify a single time When you select Add Single Time the Select Time window appears 2 a Select Time 7 3 Sta Ure Mon S 5 200 0 v LPH End lime Mon 8 5 20 0 v SOPH iw C A day evenit In the Select Time window specify Start time and End time If the time is to cover whole days select the A day event box Click OK Tip A time profile is able to contain several periods of time If you want your time profile to contain further periods of time add more single times or recurring times Specify a recurring time When you select Add Recurring Time the Select Recurring Time window appears 174 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Select Recurring Time Jo
103. window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 99 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Ee e iB gt e Eel e e Example only features are camera dependent 3 The Edit Preset window displays a preview image from the preset position in question use the navigation buttons and or sliders to change the preset position as required 4 Change the name number and description of the preset position as required Tip Use a descriptive name the name may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the item e g when using it in a rule 5 Click OK Test a preset position 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera 2 Click Test The Presets tab s preview image moves to the selected preset position Tip If the preview image does not appear to move to the selected preset position when you click Test verify that preview image does not already show the selected preset position In that case try testing another preset position first 360 LENS TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES Use of 360 technology requires a dedicated ImmerVision 360 lens mounted In this way 360 technology enables a o t panomorph technology through an advanced lens The 360 Lens tab lets you enable and configure panomorph support for the selected camera Tip If you find that a camera with an ImmerVision 360 lens mounted
104. your computer e When working with recording servers and devices cameras inputs outputs the Management Client window contains a menu bar and four panes see Panes Overview on page 33 e When working with rules time and notification profiles users roles and so on the Management Client window typically contains a menu bar and three panes 30 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client B S See CULA LL mL mn T i N e When viewing logs the Management Client window typically contains only the menu bar the Site Navigation and Federated Sites Hierarchy Pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and an overview area marked in gray jas E Pi i e ET i A xj ie Ran I Bey bee EH Site Navigation pane and Federated Hierarchy pane The Management Client is the feature rich administration client used for configuration and day to day administration of your system The Management Client software is typically installed on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Site Navigation pane Your main navigation element in the Management Client Name settings and configurations of the site you are logged into are reflected see Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 here site name is visible at the top of the pane The Management Client s features are grouped into categories reflecting the functionality of the software Tip Right clicking i
105. 1 Daacephon Coven Sector 1 Physically located in 100m 0553 For haadedaie quet coni aci eno lel ed 1224 Haji ramis MMO heb parser UAI Haginen 32 Fob oe Time zone GHT 1 06 Brussels Copentiagen Medij Para On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client INFO TAB PROPERTIES Name of the recording server The name will be used whenever the recording server is listed in the system and clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique Name To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well Description of the recording server The description will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the recording server s name in the Description Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 A description is not compulsory To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Host name Non editable field displaying the recording server s host name Non editable field displaying the URL of the recording server s web server The web server
106. 1 PACTIV Drect P 12 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL ccc cipecasacicecsicecececieweaisind ened bau au e aod sein va e ceded deemed onu aor uso i lavender 13 INS TALEATIONVOVERVIEW coda zesetes tae cabde zou uda dde aea etra Pone utu atit Quoi oa ptt d Peu tos aueiuut pedo ca faac d 13 Install your system preconditions 1lseeeeseesseseeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnn nnne nnn nns nnn 13 Install your system Single Server option ccccccccssecceeececceeeeecceseeecseececseeeecseuseesseseeesseesessanseeees 14 Install your system Distributed OPtiON cc ccccceeccceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeesaaeesseeeeseeseseeesseeeesaeeeess 15 Install your system lt C ustom OPON ronde ideo tecto teet usa D m ME UU EUR eU M DL ee a ud 15 Install failover recording server recording server sssssssssssseseneeeemene ener 16 More aput INS TANNING Pe PT aS 16 Install your system on virtual servers cri oo etx rodent ont Dupin ae tu Sbesweladeeediwndas Deukuncu en utu puo va ved un aga leans 18 DOWNLOAD MANAGER DOWNLOAD WEB PAGE ccc0secccccseeeccaseeeccseecccuseeseuseeeceaseececuseecsuneessaseseecuseessuseesssaes 19 Download Manager s default CONFIQUIATION ccccccseeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeesseeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeeas 19 Download Manager s standard installers user seesessssessssseseeeeenneneen enne 20 Add publish
107. 25 315 N Navigate log 256 NetMatrix rights 248 Network 272 261 Index Network tab recording server properties 92 273 303 Notification profile settings 232 O Ocularis CS 264 Ocularis CS server network configuration 266 OnSSI Federated Architecture 275 OnSSI Interconnect and licensing 69 Options 44 149 171 270 271 272 273 Outgoing SMTP mail server settings 230 272 Overview of OnSSI Interconnect 68 P Panes Overview 31 32 36 44 45 52 56 58 59 61 64 65 67 70 73 75 76 77 78 80 81 88 89 92 96 97 98 120 122 125 127 128 129 131 132 134 135 137 138 141 146 148 149 150 151 158 161 166 167 174 175 180 181 188 189 199 213 217 222 224 225 228 229 230 232 234 235 238 239 240 241 242 243 249 250 251 253 260 265 270 276 277 278 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 302 303 305 306 318 Panomorph settings 120 Pause PTZ patrolling and go to PTZ preset on input rule e 198 Playback remote system 69 70 152 Port numbers of special interest 22 Ports used by the system 22 327 Possibilities and constrains of federated sites 278 Power outages Use a UPS 310 Prebuffer 153 Predefined events devices 144 210 262 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Predefined events external 212 Predefined events hardware 210 Prerequisites 26 230 235 291 Prerequisites for access r
108. AND GROUPS TO ROLE 1 Select Windows user This opens the Select Users Computers and Groups dialog 186 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Select Users Camauters ar Groups Sejer ths nhjecitype Laam Groups of Eullin zacurity principals Otuect Types From the location Locabans Enter the cbject names In select peoples Check Names Acancad D amp Canal 2 Verify that the required object type is specified If for example you need to add a computer click Object Types and mark Computer Also verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click Locations to browse for the required domain 3 Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user names initials or other types of identifier which Active Directory can recognize Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the names initials etc you have typed are recognized by Active Directory 4 Click OK The selected users groups are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of users who have been assigned the selected role ASSIGN BASIC USERS TO ROLE a Select Basic User This opens the Select Basic Users to add to Role dialog Select Basic Liners to acid to Role Flisi t Ciri b Select the basic user s that you want to assign to this role Optional Click N
109. Add to list 5 Select the Destinations tab 6 Click Add and specify the IP address or host name of the server running your third party SNMP management station software 7 Click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 251 Daylight saving time Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Daylight saving time Daylight saving time Daylight saving time DST is the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less Typically clocks are adjusted forward one hour sometime during the spring season and adjusted backward sometime during the fall season therefore the saying spring forward fall back Note that use of DST varies between countries regions When you work with a surveillance system which is inherently time sensitive it is important that you know how the system handles DST Spring Switch from standard time to DST The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward Typically the clock jumps forward from 02 00 standard time to 03 00 DST and so the day has 23 hours In that case there is no data between 02 00 and 03 00 in the morning since that hour for that day did not exist Fall Switch from DST to standard time When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall you jump one hour back Typically the clock jumps backward from 02 00 DST to 01 00 standard time repeating that hour and so the day has 25 hours Server side handling Your s
110. Client Illustration of how prebuffered video audio is added to a recording This is the stream received by the system These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events However a rule specifies that recording should start 5 seconds prior to the start event so 5 seconds of prebuffered video or audio is added a This is what is actually recorded Enable and disable prebuffering Prebuffering is by default enabled with a prebuffer size of 3 seconds To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Pre buffer in seconds check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size Specify prebuffer Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Pre buffer check box Clicking the Pre buffer box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one second The number of seconds you specify in the Pre buffer checkbox must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements Example If like in this rule example you plan to be able to save video from five seconds prior to detected motion the prebuffer size must be at least five seconds Use prebuffer in rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules see Manage rules on page 165 specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Example Your ability to use this example rule specifying that recording should start on a camera 5
111. Default rules 208 217 Default start audio feed rule 209 Default start feed rule 209 Define in and output related rules 132 138 143 Define local IP address ranges 274 Define public address and port 93 Define roles with access to Ocularis CS servers 264 266 Delete a role 239 Delete an archive from within an existing storage 86 Delete an entire storage area 86 Detach a site from hierarchy 287 Device drivers 21 298 Device pack installer must be downloaded 20 21 Device rights 243 Devices 96 Devices which require a license 56 Disable enable hardware device 65 Download Manager 9 Download Manager and virus scanning 22 Download Manager download web page 9 13 16 19 58 Download Manager s default configuration 19 Download Manager s standard installers user 13 20 E Edit a preset position 119 Edit a time profile 228 Edit Axis Dispatch Service properties 58 Edit basic hardware device settings 64 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Edit local IP address ranges 274 Edit menu items 43 Edit Ocularis CS servers 266 Edit settings for a selected storage area or archive 87 Edit copy and rename a rule 222 Enable and disable motion detection 100 Enable and disable panomorph support 120 Enable and disable privacy masking 105 Enable input 132 Enable microphones 122 Enable multicasting 91 Enable mult
112. E VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS 3 551 dct ute eria uc RERO oui nde usa AA RI SL M IS LIM SUM M LR xe eO e DESDE I 233 REMOVE VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS Sessien aie e OR aie dete dee Dea Schede dots besos au ese In coe c Sede te enel eco ue 233 FAILOVER RECORDING SERVERS REGULAR HOT STANDBY cccsccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeseeeeseanes 234 ABOUT FAILOVER RECORDING SERVERS REGULAR AND HOT STANDBY 0sccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeesaeeeegs 234 Illustration Failover process in deltallS c oai e E edendo qus bene edict on sese ccs uode pe suas bes assidu esu un eade 235 FAQS Tallover recording Servel S sasies iarna a on cU iso iab e oo faces ea iiai 236 Install failover recording servers ssssssssssssseseseeeeenennen nennen nennen nnne nnn n nnne nnne nnns 237 Setup and enable failover recording servers cccseeccccseeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeesaees 237 Group failover recordifig Servers 3 ace nel cadet Geers oki e eoe odds ice edad ISO a eod Bebe 238 Assign failover Tecordilig SeIVelS 2 mesi e bbc catu ped ceu adonde suae nd Mace Soda eus Secun ecd ME Rp seda e Loos 239 Failover related events ccccccccscccsecceneccsceceeeceueeccecuecsueceaeeseeeceueeeessuessueeseecsuessueesaeesseeessaeegeeegas 240 Read failover recording server status ICONS cccccccsseecceeececcenseecceueeccsuseeeceeceeseueeesseeeeessueeessaneees 240 FAILOVER RECORDING SERVER SERVICE xii cc aaa
113. ERTIES ON THE EVENTS TAB Lets you define events based on changes of the input s state from circuit opened to circuit closed or the reverse order The events you define can subsequently be used in rules You can define events for a selected input but not for all inputs in a device group 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices and select nputs 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required input 3 Select the Events tab and click Add Popeia y Lonhgured Everts Select Driver Event EJ hes m cma Rs dn wn c inga Flere event ip Ing F sling event adi J ome G8 Senna Gp info Eventi 4 Inthe Select Driver Event dialog select the appropriate option Input Rising event Input Falling event or Input Changed event 5 Click OK Your selected type of input event will now appear in the Events tab s Configured events list To the right of the list settings for the selected input event are displayed in a table The table s first column lists available settings the second column lists the value of each setting The settings on the Events tab is determined entirely by the relevant devices and is likely to vary depending on the input selected Content may vary but you will typically see the following property e Enabled Select between True enabled or False disabled You are typically able to change the values 1 Select the row with the pro
114. ES Management Client Specifying a public port number is compulsory it is always a good idea that port numbers used on the firewall or NAT router are different from the ones used locally When using public access the firewall or NAT router used must be configured so requests sent to the public address and port are forwarded to the local address and port of relevant recording servers LOCAL IP RANGES There are cases when the recording server s public address should not be used When clients connect from the local network the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether a client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges see Manage local IP address ranges on page 210 which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network On the Network tab click Configure Read recording server icons The following icons are used in the Management Client to indicate the state of individual recording servers E Recording server is running HJ Recording server is communicating Recording server requires attention This icon will typically appear because the Recording Server service has been stopped Tip You can verify whether the recording server is stopped by looking at the recording server H icon in the notification area of the computer running the recording serve
115. Failover clusters e Either an external SQL database installed outside the server cluster or an internal SQL clustered service within the server cluster creating an internal SQL service will require the use of SQL Server Standard or a greater version which is capable of working as a clustered SQL Server e A Microsoft Windows Server 2003 2008 Enterprise or Data Center edition Install in a cluster Descriptions and illustrations might differ from what you see on your screen Installation and change of URL address 1 Install the management server and all its subcomponents see Installation overview on page 13 on the first server in the cluster The management server must be installed with a specific user and not as a network service This requires that you use the Custom install option see Install your system Custom option on page 15 Furthermore the specific user must have access to the shared network drive and preferably a non expiry password 2 After you have installed the management server and the Management Client on the first server in the cluster open the Management Client Tools select Registered Services a In the Add Remove Registered Services window select Log Service in the list click Edit b Inthe Edit Registered Service window change the URL address of the log service to the URL address of the cluster URLs Address External i hi fis uClu bert ens emit j j5 eiii r8 m4 Se On Net Sur
116. I Federated Architecture About OnSSI Federated Architecture This section is only relevant if you run Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture allows multiple individual standard systems also known as sites to interconnect in a parent child hierarchy of sites Federated Architecture works with Ocularis ES and Ocularis LS servers IMPORTANT Federated hierarchy is only possible with version 4 0 or newer of Ocularis ES Before installing the system refer to Important prerequisites when running federated sites on page 212 In this text the term parent refers to a parent site and child to a child site Through Federated Architecture client users based on their user rights have seamless access to video audio and other resources across individual sites In addition through a single login administrators can centrally manage all sites within the federated hierarchy again based on administration rights for the individual sites As it provides unlimited scalability flexibility and accessibility to video surveillance across multiple sites and has no limit to the number of sites you can add Federated Architecture is well suited for large installations covering multiple buildings campuses or entire city areas Each site in a federated hierarchy is installed and configured as a normal stand alone system with standard system components settings rules schedules administrators users and user rights Once each site has been installed
117. If using Category view find the System and Security category and click Administrative Tools o If using Small icons or Large icons click Administrative Tools 2 Double click Services 3 Locate the OnSSI Data Collector Server Right click it From the menu that appears select Start to restart the service Work with system monitor Use the and home icons to navigate the System Monitor From here you can view system information and create reports on e Management server shows data on your management server e Recording servers shows data on any number of recording servers in your surveillance setup which can be viewed per o Disks o Storage 194 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client o Network o Cameras e Failover recording servers shows data on any number of failover recording servers in your surveillance setup e Additional servers shows data on log servers etc in your surveillance setup e Cameras shows data on any camera in any camera group in your surveillance setup Each of these corresponds to a clickable expandable area most of which contains sub areas Each sub area represents a server When clicked they provide relevant dynamic data on this server The Cameras bar however contains a list of camera groups to select from Once a group is selected you can select a specific camera and see dynamic data for it All servers display CPU usage and available memory info
118. LS Ocularis ES For the following examples to be useful you should have general knowledge about managing rules see Manage rules on page 165 Also refer to Create Typical Rules on page 142 for other step by step descriptions of how to create rules Tip When you create a rule based on an in or output event the actions you specify in the rule do not have to relate to the device on which the external in or output was activated you can easily specify that the actions should take place on one or more different devices even across recording servers RULE THAT ACTIVATES DEACTIVATES AN OUTPUT 1 Start the Manage Rule and in step 1 select a rule type and if necessary a condition in step 2 2 n Manage Rule s step 3 Step 3 Actions select the Set device output to state action If you like the output to be activated deactivated immediately skip this step If you do not want to activate or deactivate the output immediately after the event click the immediately link in the initial rule description and select an interval between the event and the activation deactivation of the output Click OK to confirm your selection 4 Click the state link in the initial rule description and select whether you want to activate or deactivate the output Click OK to confirm your selection 5 Click the devices link in the initial rule description and select which output you want to activate or deactivate Click OK to confirm your selection 6 I
119. N FAILOVER RECORDING SERVERS On the Failover tab of a recording server you can choose between 3 different types of failover setups a Nofailover setup b Aprimary secondary failover setup c A hot standby setup If you select b and c you must select the specific server groups With b you must also select a primary and optionally a secondary failover group If the recording server becomes unavailable a failover recording server from the primary failover group will take over If you have also selected a secondary failover group a failover recording server from the secondary group will take over in case all failover recording servers in the primary failover group are busy This way you only risk not having a failover solution in the rare case when all failover recording servers in the primary as well as in the secondary failover group are busy 1 In the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select Servers Recording Servers This opens a list of recording servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the wanted recording server go to the Failover tab 3 To choose failover setup type see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 select either None Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group or Hot standby server If relevant select the needed server or groups from the dropdowns You cannot select the same failover group as both primary and sec
120. OLE Before deleting a role see About roles on page 182 keep in mind that you are able to delete a role even when users and or groups have been assigned to the role It is therefore often a good idea to verify if any users groups are assigned to the role before deleting it Verify if any users groups are assigned to a role e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and right click Roles e Select the required role in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select the Users and Groups tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Any users and or groups assigned to the role will be listed on the Users and Groups tab Delete a role 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles 2 Right click the unwanted role in the Overview pane and select Delete Role 3 Click Yes On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 185 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES If you delete a role this does not delete a view group based upon the role For information about deleting view groups refer to Manage view groups on page 135 VIEW EFFECTIVE ROLES With the Effective Roles feature you are able to view all roles see About roles on page 182 of a selected user or group see Manage users and groups on page 182 This ability is especially convenient if you are using groups in fact it is the only way of viewing
121. Overview on page 33 For descriptions of the exact functionality of the Presets tab refer to Preset positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 e Atleast one patrolling profile is defined for the camera How to define a patrolling profile To define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select Cameras In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required PTZ camera from the list then select the Patrolling tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 For descriptions of the exact functionality of the Patrolling tab refer to Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 Creating the Rule 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and B sme cmm Validate All Rules Refresh FS x 2 The Manage Rule wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field nd In this example the rule will only cover a specific camera called PTZ Camera and how it should patrol on Saturday afternoons We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name MH ame Retail Area FTZ Saturday Aftemoc Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help
122. PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Sets an output on a device to a particular state activated or deactivated When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify which state to set and on which devices This type of action requires that the devices to which the action will be linked each have at least one external output unit connected to an output port No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Creates a bookmark on live streaming or recordings from a selected device A bookmark makes it easy to retrace a certain event or period in time Bookmark settings are controlled from the Options on page 207 dialog When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify bookmark details and select device No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Sends a notification using a particular notification profile When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to
123. Rule Patrolling During Daytime 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and Events then right click Rules and select Add New Rule Eb amus cman Validate All Rules Refresh F5 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 151 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 152 2 The Manage Rule wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field 7 In this example the rule will cover a specific camera and how it should patrol during daytime We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Mame PTZ Camera Daytime Patrolin Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules On Step 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type gt In this example we want to base the rule on a time period Therefore we select Perform an action in a time interval First Select the nule type to generate O Perform an action on events Petom an action in a time interval Click Next to go to step 2 of the wizard On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply gt In this example we want the rule to apply within a specific time profile so we select the time condition Within selected time
124. S Management Client For example you may create a rule specifying that a siren should sound if motion is detected on a particular camera or you may create a rule specifying that a camera should start recording if a siren sounds Refer to Define Input and Output Related Rules see Define in and output related rules on page 117 for more information e Manual activation of output 1 Output may be activated manually from the Management Client and the Ocularis Client In the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices and select Outputs In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required outputs folder and select the required output Tip You may select a group of outputs for example A Outputs to manually activate all outputs in the group The availability of features for manually activating an output depends entirely on the device in question and may vary Typically the following elements are shown for each output in the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 if 1332 446 Deeds ed ell Durpour 18 Select clear the check box to activate deactivate the selected output When an output is activated the indicator lights up green ee i Y un ac Apike aL Chipr Es Alternatively click the rectangular button L to activate the output for the duration defined in the Output Trigger Time setting on the Settings tab this feature setting may not be availabl
125. S servers through the Management Client This integration only works with Ocularis CS servers For the current version of Ocularis LS use OnSSI Federated Architecture see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 for adding Ocularis LS servers as children Furthermore integration is also not possible if your system uses IPv6 When added Ocularis CS servers can send data and video to your system You can compare added Ocularis CS servers with recording servers and these will likewise be available for viewing in clients Note that roles defined in the Management Client can be given access to data from Ocularis CS servers This is done by coupling roles in your system with Ocularis CS user rights Furthermore Ocularis CS servers added in the Management Client will be listed in the Add Remove Ocularis CS Servers dialog which you can open by selecting Ocularis CS Servers from the Tools menu Ocularis CS s Recording Server service must be running for your system to receive data from the Ocularis CS installation Limitations when adding Ocularis CS servers When using Ocularis it is not necessary to add RC C servers to the RC E system as this is handled at the Ocularis level using the Ocularis Administrator application The information here is for informational purposes only and for legacy systems There are a few limitations to how Ocularis CS servers will work when added as slaves to your system They will provide operational status
126. SSI Federated Architecture 218 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture The idea behind OnSSI Federated Architecture Parent and children linked as needed Management server and failover recording server SQL Server Recording servers Failover recording servers Cameras A Federated Site Another Federated Site cO N O C A C N Yet another Federated Site Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture For conceptual details on OnSSI Federated Architecture refer to OnSSI Federated Architecture overview see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 The Management Client has a Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 dedicated to displaying federated sites and their parent child links From the View menu see Management Client Menu Overview on page 37 you can show or hide the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane The pane is located on the left side of the Management Client window under the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Federsted Site Herrin E Rome Serve Federated Sie Hasanchry The parent server you are logged in to your home site is always at the top of the site hierarchy You can view all its linked children and downwards through the parent child hierarchy Settings and configurations of your home site is always reflected in the Overview and Properties panes see Panes Overview on page 33 and its s
127. Server service is stopped see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 and disabled on the old recording server It is very important that you do not start two recording servers with identical IDs at the same time On the new recording server open an explorer and go to C ProgramData OnSSi or the path where your recording server is located Open the file RecorderConfig xml Delete the ID stated in between the tags id and lt id gt lt recorderconfig gt lt recorder gt cid ff bswier aia Acad Paste the copied recording server ID in between the tags id and lt id gt Save the RecorderConfig xml file Restart the Recording Server service When the new Recording Server service starts up the recording server has inherited all settings on the old recording server Tip This procedure also applies if you re install Windows on the computer running the recording server even if you do not replace the computer running the recording server Info tab recording server properties You are able to verify or edit the name and description of a selected recording server on the nfo tab To access the Info tab select the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select the nfo tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 68 Db Setting o info gl Storage Fy igen jw Ls o Reo nid Gere nio malon Hi miras Racurnding Gene
128. Stop feed to stop the feed from a device means that video will no longer be transferred from the device to the system in which case live viewing and recording of video will no longer be possible However a device on which the feed has been stopped will still be able to communicate with the recording server and the feed can be started again automatically through a rule as opposed to when the device has been manually disabled in the Management Client Set live frame rate on Sets a particular frame rate to be used when displaying live video from the selected devices cameras instead of the cameras default frame rate specified on the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 121 When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify which frame rate to set and on which devices Always verify that the frame rate number of frames per second you specify is On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 137 Management Client Set recording frame rate on lt devices gt Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt 138 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES available on the cameras in question Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of Manage Rule the wizard will automatically prompt you
129. T Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether a client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you can define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network Working with Local IP Address ranges 1 In the Management Client s menu bar select Tools Options This will open the Options dialog see Options on page 207 210 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Tip You can also access the Options dialog from the Network tab this can be handy if you are also configuring the public IP address of a recording server 2 Inthe Options dialog select the Network tab Define local IP address ranges On the Network tab click Add a Inthe Range Start column specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the Range End column Tip If required a range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 b If more ranges are required repeat steps a b c Click OK Edit local IP address ranges a Overwrite the existing information in the Range Start and Range End columns as required b Click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 211 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSS
130. VIDUAL CAMERAS Even when you have specified multicasting settings for the selected recording server multicasting will not work until you enable it for required cameras Select the required recording server in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required camera in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select Live multicast on the Client tab see Client tab camera properties on page 84 in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Repeat for all required cameras under the recording server in question SPECIFY IP ADDRESS RANGE To specify the range from which you want to assign addresses for multicast streams from the selected recording server do the following On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 77 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES For each multicast camera feed the IP address port combination IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 6000 must be unique You can either use one IP address and many ports or many IP addresses and fewer ports By default the system suggests a single IP address and a range of 1000 ports but you can change this as required Example If you want multicast for 1000 cameras you would need either o 41IP address and a range of 1000 different ports OR o arange of two IP addresses and a range of 500 different ports or any matching combination OR o arange of 1000 IP addresses and a single port When specifying the IP address i
131. When you configure outgoing SMTP mail server settings specify the following Type the e mail address you want to appear as the sender of e mail Sender e mail address notifications for all notification profiles Example sender organization org Type the name of the SMTP mail server which will be used for sending e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example mailserver organization org Outgoing mail SMTP server name On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 209 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES AVI compression settings When you set up AVI compression settings specify the following Select the required codec compression decompression technology Compressor Indeo 5 10 if available generally provides a good compromise between quality and file size You can configure some but not all codecs Not available for all codecs Use the slider to select the required degree of compression 0 100 to be performed by the codec 0 means no compression generally resulting in high image Compression quality quality and large file size 100 means maximum compression generally resulting in low image quality and small file size If the slider is not available compression quality is determined entirely by the selected codec Not available for all codecs If you want to use keyframes select the check box and specify the required number of seconds between keyframes in the neighboring field A keyframe is a singl
132. Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Running as a 32 bit service application Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework DirectX 9 0 or newer and Windows Help WinHIp32 exe which you can download from http www microsoft com downloads Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended 11 Introductions Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Type Hard Disk Space Operating System Software Active Directory Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Onboard GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit color E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 10 GB free depends on number of servers cameras rules and logging settings gt gt gt Microsoft Windows 8 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit Microsoft NET 4 0 and Internet Informati
133. accept link requests Whether as the administrator of a child you must accept a link request or not or the link request is accepted automatically depends on your administrator settings Refer to The administrator role and federated sites see Administrators role and federated sites on page 215 Where is OnSSI Federated Architecture configured and managed Setting up and configuring OnSSI Federated Architecture takes place in the Management Client How do view video from federated sites You can view video from federated sites in any Ocularis Client i e there is no need for a one to one relationship between sites and Ocularis Clients You will always get the view i e see the site structure as the parent you are currently logged in to The next item section is only relevant if you run Ocularis ES Can l include Ocularis CS slave s in my federated hierarchy Yes that is possible but only as slave s to a management server Is OnSSI Federated Architecture the same as multiple management servers a k a clustering No OnSSl Federated Architecture is not the same as clustering Clustering is a method of obtaining failover support for a management server on a site With clustering it is only possible to have one active management server per surveillance setup but other management servers may be set up to take over in case of failure On the other hand OnSSl Federated Architecture is a method of combining multiple independent sites into on
134. ach of the steps involved in detecting and adding your IP devices The system scans defined network IP address ranges and detects Address range scanning hardware models Specify the IP address and port for each device Manual Cannot be used for adding remote systems in OnSSI Interconnect setups Add hardware connected via a remotely connected server All options offer Remote connect hardware the possibility of automatically detecting the correct hardware drivers Cannot be used for adding remote systems in OnSSI Interconnect setups It is strongly advised that you only add a physical hardware device to one recording server at a time Express The Express recommended option automatically discovers hardware models on the recording server s local network 1 Select Express recommended and click Next 2 Specify user names and passwords if your hardware devices are not using the factory default user name and password You can add as many user names and passwords as required by clicking Add Remember to select the Include check box for each required device When ready click Next 3 Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator will show the detection process Once detection is complete click Next 4 Wait while device specific information is collected for each hardware device A status indicator shows the detection process If collecting hardware information for a device is unsuccessful click the Failed error message to
135. added view group then in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 add a description of the view group No roles will have the right to use the newly added view group until you have specified such rights refer to View group rights on page 192 for more information Also even when you have specified which roles should be able to use the newly added view group already connected client users with the relevant roles must log out and log in again before they will be able to see the view group On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 135 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Rules and events About rules and events In your system events are central elements when using the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 165 In the wizard events are primarily used for triggering actions Example You create a rule which specifies that in the event of detected motion the surveillance system should take the action of starting recording of video from a particular camera In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you can work with the following under Rules and Events e Rules see Manage rules on page 165 Rules are a central element in the system The behavior of your surveillance system is to a very large extent determined by rules When creating a rule you can work with all types of events e Time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 173 Time profiles are peri
136. agement File Action View Help JI Ball F J Help 2 Inthe High Availability dialog click Next select Generic Service and click Next Do not specify anything on the third page of the dialog click Next 3 Select the OnSSI Management Server service click Next Specify the name host name of the cluster that clients use when accessing the service click Next 4 No storage is required for the service click Next No registry settings should be replicated click Next Verify that the cluster service is configured according to your needs click Next The management server is now configured as a generic service in the failover cluster Click Finish Upgrade in a cluster Make sure to have a backup of the database in question before updating the cluster 1 Stop the Management Server services see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 on all management servers in the cluster 24 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal 2 Uninstall see Remove system components on page 29 the management server on all servers in the cluster 3 Use the procedure for installing multiple management servers in a cluster as described for install in a cluster on page 23 IMPORTANT When installing make sure to reuse the existing SQL configuration database which will automatically be upgraded from the old existing database version to the new
137. ages or AVI video clips Specify required minimum time in seconds to pass between the sending of each e mail notification Examples gt If specifying a value of 120 a minimum of 2 minutes will pass between the sending of each e mail notification even if the notification profile is triggered again by a rule before the 2 minutes have passed gt If specifying a value of 0 e mail notifications will be sent each time the notification profile is triggered by a rule This can potentially result in a very large number of e mail notifications being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore carefully consider whether you want to use the notification profile in rules which are likely to be triggered frequently Specify the maximum number of still images you want to include in each of the notification profile s e mail notifications Default is five images Specify the number of milliseconds you want between the recordings presented on the included images Example With the default value of 500 milliseconds the included images will show recordings with half a second between them If selected default images will be inserted in the body of e mail notifications If not images will be included in e mail notifications as attached files This setting is used to specify the start of the AVI file By default the AVI file will contain recordings from 2 seconds before the notification profile is triggered You can change this to the number of
138. ain workgroup is specified in the From this location field If not click Locations to browse for the required domain workgroup c Inthe Enter the object names to select box type the required user name Click OK Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the name you have entered is recognized d Inthe Password field specify the password for the user account and in the Confirm password field confirm the password The password fields cannot be empty The password for the account must contain one or more characters and or digits Click OK About installer commands As an administrator you have a set of installer command you can use when you work with RC L or RC E installers 1 Onthe machine where you want to enter an installer command go to Window s Start and open a Command Prompt window 2 n the Command Prompt execute the required installer command possible with a prefix Note that there is a space before in all installer command lines Example RecordingServer_setup_x64 exe ss_registration Tip To get an overview of installer commands in the Command Prompt type space he p and the following window appears Command Ene option reference Installer 2 0 This setup package accepts following command lime switches angumernts lt filename gt language lt lang gt partner_id lt id gt idm sda cid quiet help msilog logpathz file
139. ake changes as needed On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 121 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 5 Click Save HTTPS is enabled for the entire hardware device that is for example a hardware device s camera microphone and speaker CAMERA Lets you view or edit settings such as default frame rate resolution compression the maximum number of frames between keyframes on screen date time text display etc for a selected camera or for all cameras within a selected device group The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the drivers for the cameras in question and is likely to vary depending on the types of cameras selected Some cameras may support more than one type of stream for example MPEG4 and MJPEG In that case you can use multi streaming see Streams tab camera properties on page 101 If you change a camera s settings you can quickly verify the effect of your change if you have the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 enabled Note however that you cannot use the Preview pane to judge the effect of frame rate changes as a special frame rate for the Preview pane s thumbnail images is used defined in the Options dialog see Options on page 207 Changing the settings for Max frames between keyframes and Max frames between keyframes mode may lower performance in the Ocularis Client MICROPHONE AND SPEAKER Lets you verify or edit settings for selected microphones and speak
140. anage rules on page 165 for making a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera move to a specific preset position when an event occurs as well as in patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions You manage preset positions on the Presets tab which is available only when the selected camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera The Presets tab will not be available if the selected PTZ camera does not support preset positions 96 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client In order to use PTZ cameras features including the ability to pan tilt and zoom operators must have a role which gives them the necessary rights Refer to About roles on page 182 for more information including step by step descriptions of how to assign users to roles and how to specify the rights of roles oj Care Fonda Sac ie Cause Products Sector ER ie mah Produce Sector ii Frere Deeds Section lee is d IE Hauphckd Ei bron ele Fpi boier ne Sat ri anota Cae E Dei posset Db temen prio i Peed of Pus Ri Peale GO Events oe Monn er Presets tab with eight preset positions defined Add a preset position type 1 As an alternative to defining preset positions in the system preset positions may for some PTZ cameras also be defined on the camera device itself typically by accessing a device specific configuration web pag
141. ap all relevant databases of cameras microphones inputs outputs and so on When done remember to activate the license There is no limit to the number of cameras you can replace Licenses and OnSSI Federated Architecture Refer to OnSSI Federated Architecture Overview see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 Manage Software License Codes When you purchase your system you receive a Software License Code SLC which is used when installing your system 48 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Change Software License Code Often your installation is run on a trial Software License Code SLC during the first period When the trial period is over and it is time to change the trial SLC to the permanent SLC you can do this without any un or reinstall action IMPORTANT This must be done locally on the management server in question you cannot do this from the Management Client 1 Onthe management server go to the notification area of the taskbar a k a Systray d E p te TTE D 2 Right click the Management Server icon select Change License 3 The Change License dialog appears Click Import License 4 Next select the SLC license file saved for this purpose When done the selected license file location will be added just below the Import License button 5 Click OK You are now ready to perform SLC registration On Net Surveillance Systems In
142. ard window Met Edit the rule description click an underlined tem Ferform an action on event from devices racordarxarvar 4 Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content Event link Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are related to plug ins dependent on hardware configuration or built into the system itself etc 7 In this example we want the event to be detected motion Motion detection events are technically related to the system s motion detection plug in so we go to the Plug ins group select the event Motion Start and click OK Select an Event EJ La s Everts 2 WP Device A Fiugin Motion Stated 3 Motion Stopped ES Hardens Configurable S input ciated Input Changed S Input Deactivated TE Motion Erd event Motion Stated even Busan 2 Commr shon E moi V Ceca ion SExted Devices recording server management server link When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link opens the Select Group Members window which lets you specify the devices on which device the event should occur in order for the rule to apply r nd In this example the event should occur on Camera 1 in order for the rule to apply I
143. ari on Error cam ra 1B Devica Communication Error LA T00 1 4 9 41 PM Error Communication Error Cera 18 Device Communication Error 1 4 7007 2 40 52 PM krr f Cin cat ton Error camara 1H Daewica communicarian Error You are able to target the exported log content by specifying which log which log elements and which time range to include in the export For example you are able to specify that only the System Log s error related log messages from between January 2nd 2007 08 00 00 and January 4th 2007 07 59 59 should be included in your export To export a log do the following 1 Expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select the required log 2 Ifyou want to target the exported log s content select the required criteria in the Search criteria section above the log For example you may select that your export should only contain log messages at a particular level such as errors or warnings Remember to click Refresh to make the log page reflect your selected criteria 3 In the Management Client s menu bar select Action gt Export Log This will open the Export Log window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 199 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Export Log Export infomation Filename Fia Levi Em Export noe Disi dale and fime 1205 F2 11 2 AH Ww End date and ime mA 11 29 35 M t eae cnca Se p 4 Inthe
144. aris ES Specifying role rights on the Servers tab is only relevant if you have integrated Ocularis CS servers into your system refer to Manage Ocularis CS servers see Manage Ocularis CS servers on page 202 for more information NETMATRIX RIGHTS Specifying role rights on the NetMatrix tab is only relevant if you have configured NetMatrix recipients on your system From the Ocularis Client Limited Mode it is possible to send video to selected NetMatrix recipients The NetMatrix tab lets you specify which NetMatrix recipients should be selectable for this purpose in the Ocularis Client running in Limited Mode The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client The following rights are available a Visible Determines whether users groups with the selected role will be able to select and send video to the NetMatrix recipient from the Ocularis Client Limited Mode About basic users When working with basic users it is important to understand the difference between basic user and Windows user 4 Basic users are authenticated by a user name password combination and are specific to a OnSSI Federated Architecture site see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 Even if basic users have 192 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocul
145. aris ES Management Client the same name and password a basic user created at one federated site does not have access to another federated site e Windows users are authenticated based on their Windows login and are specific to a machine Manage basic users Once you have created a basic user you must add it to a role and add this role to a group if you want to use it actively in your system Refer to About roles on page 182 for details ADD BASIC USER 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the Security node right click Basic Users and select Create Basic Users This opens the New Basic Authentication User dialog 2 Fill in the needed properties see Basic user properties on page 193 3 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save BASIC USER PROPERTIES e User name Name of basic user e Description Description of basic user optional e Password Enter user name e Repeat password Re enter user name On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 193 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES System dashboard About system dashboard In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you are able to work with the following under System Dashboard e System Monitor see About system monitor on page 194 Here you can view and print detailed system reports on servers devices and cameras e Current Task
146. at acts as domain controller must be available on your network before you can add users and groups through the Active Directory service Consult your network administrator if in doubt ADD USERS AND GROUPS THROUGH ACTIVE DIRECTORY NORMAL WAY Users and groups are normally added from Active Directory although users can also be added without Active Directory Using Active Directory for adding existing user and group information to the system has several benefits the fact that users as well as groups are specified centrally in Active Directory means that you do not have to create any user accounts from scratch in the system It also means that you do not have to configure any authentication of users on the system Authentication is handled by Active Directory 182 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client What is Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems It identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them Users as well as groups are specified centrally in Active Directory ACTIVE DIRECTORY USER AND GROUP CONCEPTS Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups Users Users are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account Example a Adolfo Rodriguez T Asif Khan 3 Karen Otley S Keith Waverley q Wayne Massey Groups Groups are Active Direct
147. at all by the central site Remote sites are added to the central site in the same way as multi channel video encoders by use of the Add Hardware wizard see Add hardware on page 53 However remote sites can only be added using the Address range scanning on page 54 or Manual on page 54 options in the Add Hardware wizard When adding the remote site you must specify an account on the remote site This account can be either a basic user local Windows user or domain user It is possible to reuse an existing user or create a new one for usage with OnSSI Interconnect However a new user must be created on the remote system before creating the OnSSI Interconnect setup Depending on the user rights for the selected user on the remote site the central site will get access to all cameras and functions or a sub set of them Three possible OnSSI Interconnect setups There are many possible ways to run OnSSI Interconnect In the following the three most likely scenarios are described How to run your setup depends on your network connection whether you request playback and whether you retrieve remote recordings and to what degree What is remote recording Remote recording also known as edge recording is both a physical camera supporting edge storage and a remote recording system in an OnSSI Interconnect setup To minimize loss if a network breaks down some physical cameras are able to store recordings on their own local storage Either on reque
148. ater avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc Before you configure motion detection for a camera it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc on the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 121 If you later change image quality settings you should always test any motion detection configuration afterwards On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 85 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Tera aTy mall Lass ip inte Brings E Sion Ub Recond F Eemia ia Chori MB Piy eai dE Deas You can configure motion detection for all cameras in a device group see Manage cameras on page 82 in one go Note however that some motion detection settings must be configured individually for each camera This is the case with exclude regions areas in which not to use motion detection as these are very likely to vary from camera to camera Enable and disable motion detection Motion detection is enabled by default To enable disable motion detection for a camera select clear the Motion tab s Motion detection check box When motion detection is disabled for a camera any motion detection related rules see Manage rules on page 165 for the camera will not work Motion detection set
149. atibility IIS 6 WMI Compatibility IIS 6 Scripting Tools and IIS 6 Management Console When ready the relevant part of the Role services tree should look like this zl Security EI v Basic Authentication v Windows Authentication Select Role Services L_ Digest Authentication Ee Client Certificate Mapping Authentication _ 10S Client Certificate Mapping Authentication URL Authorization V Request Filtering _ IP and Domain Restrictions E ES Performance v Static Content Compression Dynamic Content Compression 2 D Management Tools v ITS Management Console 15 Management Scripts and Tools _ Management Service 3 4 II 6 Management Compatibility v 115 amp Metabase Compatibility V II5 6 WMI Compatibility v 115 6 Scripting Tools v 105 6 Management Console E Tr I dE nim rmm KT anu aU Bald Roles Wira Bai Fou Began Select the role ser Sar ver Bos iode ges ies 6 Complete the wizard by following the remaining steps Issue Changes to SQL server location prevents database access This is an issue if the location of the SQL Server is changed for example by changing the host name of the computer running the SQL Server The result of this issue will be that the access to the database is lost Solution Use the update SQL address tool see Update SQL server address on page 243 found at the tray icon aka Systray Issue Insufficient continuous virtual memory fails
150. ation about creating new users in Ocularis CS Define roles with access to Ocularis CS servers To give access to data from Ocularis CS servers do the following in the Management Client 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and select Roles 202 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 6 Select the required role from the list If you want to define a new role refer to About roles on page 182 for more information At the bottom of the Role Settings pane select the Servers tab Select the Ocularis CS server to which you want to assign the role Select a user with the Ocularis CS user rights that represent the correct user rights for the role in your system you are assigning it to You can do this in two ways o Inthe Basic Authentication section enter the user name and password for a user which is defined as basic authenticated user in Ocularis CS Or o Inthe Windows Authentication section enter the Windows account name for a user which is defined as a Windows authenticated user in Ocularis CS Tip If in doubt whether a user is defined as a Basic or Windows authenticated user in Ocularis CS open the Image Server Administrator window on the Ocularis CS server and click User Setup Refer to the Ocularis CS documentation for more information The selected Ocularis CS user has not automatically been assigned to the rol
151. available not be possible to archive recordings You can use the event to for example trigger a notification profile so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 61 Archive Not Finished for a recording server is not finished with the last archiving round when the next is scheduled to start Occurs when a database disk is full A database disk is considered to be full when there is less than 5GB of space is left on the disk The oldest data in a database will always be auto archived or deleted if no next archive is defined when less than 5GB of space is free If less than Database Disk Full 1GB space is free data will be deleted A database always requires 250MB of free space if this limit is reached if data is not deleted fast enough no more data will be written to the database until enough space has been freed The actual maximum size of your database will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 5GB Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 61 Database Full Auto Archive for a recording server is full and needs to auto archive to an archive in the hierarchy Occurs if a database becomes corrupted in which case the system will Database Repair automatically attempt two different database repair methods a fast repair and a thorough repair 164 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocu
152. b directory structure within the archive During all regular use of your system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with the Ocularis Client regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 63 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Knowing the sub directory structure is primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings see Archive structure on page 64 Archive structure When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive During all regular use of your system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with the Ocularis Client regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings In each of the recording server s archive directories separate sub directories are automatically created These sub directories are named after the name of the device and the name of the archive database Since you are able to store recordings from different cameras in the same archive and since archiving for each camera is likely to be performed at regular intervals further sub directories are also automatically added These sub directories each represent approximately an hour s worth
153. b of the auto hidden pane to show the pane 2 Click the Auto Hide pushpin in the title bar of the pane to dock the pane Reset to default layout If you have moved resized and auto hidden panes and now want to reset the entire layout of the panes in the Management Client to their default settings do the following 1 From the Management Client s View menu select Reset Application Layout 2 Restart the application Toggle Preview pane on and off You can close the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 when working with recorders and devices by clicking Close in the right side of the Preview pane s title bar To reopen the Preview pane select Preview Window from the Management Client s View menu Tip If the Preview pane displays images from many cameras at a high frame rate it may slow down performance To specify the number of preview images you want in your Preview pane as well as their frame rate select Options gt General from the Tools menu Tip When the Preview pane is closed it uses no resources and improves therefore the computer s performance Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline Once cameras have been added to the recording component using the Management Client the camera is fully functional You may configure its settings and start to use it A timestamp of when the camera was installed will be recorded and the camera will work normally for a 30 day grace period You have 30 days to register
154. ber of simple rules some may require a mix of simple and complex rules On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 167 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Create many simple or a few complex rules Depending on your organization s requirements it is often a good idea to create many simple rules rather than a few complex rules Even though this will lead to you having more rules it generally makes it much easier for you to maintain an overview of what your rules do Keeping your rules simple also means that you have much more flexibility when it comes to deactivating activating individual rule elements with simple rules you can deactivate activate entire rules when required Default rules Your system comes with a number of default rules on page 160 ensuring that basic features work without any user intervention being required Add a rule When you create rules you are guided by the wizard Manage Rule which provides a highly intuitive approach It helps you stay focused by listing only relevant options It ensures that a rule will not contain missing elements And finally based on your rule s content it automatically suggests suitable stop actions i e what should take place when the rule no longer applies ensuring that you do not unintentionally create a never ending rule 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the Rules item and select Add Rule s Add Rule CTRL N Vali
155. blic IP address etc This is relevant especially if using NAT Network Address Translation and port forwarding Refer to the standard recording server s Network tab see Network tab recording server properties on page 78 for more information Failover recording server properties e Name Name as it appears in the Management Client in logs etc e Description Optional description for example which recording server it is taking over from or a description of the server s physical location On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 237 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e Host name Non editable field displaying the network address of the failover recording server e UDP port The port number used for communication between failover recording servers By default port 8844 is used e Database location Specify the path to the database used by the failover recording server for storing recordings The database path cannot be changed while the failover recording server is taking over from a recording server Changes will be applied when the failover recording server is no longer taking over from a recording server e Enable this failover server Clear to disable the failover recording server by default selected Note that failover recording servers must be disabled to be able to take over from recording servers Group failover recording servers 1 In the Site Navigation pane see Panes Ove
156. c 49 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Remote connect services About remote connect services Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable The remote connect services feature contains the Axis One click Camera Connection technology developed by Axis Communications It enables the system to retrieve video and audio from external cameras where firewalls and or router network configuration normally prevents initiating connections to such cameras The actual communication takes place via so called secure tunnel servers ST servers ST servers use a Virtual Private Network VPN Only devices holding a valid key can operate within a VPN This offers a secure tunnel where data can be exchanged between public networks in a safe way Remote connect services allows you to e Edit credentials within the Axis Dispatch Service e Add edit and remove ST servers e Register Unregister and edit Axis One click cameras e Goto the hardware related to the Axis One Click camera Before you can use Axis One click Camera Connection you must first install a suitable ST server environment Install STS environment for One click camera connection 1 Contact your system provider to obtain the needed user name and password for Axis Dispatch Services 2 Make sure your camera s support Axis Video Hosting System http www axis com products avhs http www axis com products avhs 3 If
157. ce on page 244 runs e With a predefined network service account This predefined user account the service always runs when the server computer are running no matter which account is used The account matters for access to various resources e With a particular user account This account the service uses the specified user account to run the service under the account as management server If the server acting as management server is a member of a domain you should either select the suggested Network Service or specify a user account for the domain in question Note that if the server in question is a failover recording server it is not possible to select This predefined account and when selecting This account it is only possible to select to specify a user account for the domain in question When should choose a particular user account instead of a predefined If you use network drives you should always specify a particular user account with access to the network drives in question Otherwise the relevant service cannot access the required network drives Choose between a predefined network service account and a particular user account On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 17 Installation and Removal 1 Select This predefined account a Select Network Service b Click OK 1 Select This account Ocularis LS Ocularis ES a Click Browse This opens the Select User window b Verify that the relevant dom
158. ceccesececeuececceececseueeesseuseessecesseueeessueeessuseeessaeees 176 Manage user defined events assais hos decet eiae Esteve tei edel acm oe ad tiet Ea sesh Bnd oes Sed eeu end 180 viris Tc eM 182 PRO OS CUO Lucero alate datecode oed sio c set oed acervi recs oie Rr UAE cci be MD ccr cupa Do eco ERU 182 ADOILTOIGS ico taone lied ciusdem tse cetus Hi M eps et e e ui Ub eint de LA een eee 182 ADOUCDI SIC USOS OIM DL c E 192 SYSTIEMDASHBOBRD sisas de sicestst its E ns Lei aad cos ene ed bee DELL S LA a Meus 194 About system GASNDOANG Mo L 194 ADOUESVSIONT MONTON n S ecmuren sets urutbutds Dd o emus ost Dwax Va dos orsi cusar adc imoreitocDtrqUa Sos kawsi sua Dead evade u Ra Doc 194 ADON CUMERUTASK istaec beet d ac Utt tee M aceto A AM eM torus CoL AL raul es qe 195 ADoutconiguralomr repo NR TEE E DEL ine E eid eee ag 195 zc liber ce 197 WI AM ACS NOG ee PEN T 197 OCULARI O PEE 202 Manage Ocularis CS SeFVel s sss vote E e E S EE ead ede eee 202 REGISTERED SERVICES arn E a atest areas 205 Manage registered services eri sercustan ciacetacnustaanwidecedainustarncnaceasSodastitas ales aiasundacddvarewetsentaddeasedgoneisale 205 OPON ean 2c nestean sare nte neacaih d Ded c Mc MD RE Md Dr id 207 0 Ie g Copier renter RU eae 207 Specily AVI compression Settings ibn ice e o o ies Asctive des eden le
159. cess you are asked to specify a user account under which the Failover Server service should run This user account must have administrator rights in the system Note also that if you run workgroups you should ignore the normal installation guidelines for installing recording servers and use the alternative installation method for workgroups see Install your system preconditions on page 13 Once you have installed the management server using the common installer you can download the separate recording server installer from the management server s web page see Download Manager download web page on page 19 controlled by the Download Manager As part of this installer you can specify whether the installer should result in a standard recording server or a failover recording server 1 Goto the Management Server s download web page and select the Recording Server installer suitable for your needs Save the installer somewhere appropriate and run it from here or run it directly from the web page 2 Select the Language you want to use during the installation this does not affect the language of your system choose this later in the process Click Continue 3 From a selection list of e Typical which installs a standard recording server with default settings e Failover which installs a recording server as a failover recording server e Custom which installs a standard recording server and offers configuration options for example let
160. come first served principle applies For the right to work the role must also be granted the right to view the Ocularis Client in Live mode This right is granted as part of the application rights Furthermore the speaker s must be visible in Ocularis Client something you determine as part of the device rights APPLICATION RIGHTS Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable The Application tab lets you specify client access to specific functions First select a specific time profile or Always Next select the functions that the role should have access to e Status API N A e Service Registration API N A e Reports The configuration report see About configuration report on page 195 functionality within System Dashboard EXTERNAL EVENT RIGHTS Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client The following rights are available On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 191 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e Trigger external event with time profile In the Ocularis Client it is possible to manually trigger your surveillance system s external events VIEW GROUP RIGHTS The tab is divided
161. cordings stored by the failover recording server will automatically be merged into the standard recording server s databases How long the merging process takes depends on the amount of recordings on network capacity etc During the merging process it will not be possible to browse recordings from the period during which the failover recording server took over What if a failover recording server must take over from another recording server during the merging process In a regular failover recording server setup it will postpone the merging process with recording server A and take over from recording server B When recording server B becomes available again the regular failover recording server will take up the merging process with recording server A after which it will begin merging with recording server B In a hot standby setup a hot standby server cannot take over for another recording server because it can only be hot standby for a single recording server But if that recording server fails again the hot standby will just take over again and also keep the recordings from the previous period Recordings are kept until they are merged back to the primary recorder or until the failover recording server runs out of disk space Will lose recordings A failover solution does not provide complete redundancy It is however a very reliable way of minimizing downtime When the recording server becomes available again the Failover Server service will
162. ct 711 Th Comers onus 212 B Camera 1 on doa 213 CP Camera on Accs Pod Th Comers onda 7 P Chiaia l oon i OS Tip You may also double click a device to copy it from one box to the other or you may drag devices between the two boxes Tip To select several devices in one go press the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting 106 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 5 Click OK The selected devices will be added to your device group on the device list SPECIFY COMMON SETTINGS FOR ALL DEVICES IN A DEVICE GROUP When using device groups you are able to quickly specify common properties for all devices within a given device group 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s device list click the required device group In the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 all properties which are available on all of the device group s devices will be listed grouped on tabs 2 Specify the required common properties Properties not available on all of the devices in the device group will not be listed such properties must still be configured individually for each device If the device group contains 400 or more devices the Settings tab see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 is unavailable for viewing and editing For camera groups the Streams tab is also unavailable for viewing and editing if the group contains 400 cameras or more Tip
163. ct which drivers to use when you scan By default the system uses all known drivers If your organization only uses certain hardware devices and or models you can achieve faster scanning by selecting only the drivers required for those hardware devices Click Next 4 Specify the IP address network ranges you want to scan for hardware o Start address First IP address in required range o End address Last IP address in required range The start and end IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single hardware device if needed o Port Port number s on which to scan Default is port 80 If your hardware devices are located behind a NAT enabled router or a firewall you may need to specify a different port number When this is the case also remember to configure the router firewall so it maps the port and IP addresses used by the hardware devices You can add as many network ranges as needed by clicking Add to add another row You can add any network address between 0 0 0 1 and 255 255 255 255 You must select at least one network range before you can continue Remember to select the nclude check box for each required range Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator shows the detection process If you successfully detect hardware on a specified network range a Success message appears in the Status column If you fail to add a network range you can click the Failed error message to see why Once detection is com
164. cted it is not possible to select several patrolling profiles This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one patrolling profile has been defined for the device s You define patrolling profiles fora PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of Manage Rule the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop patrolling Without this stop action patrolling would potentially never stop You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Pause patrolling on Pauses PTZ patrolling the continuous moving of a camera between a number of lt devices gt preset positions When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify the devices on which patrolling should be paused This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one patrolling profile has been defined for the device s You define patrolling profiles
165. ction between the central sites recording servers and the remote site must be selected in the list of drivers when adding remote systems via the Add Hardware wizard 3 3 OnSSI Interconnect 4 4 OnSSI Interconnect remote site the complete remote site with system installation users cameras and so on 5 5 OnSSI Interconnect remote system the actual technical installation at the remote site Small and Medium sized Businesses More about OnSSI Interconnect Each remote site runs independently and may perform any normal surveillance tasks Depending on network connections and appropriate user rights OnSSI Interconnect offers direct live viewing of remote site cameras and play back of remote site recordings from the central site It also offers transfer of remote site recordings to the central site based on either events see Events overview on page 161 rules schedules see Manage rules on page 165 or manual requests by Ocularis Client users It also allows central site users to employ events originally triggered on remote sites see Events tab overview on page 128 on the central site 58 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Which Ocularis product can act as central site and which can act as remote sites depends on the specific setup Furthermore it differs from setup to setup which versions how many cameras and how devices and events originating from the remote site are handled if
166. d also be dedicated input out boxes One device channel license enables you to run one camera or one dedicated input output box You can use and define an unlimited number of recording servers microphones speakers inputs and outputs You can always get more licenses see Get additional licenses on page 48 as your surveillance system grows License information To get an overview of licenses in your system go to the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Basics and select License Information This brings up the License Information page displaying e your product type e your software license code e the number of available device channels typically cameras but it could also be dedicated input output boxes and cameras e if you run OnSSI Interconnect see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 the total number of available OnSSI Interconnect device channels and OnSSI Interconnect cameras e how many licenses you have used both the number of activated licenses and the number of temporary not activated licenses e whether you need to get additional licenses in order to have enough licenses for all of your cameras the number of additional license you need is found by adding your missing licenses with your expired licenses e any other installed products used with the system and if applicable their Software License Code On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 47 Management Client Ocula
167. d be limited to a specific time interval None of the above applies to direct playback of remote recordings Note that if an automatic retrieval or request for retrieval from the Ocularis Client is received outside the time interval specified on the Remote Retrieval tab it will be accepted but not started until the selected time interval is reached New remote recording retrieval jobs will queue and start when the allowed time interval is reached Pending remote recording retrieval jobs can be viewed from the System Dashboard s Current Tasks see About current task on page 195 Status icons overview The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 input see Manage input on page 109 and output see Manage output on page 113 events in item lists Item enabled Can communicate with the recording server a and can if required be started stopped automatically through a P op Ww rule Pp i Item recording so o sg g Speaker being recorded Note that what is being said through r the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed
168. d item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor ause patrolling on devices and Move device to position preset immediately with PTZ priority priorit 6 Click the underlined items in the extension of the rule description in order to specify its exact content devices Clicking the devices link lets you select the devices on which patrolling should be paused Only PTZ cameras will be selectable 7 In this example patrolling should be paused on our PTZ camera In the Select Group Members window we therefore drag PTZ Camera to the Selected list and click OK device Clicking the device link lets you select to move another device than the device s on which patrolling was paused You are also able to select to move the device on which patrolling was paused 7 In this example we select to move the same PTZ camera on which patrolling was paused and click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 157 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Select Device E b Cameras 073 Lab Cameras T Parking lot E 73 Red Sector Cameras gt Retail Ares PTZ Cameras preset Clicking the preset link lets you select which preset position the PTZ camera should move to You will be able to select from a list of preset positions defined for the PTZ camera you selected before 7 In this example we select a preset position called Back Door and click OK Select a Preset E3 O A Camera zm PTZ Came ae Cann
169. d on the same machine or not backing up configuration might take some time Logs including audit logs see Manage logs on page 197 are not part of the configuration backup Back up All relevant system configuration files will be combined into one single cnf file which is saved at a specified location 1 From the Management Client s menu bar select File Backup Configuration 2 Next you are presented with an important note Read the contents of the note Click Backup 3 Inthe file save dialog browse to the location where you want to store the configuration backup Specify a suitable file name and click Save 4 Letthe Backup Configuration window finish Click Close Your backup is finished Restore system configuration from manual back up Important information Both the user installing and the user doing the restore must be local administrator on the management server and on the SQL server Except for your recording servers your system will be completely shut down for the duration of the restore which might take some time A backup can only be restored on the system installation where it was created Furthermore make sure that the setup is as similar as possible to when the backup was made Otherwise the restore might fail On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 229 Backup restore and move system configuration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES If restoring fails during the validation phase it will be possible to sta
170. d services in the Management Client Access registered services configuration 1 In the Management Client s menu bar select Tools gt Registered Services 2 The Add Remove Registered Services window opens From this window you can manage registered services Add and edit registered services 1 In the Add Remove Registered Services window click Add or Edit depending on your needs 2 Inthe Add Registered Service or Edit Registered Service window depending on your earlier selection specify or edit settings See Registered services settings on page 205 3 Click OK Manage network configuration With the network configuration settings you specify the management server s server LAN and WAN addresses in order for the management server and the trusted servers to be able to communicate 1 In the Add Remove Registered Services window click Network 2 Specify the LAN and or WAN IP address of the management server If all involved servers both the management server and the trusted servers or the required Ocularis CS are on your local network you can simply specify the LAN address If one or more involved servers access the system through an internet connection you must also specify the WAN address ET T H Network Configuration mii Server Settings Servis beled LAN Server address ein 3 Click OK n Net Surveillance Systems Inc 205 Manage
171. d this Hierarchy command lets you toggle it on and off By default the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 is Site Navigation enabled and this command lets you toggle it on and off Customize the Management Client s layout You can rearrange panes in the Management Client and customize its look to suit your needs If you rearrange the panes you can always reset the entire layout to the Management Client s default layout Resize panes You can resize panes by dragging the borders of the panes 1 Place your mouse pointer over a border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the border in the required direction The size of the content inside the panes stays the same regardless of the size of the panes with one exception the larger the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 is the larger preview images and state information will appear On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 39 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES E gate FE E DFi NM ee LT n a EENAA S Eam m fF ENNA NTF m Move panes You can move a pane to a different position either as a floating pane or to a docked position by clicking on a pane s title bar and dragging it with the mouse The position and whether the pane becomes a floating pane or docked depend on where you release the mouse button The Management Client offers some layout elements that help you control the new position of the pane The layout elements a a
172. data 5 The hot standby server continually tries to re establish connection to the recording server 6 When the connection to the recording server is re established and the hot standby server goes back to hot standby mode the recording server fetches video data if any recorded during its down time and the video data is merged On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 235 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Ocularis LS Ocularis ES back in to the recoding servers database FAQs failover recording servers How does a failover recording server know when to take over It polls i e regularly checks the state of relevant recording servers every 0 5 seconds If a recording server does not reply within 5 seconds the recording server is considered unavailable and the failover recording server takes over How long does it take for a failover recording server to take over For a regular failover server it takes approximately 5 seconds plus the time it takes for the failover recording server s Recording Server service to start A hot standby server however can do it faster since it is already in hot standby mode and only has to start its cameras to deliver feeds During the start up period it will not be possible to store recordings neither will it be possible to view live video from affected cameras What happens when a recording server becomes available again It will automatically take over from the failover recording server and re
173. date All Rules mA Refresh F5 This will open the wizard Manage Rule 168 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Manage Rule Jc E23 H aret Hee Flu COT Depot s Auctions Shen T Tyee of de Fiat Select the rule hype to generate ie Periam an achon on tevent 7 Perform an schon in as Gre interns M famancctiononevert ton stevie d recorder ine 3 ree lied Emh The wizard guides you through the process of specifying the content of your rule The wizard makes the process interactive yet intuitive based on your main selections it asks you to specify your exact requirements for the rule 2 Begin by specifying a name compulsory and a description optional of the new rule in the Name and Description fields respectively Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 Then select the required type of condition for the rule either a rule which performs one or more actions when a particular event occurs or a rule which performs one or more actions when a specific period of time is entered Perform an action on lt event gt If you select an event based rule the lower part of the wizard window will display an initial rule description Next Edit the rule description click an underlined tem Ferform an action on
174. detailed exclude regions With a grid size of 64x64 the image will be divided into relatively many sections for you to select for exclude regions Each section will be relatively small enabling you to define more detailed exclude regions Examples of 8x8 16x16 32x32 and 64x64 grids respectively 88 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Co eT et nh ee E LIT ed ee A E LITT Tt a a LN Nx EERE 07 8 1525134 i d T E m a E m e a LI LI s Lg LA m Uum Lu I L1 LI LL The four different grid sizes Show Grid The grid may be visible or hidden depending on whether the Show grid check box is selected or not When the Show grid check box is selected default the preview image will feature a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections The grid may help you when selecting exclude regions in the preview image The density of the grid is determined by the value selected in the Grid size list Showing the grid is not a requirement for selecting exclude regions even without the grid you are able to select exclude regions as described earlier Hiding the grid may provide a less obscured view of the preview image e Show Regions When the Show regions check box is selected default exclude regions will be highlighted in blue in the preview image Hiding exclude regions may provide a less obscured
175. device list 4 Click OK A folder representing the new device group is added to the list You are now able to specify which devices should belong in the device group Tip If required you are able to add device groups as subgroups under other device groups as illustrated here S O Red Sector Cameras 5 Recepbon Area p Red Sector Reception Ca p Red Sector Back Door Cam p Red Sector Entrance Cam SPECIFY WHICH DEVICES TO INCLUDE IN A DEVICE GROUP 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s device list right click the required device group folder 2 Select Edit Device Group Members The Select Group Members window will appear 3 Inthe Select Group Members window select either o The Device Groups tab which lists devices based on existing device groups Tip A device can be a member of more than one device group o The Recording Servers tab which lists devices based on which recording servers the devices belong on 4 Select the devices you wish to include and click Add This will copy the selected devices to the Selected box Select Group Members Production Ares Cameras x Device Groups Fiecondert Selecting Bercea Seri mp Cersa 1 on Aes 209 MPD Camera 10 1050 72 Id Recording Serves 1 C Cama T on dogs 201M Camara MOTE S074 Tp Camera 1 on Accs 203 Fp Cansa 1 on feds 212 PTZ Camera 10 10 50 71 Tp Camera l on Asi 2103 C Came 1 on Ais 23D Comers 10 1050 5 8 P Caras 1 ond Aa T Lanena 1 an Se
176. device to a recording server again select the required recording server and use the Add Hardware on page 53 wizard Edit basic hardware device settings You are able to edit basic settings such as IP address host name for added hardware 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server right click the hardware device you wish to edit 2 From the menu that appears select Edit IP Hardware This opens the Edit Hardware window where you can edit relevant properties see Specify hardware and device info properties on page 119 3 Click OK Replace hardware device When you replace a hardware device on your network with another hardware device you must know the IP address port user name and password of the new hardware device Furthermore when replacing hardware devices note that your system might be affected by license limitations see About licenses on page 47 Using the Activate Online wizard see Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline on page 44 you must reactivate your licenses after replacing hardware devices Also note that if the new number of cameras microphones inputs and outputs exceeds the old number of cameras microphones inputs and outputs you might also have to buy new licenses see About licenses on page 47 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server right click the hardware device you wis
177. ding server e Management Client e Log server used for providing the necessary functionality for logging system information see Manage logs on page 197 e Axis One click Connection Component see Remote connect services on page 50 only available here For installation of device packs refer to Device pack not available on Download Manager download web page see Device pack installer must be downloaded on page 21 Add publish Download Manager installer components Making non standard components and new versions available on the management server s download page involves two procedures First you add new and or non standard components to the Download Manager Then you use it to fine tune which components should be available in the various language versions of the web page If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new components Adding new non standard files to the Download Manager 1 Onthe machine where you downloaded the component s go to Window s Start enter a Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt execute the name of the file exe with space ss registration Example RecordingServer setup x64 exe ss registration The file is now added to the Download Manager but not installed on the current machine Tip To get an overview of installer commands in the Command Prompt type space he p and the following window appears 20 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installati
178. ding component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable When a camera or device records video and or audio all specified recordings are per default stored in the storage area defined for the device More precisely in the storage area s default recording database named Recording A storage area has no default archive s but these can easily be created Depending on recording settings the storage area s recording database will most likely run full at some point and its contents need to be archived in order to be saved It is therefore possible to create archives within the default storage area and start an archiving process Furthermore it is possible to create alternative storage area s and configure that selected video audio recordings must be stored archived here Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s or device s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the device s recording database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice Storage and archiving is configured on a per recording server basis To ease explanations the following mostly mentions cameras and video but all is true about speakers and microphones and audio and sound as well IMPORTANT We recommend that you use a dedicated hard disk drive for the recording server database Using a dedicated hard
179. disk drive for the database will prevent low disk performance Furthermore when formatting the hard disk it is important to change its Allocation unit size setting from 4 to 64 kilobytes This is to significantly improve recording performance of the hard disk You can read more about allocating unit sizes and find help at http support microsoft com kb 140365 en us IMPORTANT The oldest data in a database will always be auto archived or deleted if no next archive is defined when less than 5GB of space is free If less than 1GB space is free data will be deleted A database always requires 250MB of free space if this limit is reached if data is not deleted fast enough no more data will be written to the database until enough space has been freed The actual maximum size of your database will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 5GB Attaching devices to a recording server Once you have configured the storage area and archiving settings for a recording server where to store recordings archives how often to transfer recordings to archives and so on you can enable storage and archiving for individual cameras or a group of cameras see Attach a device or group of devices to storage area on page 63 This is done from the individual devices or from the device group Effective archiving When archiving is enabled for a camera or a group of cameras the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an arch
180. double click Add or Remove Programs 3 Inthe left side of the Add or Remove Programs window click Add Remove Windows Components 4 Inthe Windows Components wizard select the Internet Information Services IIS item and click Details o Inthe nternet Information Services IIS window clear the SMTP Service check box Click OK Next and Finish Issue Manual installation of IIS if needed When installing the Internet Information Services IIS is under normal circumstances automatically installed If the automatic installation fails you must install the IIS manually 1 If automatic IIS installation fails you will see an error message asking you to install the IIS manually In the error message box click nstall IIS Manually Select Server Manager from Windows Start menu In the left side of the Server Manager window select Roles then the Roles Summary Now select Add Roles to start a wizard 2 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 4 Inthe wizard click Next select Web Server IIS and follow the wizard s steps When you reach the wizard s Select Role Services step you will see that some role services are selected by default However you should select some additional role services o Under Security select Basic Authentication and Windows authentication o Under Management Tools select IIS Management Console expand it and select S 6 Metabase Comp
181. down in the Storage area you can see which archive s are associated with the selected database their individual status OK or Old Storage location and how much space they each use In the Total used space field the total spaced used for the entire storage is indicated REMOTE RECORDING CAMERA REMOTE SYSTEM The remote recording option is only available if the selected camera supports remote storage or is a camera under an OnSSI Interconnect remote site What is remote recording Remote recording also known as edge recording is both a physical camera supporting edge storage and a remote recording system in an OnSSI Interconnect setup To minimize loss if a network breaks down some physical cameras are able to store recordings on their own local storage Either on request or automatically depending on settings recordings can be retrieved from remote storages to the surveillance system when the network is re established To save bandwidth it is possible to set up rules regarding when to retrieves recordings With remote systems the principle is the same However recordings are not retrieved from remote cameras edge storages but from remote systems recording servers Select Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connections are restored see Retrieve remote recordings from remote site camera on page 60 to enable automatic retrieval of recordings once connection is re established The type of hardware selected determines whe
182. dows login Of o Select Basic and enter the Ocularis CS administrator s user name and password in the User name and Password fields The reason why it is important that you enter the Ocularis CS administrator information is that you as administrator then will have unlimited rights to data from both your system and the Ocularis CS installation The connection to the Ocularis CS server is now established but no roles in the Management Client except the Administrator role have been given access to data from the Ocularis CS server Refer to Define roles with access to Ocularis CS servers see Define roles with access to Ocularis CS servers on page 202 for more information about giving users access to data from added Ocularis CS servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 203 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Remember to define the network configuration settings so the management server will be able to handle the token authentication of clients for added Ocularis CS servers In the Management Client you must add all Ocularis CS servers you would like to receive data from The Ocularis CS system s internal master slave setup cannot be reused by your system Ocularis CS server network configuration With the network configuration settings you specify the management server s server address so that the management server can handle the token authentication of clients for added Ocularis CS servers From the Management Clien
183. ducts Section The preset position at the top of the list will be used as the first stop when the camera patrols according to the patrolling profile the preset position in second position from the top will be the second stop and so forth If required change the sequence by selecting the required preset position and using the up down buttons e Tip If required you can easily add more preset positions to the list by clicking Add or remove unwanted preset positions from the list by selecting the unwanted preset position then clicking Remove Specify for how long to stay at each preset position When patrolling the PTZ camera will by default remain for 5 seconds at each preset position specified in the patrolling profile before it moves on to the next preset position To change the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera will remain at a specific preset position do the following 94 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Inthe list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profile select the preset position for which you want to change the time iy m z rice D agtime Patrolling dl e Back Door T E a t Canned Foods Section Ts Dary Products Section 3 Specify the required time in number of seconds in the Wait time secs field y Position Pieta ID Back Dee m W a ine pec
184. e o Live Only Select to get live failover support for the device o Disabled Select to disable failover support for the device Failover service communication port TCP By default the port number is 11000 This port is used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers If changed the recording server in question must be running and must be connected to the management server meanwhile Multicasting tab recording server properties Your system supports multicasting of live streams from recording servers In cases when many Ocularis Client users want to view live video from the same camera multicasting can help save considerable system resources Multicasting is only possible for live streams not for recorded video audio If a recording server has more than one network interface card it is only possible to multicast on one of them Through the Management Client you are able to specify which one to use The successful implementation of multicasting also requires that your network equipment switches and so on has been set up to relay multicast data packets to the required group of recipients only If not multicasting may not be different from broadcasting which can significantly slow down network communication On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 75 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Frogesiart t p Multicaat ree configursbon i Lies f i die ii p ddeens range An address hom hir inge ir
185. e and imported into the system by selecting Use presets from device see Use preset positions from device type 2 on page 99 To add a preset position for the camera in the system do the following 1 Click Add This will open the Add Preset window rad uj am m db ml 2 The Add Preset window displays a preview image from the camera use the navigation buttons and or sliders to move the camera to the required preset position While you do this you are able to verify the position of the camera through the preview image 3 Specify a name or number for the preset position in the Name field Tip Use a descriptive name the name may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the item e g when using it in a rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 97 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 4 Optionally type a description of the preset position in the Description field 5 Click OK This will close the Add Preset window and add the preset position to the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera How to use the navigation buttons The navigation buttons let you move the camera as follows up and to the left EJ up t3 up and to the right T to the left fA moves the view to its default position IE to the right 3 down and to the left t3 down rj down and to the right 3 Zooms in one zoom level per click aA Zooms in
186. e on page 185 Time profiles are highly flexible they can be based on one or more single periods of time on one or more recurring periods of time or a combination of single and recurring times Many users will be familiar with the concepts of single and recurring time periods from calendar applications such as the one in Microsoft Outlook Time profiles always apply in local time This means that if your system has recording servers placed in different time zones any actions e g recording on cameras associated with time profiles will be carried out in each recording server s local time Example If you have a time profile covering the period 08 30 to 09 30 any associated actions on a recording server placed in New York will be carried out when the local time is 08 30 to 09 30 in New York while the same actions on a recording server placed in Los Angeles will be carried out some hours later when the local time is 08 30 to 09 30 in Los Angeles You create and manage time profiles in the Management Client by expanding the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s Rules and Events folder then selecting Time Profiles A Time Profiles list will appear in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Time Profiles jv 4 fime profiles S Weekdays Closed J Weekdavs Working Hours 51 Weekends Specify a time profile 1 Inthe Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add Time Profile This
187. e recordings are archived when they have sifted down into the green area of the database cylinder or in other words when they are old enough to be archived The retention time and size setting for archives define how long the recordings remain in the archive recordings remain in the archive for the time specified or until the archive has reached the specified size limit When these settings are met the system begins to overwrite old recordings in the archive The archiving schedule defines how often and at what times archiving takes place Encryption and FPS determine the size of the data in the databases To have recordings archived all these parameters must be set up in accordance with each other This means that the retention period of a next coming archive must always be longer than the retention period of a current archive or recording database This is due to the fact that the number of retention days stated for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process Furthermore archiving must always take place more frequently than the retention period is set to otherwise you risk losing data If you have a retention time of 24 hours any data older than 24 hours will be deleted Therefore to get your data safely moved to the next archive it is important to run archiving more often than every 24 hours Example These storage areas image to the left have a retention time of 4 days and the following archive image to the rig
188. e Administrators role you are able to add as many roles as required in your organization To manage roles in the system expand the Security folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select Roles For more information refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles and Specify rights of a role on page 187 Roles may also determine access to views in clients Note that renaming a role will not change the name of a view group based upon the role MORE ABOUT ADMINISTRATORS ROLE The Administrators role is predefined and cannot be deleted Users and groups with the Administrators role have complete and unrestricted access to the entire system For this reason it is not necessary to specify role settings for the Administrators role You add users and groups to the Administrators role just as with any other role refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles af Users amp Groups p m IMPORTANT Users with local machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server will automatically have administrator rights on the management server It is therefore important that you verify which users have local machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server Only users whom you trust as administrators of your system should have ocal machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server 184 On Net Surveilla
189. e Management Client s layout to make changes take effect Max no of previews Note that a large number of thumbnail images in combination with a high frame rate that is a high image quality may slow the system down You can limit the frame rate used for the thumbnail images with the Default preview frame rate setting Select whether to enable motion detection while cameras are being added to a recording server through the Add Hardware on page 53 wizard Motion detection on when Select the check box to enable motion detection while using the wizard adding camera devices default Note that this setting only applies while Add Hardware is in use When the wizard is not in use motion detection is active for all cameras for which it has been enabled regardless of this setting Select whether to enable multicast see Multicasting tab recording server properties on page 75 while cameras are being added to a recording server through the wizard Add Hardware Select the check box to enable multicast while using the wizard default Note that this setting only applies while Add Hardware is in use When the wizard is not in use multicast will be active for all cameras for which it has been enabled regardless of this setting Enable multicast live when adding camera devices On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 207 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Select the language of the Management Client Language Available languages E
190. e Systems Inc 155 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES ER E aarue s CTRL N pu UN M Validate All Rules Refresh F5 2 The Manage Rule wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field 7 In this example the rule will cover a specific camera simply called PTZ Camera and how it should behave upon an activated input We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name lanz FI Lamera to Back Door on Back Door Sensor li Tip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of Manage Rule select the required rule type gt In this example we want to base the rule on an event Therefore we select Perform an action on lt event gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half or the wizard window Next Ede the mle description click an underined Rem Perfonm an action on event from davices racordarkarvar Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content Event link Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are related to plug ins dependent on hardware conf
191. e cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such motion detection can also be used in system rules although that is beyond the scope of this example 142 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Prerequisites This rule is based on motion detection on a specific camera Therefore motion detection must be enabled on the camera in order for the rule to work as intended Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e Motion detection is enabled for the camera in question Show me how to verify this To verify that motion detection has been enabled for a camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Select the required camera from the list and select the Motion tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 On the Motion tab verify that the Enable motion detection check box is selected Dese aif Propesies mu z Uh amena 3 Bie Sector Tp Pius Sedim Back Docs p Fia Bacto Enance r Hien pme Vrocez p sse eevee mi S w e ipime dehecton C Une suchada veer qb itr amp nic g Ped lg euchrang E Mgr Arrow indicates position of Enable motion detection check box Note that other settings on the Motion tab such as Sensitivity
192. e for all outputs After the defined duration the output is automatically deactivated FILL IN PROPERTIES ON THE INFO TAB Lets you view and edit basic information about an output Name Name of the output Optional but highly recommended Used whenever the output is listed in the system and clients Does not have to be unique To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 115 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Description of the output Optional Will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the item s name in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 m ip Red Sector Back Doce Output Description o Red SecteyErtrance Output i4 Red Sector ception Dutpul Cutout skuabed by entrance to red sector To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Name of the hardware with which the output unit is connected The field is Hardware name non editable from here but can be changed by clicking Go To next to it This takes you to hardware information wher
193. e frame stored at specified intervals The keyframe Keyframe every contains the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames contain only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of files If the check box is not available or not selected every frame contains the entire view of the camera Not available for all codecs If you want to use a particular data rate select the check box and specify the required number of kilobytes per Data rate second in the neighboring field If the check box is not available or not selected date rate is determined entirely by the selected codec Manage local IP address ranges When the Ocularis Client connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers When clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers e When clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording servers public addresses see Network tab recording server properties on page 78 i e the address of the firewall or NA
194. e in question through the Management Client The user s Ocularis CS user rights have just been borrowed by the role but the actual user has not been assigned to the role The system does not verify that the specified user name or password is correct or that the specified user name password or Windows account name correspond to a defined user in Ocularis CS Therefore make sure that you enter the information correctly Note also that user names and passwords are case sensitive In the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save Add Ocularis CS servers To add an existing Ocularis CS installation to your system do the following 1 2 3 From the Management Client s Tools menu select Ocularis CS Servers In the Add Remove Ocularis CS Servers dialog click Add Enter the IP address or the host name of the required Ocularis CS server in the Ocularis CS server IP Host name field Enter the port number used by the Ocularis CS server s Image Server in the Port number field Tip The default port number is 80 if in doubt you can find the port number in the mage Server Administrator window on the Ocularis CS server Now enter information about the administrator of the Ocularis CS server You can do this in two ways o Select Windows and click the browse button to the right of the User name field to use the Windows authentication method which authenticates the administrator through the administrator s Win
195. e large setup offering flexibility and unlimited possibilities Refer to Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 Federated sites example scenario Limestone City The following is an example of how several systems can be integrated into a federated architecture in this case in a City Surveillance scenario 216 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture Many surveillance integrators want to integrate several independent surveillance entities into a large scale system where each site can still be used and managed locally and users and administrators can be given access to the entire large scale installation In this example several governmental and business installations must be tied together in a large scale system offering the different entities local access and management of the system as well as governmental police etc access in case of crimes and emergencies Downtown Residential City Hall public places Residential area shops A C M E Industries Inc amp branch offices Limestone Transportation Ltd MB Industries N Oo FO A W N Police Headquarters 8 Limestone Center Shopping Mall All entities must be connected to the city s video surveillance so that City Hall officials and police officers can access video from their business or residential area to monitor live video or investigate recorded video in case of break ins thefts vandalis
196. e required archive directory and all of its content for example everything under F rNOurArchiveN If wishing to only back up the recordings from a particular camera from a particular period of time back up the contents of the relevant sub directories only for example everything under sea Ft OurArchive Archivel Camera 1 on Axis Q7404 Video Server 10 100 50 137 2011210 05T7T11 23 474102 00N 64 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Archive and virus scanning If you are using virus scanning software on the computer on which the camera databases you want to archive are located or on a computer to which data is archived it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data which is being archived This may affect system performance negatively Also virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively If possible you should therefore disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving locations Frequently asked questions about archiving What happens if a storage area becomes unavailable If a storage area becomes unavailable for example if the storage area is located on a network drive and the connection to the drive is lost it will not be possible to store recordings in the storage area Your system registers the availability of its recording server
197. e speaker is placed 3 Right click the required speaker and select Enabled On some devices a speaker can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a speaker does not work after enabling it in the Management Client you should verify whether the problem may be due to the speaker being disabled on the device itself CONFIGURE SPEAKERS You configure individual speakers by selecting the required speaker in the list then specifying the speaker s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Info see Info tab overview on page 119 The selected speaker s name etc Settings see Settings tab overview on page The selected speaker s general settings 121 Record see The selected speaker s recording database and archiving storage settings Record tab overview on page 125 VIEW CURRENT STATE OF SPEAKERS When you have selected a speaker in the Management Client information about the current status of the selected speaker is presented in the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 When a speaker is not active it is shown as When a speaker is active it is shown as READ SPEAKER LIST S STATUS ICONS The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 input see Manage
198. e the name is editable Non editable field displaying the unit on which the output can be found on the hardware For hardware capable of having more than one output unit Unit number attached the unit number will typically indicate the number of the output port to which the output is attached For hardware with for example four output ports the numbers will typically range from O to 3 FILL IN PROPERTIES ON THE SETTINGS TAB Lets you verify or edit key output settings such as active output state output trigger time etc for a selected output or for all outputs within a selected device group However if the device group contains 400 cameras or more the Settings tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the drivers for the cameras in question and is likely to vary depending on the output selected Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max 5 seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information Content is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change the values 1 Select the row with the property you want to change 2 Click the button to the right of the properties column 3 Change the value
199. e to a recording server 78 Add notification profiles 230 Add Ocularis CS servers 265 Add site to hierarchy 276 284 Add users and groups through Active Directory normal way 235 Add users not using Active Directory 237 Add edit STSs 58 Add publish Download Manager installer components e 20 21 Address Range Scanning 62 68 Administrators role and federated sites 278 279 285 286 Alternative upgrade for workgroup 14 27 Appendix 327 Application rights 247 Archive and virus scanning 75 Archive structure 74 Assign a default preset position 118 Assign basic users to role 242 Assign failover recording servers 89 299 305 Assign IP address range 91 Assign Windows users and groups to role 241 Attach a device or group of devices to storage area 71 73 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Index Authorize a recording server 39 76 Automatic manual activation of output 137 AVI compression settings 273 AVI generation 271 Axis One Click Camera connection properties 58 59 60 B Back up archived recordings 73 Back up log server database 292 Backup restore and move system configuration 291 Basic rules of federated sites 277 279 285 286 288 289 290 Basic user properties 249 Basics 39 C Camera 148 152 159 Change log language 258 Change recording server settings 314 315 Change Software License Code 57 321 Change the ma
200. e you have run the installer single components can be re installed from the management server download web page see Download Manager download web page on page 19 Refer to Download Manager s standard installers users see Download Manager s standard installers user on page 20 to see what component are available for separate download Since most single component installer elements are identical to the common installer elements single component installers are not described in detail Only exception is the failover recording server installer see Install failover recording server recording server on page 16 As well as installing on physical servers your system installation can also take place on virtualized servers see Install your system on virtual servers on page 18 Install your system preconditions If you are upgrading from a previous version refer to Upgrade from previous version on page 25 If you plan to run OnSSI Federated Architecture refer to About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 If you run workgroups make sure to ignore the normal installation guidelines and use the alternative method for installing for workgroups indicated in the following e Microsoft Windows Installer 4 5 only on Windows Server 2003 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 13 Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Before installing your system it is important to install Windows Installer 4 5 SQL Server
201. eate an archive select the wanted storage area by clicking it in the Recording and archiving configuration list 2 Next click the L button located below the Recording and archiving configuration list 3 This opens the Archive Settings dialog where you must specify the required settings see Storage and Recording settings on page 71 Click OK STORAGE AND RECORDING SETTINGS In the Archive settings specify the following Name Rename the storage area if needed Names must be unique Type or use the browser link next to the field to specify the path to the directory in which to save the storage area The storage area does not necessarily have to be located on the recording server computer itself If the directory you plan to use does not already exist you can create it using the browser dialog Network drives must be specified using UNC Universal Naming Convention format example server volume directory Path On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 71 Management Client Retention time Maximum size Schedule Reduce frame rate Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Select a number of units and select either Days or Hours to specify how long recordings should stay in the archive before being deleted or archived depending on archive settings The retention time must always be longer than the retention time of the last archive or the recording database This is due to the fact that the number of retention days stated
202. ed Fools Sechon zu Dary Products Section 2n Frezh Froduce Section Frozen Food Sechon Le Household Goods Section Poli Section r Soft Onmks Section immediately The wizard automatically suggests that the camera moves to the preset position immediately after it has paused patrolling Clicking the immediately link lets you specify a delay if required priority Clicking the priority link lets you specify the priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 of the camera position 7 In this example the wizard s suggestion immediately suits us fine so we leave it as it is The rule description now indicates which camera will pause patrolling which preset position it will move to and how soon xt Edit the rule description click an underlined item rform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor iuse patrolling on FITZ Camera and Move PT Camera to position PT Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 500 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard 7 Onstep 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started 7 In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would make the camera pause patrolling then move to the preset position and remain there indefinitely Based on the elements in our rule description we therefore must select a stop criterion S
203. ed on Camera 1 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 145 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Next Edt the rule descnplion click an underlined item Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set lve frame rate on the device on which event occurred to 25 frames per second Perform stop action on Motion End from Camera 1 This is just what we want we do not need to change any of the wizard s suggestions However we still need to define exactly which kind of stop action should take place when motion ends on Camera 1 8 Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard In this step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions nd In this example Based on the start action set frame rate in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action restore default frame rate It furthermore suggests that the default frame rate should be restored immediately after the last detected motion lest Ede the mule descnption click an undenined Kem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set live frame rate on the device on which event occurrec to 25 frames per second Perform stop action on Motion End from Camera 1 restore default ine frame rate immediately This is also just what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g 3 seconds Your rule is by default active mea
204. efer to Configurable events devices on page 162 Occurs when motion is no longer detected in received video See also the description of the Motion Started event Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is activated This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when the state of an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is changed regardless of which state the external input unit is changed to This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is deactivated This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is started on a camera This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is stopped on a camera This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs wh
205. eferably the same time server The following articles from Microsoft describe what to do in different situations e How to configure an authoritative time server in Windows Server 2003 e Registry entries for the W32Time service If these links do not work for you try searching www microsoft com for time server time service synchronize servers or similar It is also very important that Ocularis Client s are time synchronized with the management server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 81 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Devices About devices You can either add see Add hardware on page 53 or replace see About hardware on page 55 devices In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you are able to work with the following under Devices Here you can handle the majority of camera configuration and Cameras management On many devices you can attach external microphones Some devices Microphones icu Di even have built in microphones On many devices you can attach external loudspeakers Some devices Speakers even have built in speakers On many devices you can attach external units typically external sensors Inputs to input ports on the device Input from such external input units can be used for many purposes in the system On many devices you can attach external units to output ports on the Outputs device This allows you to activate deactivate lights sirens e
206. either select the device and click the Add button double click the device or simply drag the device from one list to the other Tip When devices are grouped into so called device groups you can quickly move all devices in a group simply by moving the group folder When the required devices are listed in the Se ected devices list click OK You have now specified the exact content of the first part of the rule description Ne Edit the mule description click an underlined tem Example only your selections may be different Perform an action in a time interval If you select a time based rule no more information is required on the wizard s first step 4 Click Next to go to the wizard s second step On the wizard s second step you are able to define further conditions for the rule 5 Select one or more conditions for example Day of week is lt day gt First Select conditions to apply C within selected time in ime profile E Outside selected time in time profile within the time period lt startime gt to lt endtime gt vliDay of week is lt days gt Example only your selections may be different Depending on your selections the lower part of the wizard window lets you edit the rule description Next Edit the mle descnption cick an underlined tem Example only your selections may be different 170 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Clien
207. en motion is no longer detected in received video See also the description of the Motion Started event Occurs when recording is started Occurs when recording is stopped Occurs when settings on a device are successfully changed Occurs when an attempt is made to change settings on a device and the attempt is unsuccessful 163 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Predefined events external Request Start Recording N A Request Stop Recording N A User defined events external A number of events custom made to suit your system may also be selectable Such user defined events can be used for e Making it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in the Ocularis Client e Countless other purposes For example you may create user defined events which will occur if a particular type of data is received from a device For information about how to define user defined events in the Management Client refer to Manage user defined events on page 180 Recording servers Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 61 Archive Available for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see Archive Unavailable next Occurs when an archive see About storage and archiving on page 61 for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to an archive located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will Archive Un
208. enabled for the camera in question Before creating a rule it is therefore highly recommended that you verify that the devices involved will be able to perform as intended For a number of typically required rules such prerequisites are described in Create typical rules on page 142 166 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client How a rule is triggered Two types of conditions can trigger rules When events occur on the surveillance system for example when motion is Events detected when the system receives input from external sensors etc When specific periods of time are entered for example Thursday 16th me August 2007 from 07 00 to 07 59 or every Saturday and Sunday What you can cover in a rule Your exact number of options depends on the type of rule you want to create and on the number of devices available on your system Rules however provide a high degree of flexibility You are able to combine event and time conditions you are able to specify several actions in a single rule and very often you are able to create rules covering several or all of the devices on your system You can make your rules as simple or complex as required For example you can create very simple time based rules Example gt Very Simple Time Based Rule On Mondays between 08 30 and 11 30 time condition Camera 1 and Camera 2 should start recording action when the time period begins and stop reco
209. ent Client particular camera will validate OK if the elements in the rule itself are correct even though motion detection which is enabled on a camera level not through rules has not been enabled for the camera in question To validate an individual rule or all rules in one go do the following in the Management Client 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the rule you wish to validate and select Validate Rule or Validate All Rules depending on your needs 2 A simple dialog will inform you whether the rule s validated successfully or not If you chose to validated more than one rule and one or more rules did not succeed the dialog will list the names of the affected rules Manage time profiles Time profiles are periods of time defined by the administrator Time profiles can be used when creating rules see Manage rules on page 165 for example a rule specifying that a certain action should take place within a certain time period As an alternative to time profiles refer to Day length time profiles see Manage day length time profiles on page 176 Time profiles are also assigned to roles see Manage roles on page 184 Per default all roles are assigned the default time profile Always This means that members of roles with this default time profile attached has no time based limits to their user rights in the system An alternative time profile can easily be assigned to a role see Add a rol
210. ent clients which are unlicensed and can be downloaded and installed for free as many times as needed e A Download Manager Finally your system handles an unlimited number of cameras servers and users across multiple sites if required About updates OnSSI regularly releases service updates for our products offering improved functionality and support for new devices If you are a system administrator OnSSI recommends that you check the website for updates at regular intervals in order to make sure you are using the most recent version of your system Management Server What Stores the surveillance system s camera and other configuration in a relational database either on the management server computer itself or on a separate SQL Server on the network Also handles user authentication rules etc To enhance system performance several management servers can be run as an OnSSl Federated Architecture see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 Where Runs as a service and is typically installed on a dedicated server What comes with the management server When you install the management server you get the following integrated components as well if you select a single server management server installation see Install your system Single Server option on page 14 The log server o What Provides the necessary functionality for logging information from your system o Where Usually installed on the same se
211. ently have licenses for In that case you must buy additional licenses before the cameras will be able to send data to your system To get additional licenses for your system contact your product vendor In the short period until you get the additional licenses you can disable some less important cameras see About hardware on page 55 to allow some of the new cameras to run instead When you have received an updated license file ic with the new licenses you must activate your licenses see Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline on page 44 Licenses and camera replacement You can replace a camera licensed in your system with a new camera and have the new camera activated and licensed instead The total number of purchased device channels corresponds to the total number of cameras that are able to run on the surveillance system simultaneously If you remove a camera from a recording server you also free a license If you replace a camera with a similar camera manufacturer brand and model and give the new camera the same IP address as the old one you will maintain full access to all the camera s databases In this case you move the network cable from the old camera to the new one without changing any settings in the Management Client and then activate the license If replacing a camera see Replace hardware device on page 56 with a different model you must use the Management Client s Replace Hardware wizard to m
212. entral element in your system Rules determine highly important settings such as when cameras should record when PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras should patrol when notifications should be sent etc Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 2 start recording 3 seconds before on the device on which event occurred Perform stop action an Motion End from Camera 2 stop recording immediately You create and manage rules in the Management Client 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the Rules and Events folder then select Rules In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 a Rules list providing an overview of all existing rules in your system will appear 2 If needed create edit copy and or validate rules from the list Tip You do not necessarily have to delete an unwanted rule you may also just temporarily deactivate the rule by clearing the Active check box in the Rule Information pane for the rule in question then saving the setting by selecting the Management Client s File menu Show me where to find the Active check box On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 165 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES darte lipire tort Blue Eector Back D e Sestor Enti is re S enepb od mas s SM om anl m eee LIRE brin Sw ret c Cin annee dae on Meer ipn e ny vehi honest exccur red FEES HD det v on Menon End vot Blue beria Back Dior Blu Sexto En Hi
213. er 37 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Is available when working with Federated architecture Servers Devices Expand or Collapse Client Rules and Events and System Dashboard A number of context specific items If relevant Be aware of the following when working with the Action menu concerning OnSSI Federated Architecture see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 To be able to delete a site without being connected to it see Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 right clicking a site does not select it but offers a context menu Because of this some context menu items may be disabled if you are not connected to the site and some are only available on the home site i e the site you are logged in to Edit menu items Undo File menu items Save Logoff Exit Help menu items Help Contents Search About Tools menu items Registered Services Ocularis CS Servers 38 Cancel your latest action Save your current configuration Log out of the Management Client and log in with another user account if necessary Close down and exit the Management Client Access a help topic relevant to your task Access the help system s table of contents Access the help system s search feature Opens a dialog displaying information about the version of your Management Client Add registered servers Add Ocularis CS servers see Manage Ocularis CS ser
214. ering the required period of time we could have just selected the time condition within selected time in lt time profile gt then pointed to the time profile in question Read more about time profiles under Manage time profiles on page 173 5 Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content start time Clicking the start time link lets you specify required start time gt In this example we want the start time to be one o clock in the afternoon so we specify 1 00 and click OK TmeofDay E Teie Raver 1400 aNg end time The end time link works just like the start time link We specify 8 00 days Clicking the days link lets you specify required days of the week c click OK In this example our rule should only apply on Saturdays so we select Saturday and Select Days x Monday Tuesday 7 Wednesday C Thursday Friday C Sunday By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this I Hest Edi the mule descnption click an underlined te Perform an action in a time interval within the time period 100 to 3 00 and dey of week is Saturday Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard 6 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform 148 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client In this example we wan
215. ers 299 303 H Handle log settings 253 262 Hard disk failure Protect your drives 310 259 Index Hardware 149 159 Help menu items 43 Hide remove Download Manager installer components e 20 21 How a rule is triggered 216 Illustration Failover process in details 300 Illustration of OnSSI Federated Architecture 275 279 281 Important prerequisites when running federated sites 275 278 Info tab recording server properties 80 Info tab overview 97 122 129 144 Info tab properties 80 Install failover recording server recording server 13 16 299 301 Install failover recording servers 301 Install in a cluster 23 25 Install multiple recording server instances 16 26 Install new management server on new server step 2 e 297 Install SNMP service 322 Install STS environment for One click camera connection 58 Install your system Custom option 15 16 17 23 Install your system Distributed option 15 17 Install your system preconditions 13 16 27 Install your system Single Server option 8 14 15 16 Install your system on virtual servers 13 18 260 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal 13 Installation overview 13 18 23 26 31 39 275 276 Installation troubleshooting 27 Introductions 8 Issue Changes to SQL server location prevents database access 29 Insufficient continuous virtual memory fails
216. ers 40 97 123 128 130 136 142 145 164 Manage time profiles e 41 167 183 188 225 228 235 Manage user defined events 159 160 167 212 233 Manage users and groups 9 41 44 235 237 240 Manage video device drivers 13 298 Manage view groups 166 240 Management Client 9 31 Management Client Menu Overview 33 42 281 284 Management Client Overview 31 58 70 73 80 133 134 136 140 141 142 145 146 150 151 160 163 223 234 249 265 270 317 Management Client s elements 31 Management Server 8 267 275 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Index Management Server service and Recording Server service 16 17 24 25 26 79 94 292 293 296 297 313 Manual 62 68 Manual back up of system configuration 294 Manual backup and restore of system configuration 291 293 Memory Indicator 35 Menu Bar 33 Microphone 152 159 Microphone and speaker 149 More about administrators role 238 More about installing 16 More about OnSSI Interconnect 68 Motion detection settings 101 Motion tab camera properties 97 100 Move non archived recordings from one storage to another 86 88 Move panes 45 Move system configuration to new management server 294 295 Multicasting tab recording server properties 90 99 270 Multi domain with one way trust 325 Multiple management servers cluster 23 Multiple recording server instances
217. ers or for all microphones or speakers within a selected device group Content of the Settings tab may vary depending on the types of microphones or speakers selected HARDWARE Lets you verify or edit settings for the hardware selected under a recording server The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the hardware in question and may vary depending on the type of hardware selected For some types of hardware the Settings tab may display no content at all or read only content SPECIFY COMMON SETTINGS FOR ALL ITEMS IN A DEVICE GROUP CAMERAS MICROPHONES AND SPEAKERS If using Device Groups see About device groups on page 104 you are able to quickly specify common settings for all devices within a given device group 1 In the list of device in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s items i e cameras microphones or speakers will be listed 2 You are now able to verify or change both common settings and settings for individual item types within the device group 122 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Example are from camera From the menu above the settings list select the required type of item Aust 212 PTZ Network Cama I Example are from camera 3 Make changes as needed Example are from ca
218. ersion viewed by surveillance system administrators The third level refers to the languages in which the web page is available The fourth level refers to the components which are or can be made available to users The fifth level refers to particular versions of each component which are or can be made available to users The sixth level refers to the language versions of the components which are or can be made available to users The fact that only standard components are initially available and only in the same language version as the system itself helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is no need to have a component or language version available on the server if nobody uses it You can however make more components and or languages available see Add publish Download Manager installer components on page 20 as required Likewise you can hide or remove unwanted components and or languages see Hide remove Download Manager installer components on page 21 Download Manager s standard installers user By default the following components are available for separate installation from the management server s download web page targeted at users controlled by the Download Manager e Recording servers including failover recording servers failover recording servers are initially downloaded and installed as recording servers during the installation process you specify that you want a failover recor
219. es example scenario Limestone City ccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeas 216 ILLUSTRATION OF ONSSI FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE 0cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeeseeessaeeeeeas 218 MANAGE NSST FEDERATED ARCHITECTURE eraser Scat ied ed al oeste desint iden oet s o dele teins 219 Federate dico NT PEE 219 ExpandcolapS RN EE ETE ULL 220 Site Navigation Dalle cese ex Moe Daci tabo Qurutnt tau ea deles e A cedbdeka iussa RT Le DERI Da Ede e p fure peu P EM rues 220 PIGMECICK eoruni EOE D 220 CONTEXT MON NORTE ER 220 Ada Ste TO n fcio a PER E OT DITE 220 Accept inclusion in hierarchy E TTE E E 221 Connect to another site in DIerarcEiy s uota c coo un ops ctr aon ento nex a kv anb ort cbr aad echa g en x RAPERE UR ua Es 222 Detaclhra site from TDilelare iy oes seecc ck dco cance Gees GLO vest as iso pede DUestatice edad eL cu ves mag Os E EEA 222 Refresh ste MENA GY ee Y M accers 223 FRO MAIC S Menr secauteus E um E EUN 223 Set site properties MEME 223 BACKUP RESTORE AND MOVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ce cccecceesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeseeeeneanes 226 SCHEDULED BACKUP AND RESTORE OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION cccceeceeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesaaeeeeseaeeesaaeeeesaees 226 Flush SOL server iransaclioh IOC aranea ups cua cest aput ca adi c vana ao bas bic adidas UL sees 226 FRETS NS SS te les ts Dp baat Sa c 226 Scheduled back up of s
220. es to use in the detection process If you successfully detect hardware a Success message will appear in the Status column If you fail to add a network range click the Failed error message to see why Once detection is complete click Next 6 Choose to enable or disable successfully detected hardware and cameras Detected hardware such as hardware device camera microphone and speaker is listed individually allowing you to for example add a hardware device s camera without enabling its speaker if needed 7 Select a default group for all device types or group the devices individually The devices are listed according to type for example camera microphone speaker Click Finish Tip The list of drivers that appears when you scan is typically very long and by default all drivers are selected With Select All and Clear All you can avoid having to select clear all check boxes manually Tip Select the Show hardware running on other recording servers check box to see if detected hardware is running on other recording servers Remote connect hardware Remote Connect hardware automatically scans for hardware connected via a remotely connected server 1 Select Remote Connect hardware and click Next 2 Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator will show you how far you are in the detection process 3 Once detection has completed select which hardware you want to add and click Next About hardware What is the diffe
221. ese oc occa eh aun ciate acechae Dco egeo seca ede esee Cove Oc ode tos 252 DA EOGPRIBSAVING TIVE rur Au PL UL KS ELLE cL d LU D EL s RE LE ae Oe D EK LC E epi 252 Spring Switch from standard time to DST sssssssssssssssseeeneenenn nennen enn nnne nnns 252 Fall Switch trom DSI to standard mG auo oos cos oe aio Be pde z cec a oca elc le 252 MULTI DOMAIN WITH ONE WAY TRUST cccccccecccccecccccccecacecacacacaeaeanaeaeaeanaeanaeanaeanaeanananaeanananananananananas 254 SETOPANWITHONE WAY TRUS ura et a Ses tn eg aS ut ua d er ut 254 VAN cl 2 ca _ SORE Ea PO CSO DEL IDEE IR T PoE FO EEC TPT ee t Pee NU DU ET PP 255 PORTS USED BY THE SYSTEM cre is a wen eg c ELLE eene csc eves poses cee een Bere see 255 INDEX 2 ed acc N Cac is rachael seared DELE Aes ata IO c TD SEA LEE MEL ALIE 256 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 7 Introductions Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Introductions Product overview This system is a fully distributed solution designed for large multi site and multiple server installations requiring 24 7 surveillance with support for devices from different vendors The solution offers centralized management of all devices servers and users and empowers an extremely flexible rule system driven by schedules and events The Ocularis LS ES recording component consists of the following main elements e The management server the center of the installation e One or more recording servers e One or more managem
222. eseeeeeesaeeees 31 WY Tf OER SF eee et eer CU ey eee ere 32 FOOD AM RU UNE UN TK TENES 32 Memory NCH CAL ON sch crate ohnns Snsitt aa teda vpevaba tia os Seodid cat adt cda prse Data Oen egal d cautadad ied Ne dune hath 32 PPANES OVERVIEW ctetu S beraten uui tad dic ur Ln Lp SaL ae eee CE 33 BSS oe P edt cd 35 e ccomt 35 Use the Management Client to Log in to the Management Server ccccecccceececeeeeceeesaeeeeeeeeeees 37 Management Client Menu Overview ssssssssssssseeee nennen nennen nennen nnne n nnne nnne nnn nnn nnns nnns 37 Customize the Management Client s layout cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeneeesaees 39 Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline cc cecccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeas 44 ADOUEIICOBDSBS a4 tontescd artnet a asc aratiode Locus tae a ain seh eeelesigadecaneatasel ius 47 Manage Software License COdEG cccccccssececceeeecseneeeceuseecceueeesseuseecsusceeseeeesseueeessseeeseusesseneenenes 48 REMOTE CONNECT SERVICES auctis estzendncryavicaewsewsaacsacesmadua A au audi SEM bU IEEE SUA 50 ADOULTEMOLS connect SCIVICES eresian xdi eol oun Fede vetu atcur Deuda aPubt ur Serv ddbal E 50 Axis One Click Camera connection properties cccccecccceececeececeeecceececeececsueesseeeeseeceseueessneessaeeeees 52 SERVERS AND HARDWARE mocnego urena cece Sol
223. et positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 Before you are able to work with patrolling you must have specified at least two preset positions for the camera You manage patrolling on the Patrolling tab which is available only when the selected camera is a PTZ camera Patrolling profiles are the definitions of how patrolling should take place This includes the order in which the camera should move between preset positions how long it should remain at each position for etc You are able to create an unlimited number of such patrolling profiles and use them in your rules See Manage rules on page 165 For example you may create a rule specifying that one patrolling profile should be used during daytime opening hours and another during nights In order to use PTZ cameras features including the ability to pan tilt and Zoom operators must have a role which gives them the necessary rights Refer to About roles on page 182 for more information including step by step descriptions of how to assign users to roles and how to specify the rights of roles aa Vance Prii p ra didja Hename Dee aud lf R Li J Fe Feci Specie 4k F ie ee 0 Eapectad ee once j ala Praline Serio Seamed toon i Fy Seton Eoi Ds 1 i in hall Conic arm g San hrd rilir LA Plages ig cheater at Bach Decor IE rd Peateorn Une iss ETE t r m pa Ah gt Cumas Biel fe Ge bo spec
224. et uvae ERE E aai o Vnd mda r tate E dean dpedan fa M N apa usa ade 26 Issue Recording server startup fails due to port conflict eeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 26 Issue Manual installation of IIS if needed 0 ee ccccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeesaeeeessaeeseeeas 27 Issue Changes to SQL server location prevents database ACCESS ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeees 28 Issue Insufficient continuous virtual memory fails installation seseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 28 Issue Multi domain environments one way trusts not working cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeseeeess 29 REMOVE SYSTEM COMPONENTS ciere nteni na curseur mitad du es Ram E ey dut camputs one a Deoa mM UAES ad 29 Remove TecordBirig Serl Vel escena Nasonis daar tetris cusa a Gee dde da uda c E SG u AR Ead duc cn pK FD KU ER 29 MANAGEMENT CLIENT 5 5 crim cro Saeco Rede p adu ERE aids eO eu CabradVs uu ate Loa aed a LER e Cepheus e Udo rH CR D IN CE EEE 30 MANAGEMENT CLIENT OVERVIEW 562 cii si anni aeneis a Cota ince oo cu aes abe Lope used o tea pe adr beue abes b nete trees 30 4 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Contents Management Client s elements cccccceececceeececceeecccsuncecceececseeeecsuucecsaseesseueeessesesseueeessegeesessaes 30 Site Navigation pane and Federated Hierarchy pane ccccccssceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeee
225. ettings The Recording Server Settings window appears Verify change the following settings o Management server hostname IP address Specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the management server to which the recording server should be connected This information is necessary in order for the recording server to be able to communicate with the management server o Management server port Specify the port number to be used when communicating with the management server Default is port 9993 although you can change this if required 5 Click OK 6 To start the Recording Server service again right click the notification area s Recording Server icon and select Start Recording Server service Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray It is located at the far right of the recording server computer s Windows taskbar Servers and clients require time synchronization Part of the security surrounding the use of clients with your system is based on time based tokens Why servers require time synchronization When a client logs in to the surveillance system the client receives a token from the management server The token contains important security related time information The management server also sends a similar token to the required recording server s This is partly due to the fact that recording servers may be located all around the world Each recording se
226. event ends Occurs when client users request a live stream from a device The event occurs upon the request even if the client user s request Live Client Feed Requested subsequently turns out to be unsuccessful for example because the client user does not have the rights required for viewing the requested live feed or because the feed is for some reason stopped Live Client Feed Terminated Occurs when client users no longer request a live stream from a device 162 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Motion Started Motion Stopped Output Activated Output Changed Output Deactivated PTZ Manual Session Started Manual PTZ Session Stopped Motion Stopped Recording Started Recording Stopped Settings Changed Settings Changed Error On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Management Client Occurs when the system detects motion in video received from cameras This type of event requires that the system s motion detection is enabled for the cameras to which the event will be linked Exactly what constitutes motion depends on the motion detection settings specified for individual cameras in the system In addition to the system s motion detection some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such camera detected motion detection can also be used in system rules however they do not work until configured on the camera hardware itself R
227. ew to create a new basic user c Click OK The selected basic user s are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of basic users who have been assigned the selected role REMOVE USERS AND GROUPS FROM ROLE Bear in mind that a user may also have roles through group memberships When that is the case you cannot remove the individual user from the role Group members may also hold roles as individuals To find out which roles users groups or individual group members have use the Effective Roles see Manage roles on page 184 feature a Onthe Users amp Groups tab select the user or group you want to remove then click Remove in the lower part of the tab Tip You can select more than one user or group or a combination of groups and individual users if required b Confirm that you want to remove the selected user s or and group s Click Yes Specify rights of a role 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and select Roles Then select the required role in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 187 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Name La Administrators b ZIETFIPTTETETIUTSITITYITNWTTTIIUETETE 1r UPIUTTTITTYTETY DP St es ee a ees ae eae f Building E Bec Staff NL Dubia tran Cm inh CIAM In the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 specify required rights for the role on
228. f required be started stopped automatically through a rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 83 Management Client 9 oF S amp Si di do go CLIENT TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Item recording Speaker being recorded Note that what is being said through the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no information is transferred to the system In which case if it is a camera neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped item will still be able to communicate with the recording server as opposed to when an item is disabled Item disabled Cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server In the case of a camera when a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible Item database being repaired Item requires attention Status unknown Note that some icons may be combined as in this example where Item is enabled is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item The Client tab lets you specify information which wil
229. f wanted you can select more actions in the Manage Rule s step 3 Step 3 Actions Do so or click Next to continue to the next step 7 n Manage Rule s step 4 Step 4 Stop criteria select one of the stop actions for instance to deactivate the output after a certain time or event 8 Click Finish to save the rule RULE THAT MAKES AN OUTPUT TRIGGERS AN ACTION In the Rules feature all registered external output activation deactivation or change is treated as an event Based on an event you are able to specify a wide variety of actions to take To define a rule where an output activates an action do the following 1 Start the Manage Rule In step 1 Type of rule select Perform an action on event gt 2 Click event in the initial rule description 3 Inthe Select an Event dialog in the Devices Predefined Events group see Predefined events devices on page 162 select the appropriate option for your rule Output Activated Output Changed or Output Deactivated Click OK 4 Click devices recorders servers in the initial rule description In the Select Devices and Groups dialog select the required output Click OK Click Next to continue to step 2 Conditions and if needed select a condition Continue to step 3 Actions and select one or more actions 7 If you do not want to define a stop action skip this step If you want to define a stop action for instance to deactivate the output again click Next to continue
230. fail for some reason the central site will miss out on recording sequences However once the network is re established the central site automatically retrieves remote recordings covering the down period This requires use of the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored option see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 Naturally you can mix any of the above solutions to fit your organizations special needs On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 59 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Interconnect and licensing Cameras under remote sites in a OnSSI Interconnect setup are listed on the License Information page see License information on page 47 of the central site They are listed according to the same rules as other devices and are named just like normal devices but with OnSSI Interconnect in front like this e OnSSI Interconnect Device Channels e OnSSI Interconnect Cameras Update remote site hardware 1 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system Right click it From the menu that appears select Update Hardware This opens the Update hardware dialog 4 This dialog lists all changes devices removed updated and added in the remote sys
231. for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of Manage Rule the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Resume patrolling Without this stop action patrolling would potentially pause indefinitely You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Move device to Moves a particular camera to a particular preset position however always according preset position with to priority When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to select a PTZ priority priority preset position Only one preset position on one camera can be selected it is not possible to select several preset positions If your system is upgraded to version 4 0 or future versions rule priority settings is a new feature Existing rules created without priority automatically get priority 1 It is strongly recommended to reconsider this lowest possible priority for all affected rules This type of action requires that the device s to which the action will be linked is are a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device Furthermore it requires that at least one preset position has been defined for those devices You define preset positions for a
232. for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process Example If you specify 24 hours recordings must be at least a day old before they will be archived If archiving is scheduled to take place before the 24 hours have passed only recordings older than 24 hours will be archived Bear in mind that the archive s scheduling may mean that recordings will be older than the specified number of hours before they are archived This may especially be the case if you specify an archiving schedule with long time spans between archiving Archiving is set up by adjusting several interdependent settings see About storage and archiving on page 61 Select the maximum number of gigabytes of recording data to save in the recording database Example If you want to store up to 100 gigabytes of recording data in the database select 100 Recording data in excess of the specified number of gigabytes will be auto moved to the first archive in the list if any is specified or deleted IMPORTANT This is one of two maximum size settings for the storage area The Retention Time setting specified earlier may mean that recordings are removed from the archive before the specified number of gigabytes is reached IMPORTANT The oldest data in a database is always auto archived or deleted if no next archive is defined when less than 5GB of space is free If less than 1GB space is free data is deleted A database always requires 250MB of free s
233. functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Setting determines whether o Visible the selected microphone s will be visible in the Ocularis Client o Listen to live audio listening to live audio from the selected microphone s will be possible in the Ocularis Client o Browse audio browsing of recorded audio from the selected microphone s will be possible in the Ocularis Client o Export audio the export feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected microphone s in the Ocularis Client o Get sequences This feature is currently not supported the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected microphone s in the Ocularis Client Speaker related rights Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Setting determines whether o Visible the selected speaker s will be visible in the Ocularis Client o Listen to live audio listening to live audio from the selected speaker s will be possible in the Ocularis Client o Browse audio browsing of recorded audio from the selected speaker s will be possible in the Ocularis Client o Export audio the export feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected speaker s in the Ocularis Client o Get sequences This feature is currently not supported the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the
234. g 253 View menu items 44 View status messages 309 314 315 View the current state of an input 132 View version information 309 314 316 View edit a recording server s properties 77 Virus scanning 320 Virus scanning information 22 320 W What are the requirements 91 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Index What happens while the management server is unavailable 296 What is multicasting 90 What you can cover in a rule 216 Why servers require time synchronization 95 Why use a public address 92 Windows Task Manager Careful when ending processes 310 Work with system monitor 250 Work with users groups and roles 240 318 265
235. g server While the 66 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Management Client loads information about the recording server the text expanding is displayed next to that recording server Recording Server Recording Servers ie My Recording Server expanding Add hardware to a recording server You add IP hardware such as cameras video encoders etc to recording servers in your system through the Add Hardware wizard The wizard helps you scan your network for relevant hardware Refer to the wizard Add hardware on page 53 for more information Manage hardware on a recording server You have several options for managing hardware such as cameras video encoders and so on on recording servers in your system refer to About devices on page 82 Remove a recording server IMPORTANT Removing a recording server will remove all configuration specified for the recording server through the Management Client including all of the recording server s associated hardware cameras input devices and so on 1 Expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select the Recording Servers node 2 Right click the no longer required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 From the menu that appears select Remove Recording Server 4 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove
236. g servers e When clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses see Manage local IP address ranges on page 210 and port numbers e When clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording server s public address i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers To provide access to the surveillance system from outside a NAT Network Address Translation firewall the system lets you use public addresses and port forwarding This will allow clients from outside the firewall to connect to recording servers without using VPN Virtual Private Network Each recording server and failover recording server can be mapped to a specific port and the port can be forwarded through the firewall to the server s internal address ENABLE PUBLIC ACCESS To enable public access select the Network tab s Enable public access box DEFINE PUBLIC ADDRESS AND PORT When public access is enabled you can define the recording server s public address and public port number in the Public address and Public port fields respectively As public address use the address of the firewall or NAT router which clients accessing the surveillance system from the internet must go through in order to reach recording servers 78 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis
237. gement server Regular failover setups 1 To check whether it is running or not a failover recording server has a non stop TCP connection to a recording server 2 This connection is interrupted i e the recording server is not running 3 The failover recording server requests the current configuration of the recording server from the management server The management server sends the requested configuration the failover recording server receives the configuration starts up and starts recording on behalf of the recording server 4 The failover recording server and the relevant camera s exchange video data 5 The failover recording server continually tries to re establish connection to the recording server 6 When the connection to the recording server is re established the failover recording server shuts down and the recording server fetches video data if any recorded during its down time and the video data is merged back in to the recoding servers database Failover steps for hot standby setups 1 To check whether it is running or not a hot standby server has a non stop TCP connection to its assigned recording server 2 This connection is interrupted i e the recording server is not running 3 From the management server the hot standby server already knows the current configuration of its assigned recording server and starts recording on its behalf 4 The hot standby server and the relevant camera s exchange video
238. ges made to the system configuration between the time you create a copy and the time you restore it on your new management server will be lost If changes are made after the copy was made you will have to make a new copy Note that the system basically will not work while the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 is stopped Remember to start the service again once you have finished backing up the database First part of a copy is in reality identical to a scheduled backup see Scheduled back up of system configuration on page 226 steps 1 3 What happens while the management server is unavailable e Recording servers will still be able to record Any currently working recording servers will have received a copy of their configuration from the management server so they will be able to work and store recordings on their own while the management server is down Scheduled and motion triggered recording will therefore work and event triggered recording will also work unless based on events related to the management server or any other recording server since these go through the management server e Recording servers will temporarily store log data locally They will automatically send log data to the management server when the it becomes available again o Clients will not be able to log in Client access is authorized through the management server Without the management server c
239. h event occurred The wizard furthermore prompts us to specify the required number of frames per second Next Edi the rule descnption click an underlined Rem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set live frame rate on the device on which event occurred t fantes per second To specify the required number of frames per second we click the frames per second link specify a frame rate of 25 and click OK Frame Rate Z Select brane raba 29 00 t The rule description now indicates that the frame rate will be set to 25 frames per second 7 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started 7 In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would set the frame rate for the camera to 25 FPS indefinitely upon motion detection Based on the elements in our rule description the wizard therefore automatically suggests the stop criterion Perform stop action on lt event gt First Select stop crena amp Perform stop action on event Q Peston stop action after a time Note that the stop criterion No actions performed on rule end is not available a stop criterion must be defined for this type of rule In the rule description the wizard furthermore automatically suggests that the stop action is performed when motion is no longer detect
240. h to replace 2 From the menu that appears select Replace Hardware The Replace Hardware wizard appears Click Next 4 Inthe wizard in the Address field marked by red arrow in the image enter the IP address of the new hardware If known select relevant hardware device driver from the Hardware Driver drop down list marked by red arrow in the image Otherwise select Auto Detect If port user name or and password data is different for the new device also correct this before starting the auto detect process if needed Tip The wizard is prefilled with data from the existing hardware device If you replace it with a similar hardware device you can reuse some of this data for example port and driver information 5 Doone ofthe following o Ifyou selected the required hardware device driver directly from the list click Next o If you selected Auto Detect in the list click Auto Detect wait for this process to be successful marked by a to the far left click Next This step is designed to help you map devices and their databases depending on the number of individual cameras microphones inputs outputs and so on attached to the old hardware device and the new respectively It is important to consider how to map databases from the old hardware device to databases of the new hardware device You do the actual mapping of individual cameras microphones inputs outputs and so on by selecting a corresponding camera microphone i
241. he mouse pointer over the item s name in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 r3 B LoL Lo PP Receptia Stairs ls Camera covering reception area To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 only relevant for camera microphone and speaker Name of the hardware with which the item is connected The field is non editable from here but can be changed by clicking Go To next to it This takes you to hardware information where the name is editable only relevant for camera microphone and speaker Non editable field displaying the unit on which the item is attached on the hardware For single device hardware the unit number will typically be 7 For multi device hardware such as video servers with several channels the unit number will typically indicate the channel on which the item is attached e g 3 This field is not in use only relevant for hardware Hardware serial number as specified by the manufacturer The serial number is often but not always identical to the MAC address only relevant for hardware and video encoders Firmware version of the system as specified by the manufacturer For a video en coder it is the firmware version of the remote site system only relevant for hardware and video encoders Hardware Media Access Control MAC address of the system hardware A MAC address is a 12 character hexadecimal
242. he range in the End field For more info see the following In the Start field specify the first port number in the required range Then Pon specify the last port number in the range in the End field If a recording server has more than one network interface card it is only possible to multicast on one of them This field is therefore relevant if your recording server has more than one network interface card or if it has a Source IP address for all network interface card with more than one IP address multicast streams To use the recording server s default interface leave the value 0 0 0 0 IPv4 or IPv6 in the field If you want to use another network interface card or a different IP address on the same network interface card specify the IP address of the required interface SPECIFY DATAGRAM OPTIONS In this section you specify settings for data packets datagrams transmitted through multicasting Maximum Transmission Unit the largest allowed physical data packet size measured in bytes Messages larger than the specified MTU will be split into smaller packets before being sent Default value is 1500 which is also the default on most Windows computers and Ethernet networks MTU Time To Live the largest allowed number of hops a data packet should be TTL able to travel before it is discarded or returned A hop is a point between two network devices typically a router Default value is 128 ENABLE MULTICASTING FOR INDI
243. he video encoder The Settings tab lets you enable the use of PTZ separately for each of the video encoder s channels To access the PTZ tab select the required hardware in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select the PTZ tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Not all video encoders support the use of PTZ cameras Even video encoders which support the use of PTZ cameras may require configuration such as installation of additional drivers typically through accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address before PTZ cameras can be used On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 131 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Papert io Dec Labia PTE PLS Deca if LIB Post PiS Peto Ca I n4 1 w Plu usn d L1 Mh Seeing gU PTZ ENABLE PTZ ON A VIDEO ENCODER To enable the use of PTZ cameras on a video encoder do the following on the PTZ tab 1 In the list of devices connected to the video encoder select the Enable PTZ box for the camera s on which you want to use PTZ Dewi Enable FTZ Camera 3 2 Inthe PTZ Device ID column verify the ID of the PTZ camera s in question 3 Inthe COM Port column select which of the video encoder s COM serial communications ports should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on each required PTZ camera COM Pot COM 1 lw COMIN COM 2 4 Inthe PTZ Protocol column select which positioning scheme to use
244. help you when selecting privacy mask regions in the preview image Showing the grid is not a requirement for selecting privacy mask regions even without the grid you are able to select privacy mask regions as described above Hiding the grid may provide a less obscured view of the preview image On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client When the Show privacy masks check box is selected default privacy mask regions will be highlighted in red in the preview image Hiding privacy mask regions may provide a less obscured view of the Show Privacy Masks preview Image However under normal circumstances it is highly recommended that you keep the Show privacy masks box selected otherwise exclude privacy mask regions may exist without you or your colleagues being aware of it Use the Pen size slider to indicate the size of the selections you wish to make when clicking and dragging the grid to select regions for privacy masking Default is set to small which is equivalent to one square in the grid Pen size Privacy masking in OnSSI Interconnect Note that in a OnSSI Interconnect setup any privacy masking see Privacy Mask tab camera properties on page 89 set on a remote system will be disregarded by the central system PTZ PATROLLING TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES The Patrolling tab lets you create patrolling profiles the automatic movement of a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera between a number of pres
245. hether you wish to register your Axis camera with the Axis dispatch service Can be done at time of setup or later only relevant for hardware Hardware serial number as specified by the manufacturer The serial number is often but not always identical to the MAC address If it was decided during installation of the ST server to use credentials select the check box Enter user name Must be identical to the one received from your system provider Enter user name Must be identical to the one entered when the Axis One Click Connection Component was installed On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Servers and hardware Add hardware The Add Hardware wizard helps you detect IP hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to recording servers on your system 1 To access Add Hardware expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select the Recording Server node 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the required recording server and select Add Hardware The wizard offers you several ways of detecting and adding hardware devices The system scans automatically for available hardware on the recording server s local network Express Recommended Tip If you are new to the system then use the Express hardware detection as it will guide you through e
246. hout acceptance from the administrator of the child Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles for details This type of setup is primarily recommended if all sites in the hierarchy are not a member of the same Domain Also refer to Important prerequisites when running federated sites on page 212 o Ifthe management server is installed as a user account This user account must be a member of the administrator group of the server being linked to before one or more parent child link s can be established without acceptance from the administrator of the child This type of user right setup is primarily recommended if the number of sites in a hierarchy is large e How to become an administrator using work groups How to become administrator of a federated architecture setup using work groups depends on how accounts are created If they are set up correctly you gain administrator rights of the entire setup Otherwise not Refer to Important prerequisites when running federated sites on page 212 for details on how to do this If the previous criteria are not met the administrator of a child must accept requests for inclusion in hierarchy see Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 221 manually before links can be established e Oneor more administrators A OnSSI Federated Architecture setup can have many administrators working on it at the same time Furthermore the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 is dynamic and
247. hrough the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 53 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use By default output are disabled You can enable output when needed You have two entry points for managing outputs e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices select Outputs expand the required device group and select the required output If no device groups are available you must first group your output Refer to About Device Groups on page 104 for information about creating groups as well as adding output to your groups e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers then in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server and select the required output Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via Common Gateway Interface CGI script commands Also check the system release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the devices and firmware used ENABLE OUTPUT When outputs are detected with the Add Hardware on page 53 process they are by default disabled You can activate outputs when needed If a device has several outputs you can enable one some or all of them as
248. ht a retention time of 10 days Furthermore archiving is set to occur every day at 10 30 ensuring a much more frequent archiving than retention time 62 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Aighe Nama rchwo no 3 Path Fiebenbzan nme 10 2 Days Missimirm Sore 1000 7 GB Schedule Occus every day at 100 Baduce tame rele Prarie per maconed Piue PEL 254 vali be nedaced 10 keynes You can also control archiving by use of rules and events see About rules and events on page 136 Attach a device or group of devices to storage area Once a storage area is configured for a recording server you can enable it for individual devices cameras microphones or speakers or a group of devices You can also select which of a recording server s storage areas should be used for the individual device or the group 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices and select either Cameras Microphones or Speakers as required In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required device or a device group In the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Record tab In the Storage area select Select In the dialog that appears select the wanted database click OK p gr s GU T In the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save View archived recordings You view archived recordi
249. ht click License Information and select Activate License Offline Export License For Activation A Save Request File pop up appears The software will gather the necessary system data and package in a license request file with a Irq filename extension The default name for the file is the SLC Use this default name and store the file in an accessible location Click Save Copy the Irq file to portable media On any computer with internet connectivity email the Irq file as an attachment and send to support onssi com OnSSI will process the file and return to you an email with a new license file lic as an attachment Detach this file to portable media and bring to management client computer On the Management Client computer open the Management Client and right click License Information and select Activate License Offline gt Import Activated License Locate and select the new lic file Click Open Once camera licenses have been validated the camera license count will go from Temporary to Activated in the License Information screen 46 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client If at any point in this license registration process you have questions or receive an error message please contact OnSSI Sales Activate licenses after grace day period If the grace day period is exceeded before activation all cameras which are not activated within the given period will become unavailable
250. ible to edit bookmarks in recorded video from the Ocularis Client View It will be possible to view bookmarks in recorded video from the Ocularis Client View live within time profile live viewing of video from the selected camera s will be possible in access clients Export video the database export feature can be used when browsing recorded video from selected camera s in the Ocularis Client Furthermore the AVI JPEG and export features can be used in similar way in all access clients Get sequences the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in access clients Playback Video playing back of recorded video from the selected camera s will be possible in access clients Smart Search the Smart Search feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in the Ocularis Client Visible the selected camera s will be visible in access clients On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client The View live right also requires that the role has been granted the right to view the access clients Live mode This right is granted as part of the application rights The Export Video and Playback Video rights also require that the role has been granted the right to view the access clients Browse tab This right is granted as part of the application rights Microphone related rights Depending on the recording component
251. icasting for individual cameras 92 Enable output 137 Enable playback directly from remote site camera 70 153 Enable PTZ on a video encoder 162 Enable public access 93 Enable speakers 128 Enable disable individual devices 66 Establish remote desktop connection to remote system 70 Events overview 68 159 173 209 253 255 306 Events tab overview 68 97 122 158 210 Expand collapse 283 Export log 253 259 Express 61 External Event rights 247 F Failover group properties 304 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Index Failover recording server properties 302 303 307 Failover Recording Server service 299 307 Failover recording servers regular hot standby 299 Failover tab recording server properties 89 301 Failover tab properties 89 305 Failover related events 306 Fall Switch from DST to standard time 323 FAQs failover recording servers 301 Federated icons 282 Federated sites example scenario Limestone City 279 File menu items 43 Fill in properties on the Events tab 135 Fill in properties on the Info tab 133 140 Fill in properties on the Settings tab 141 Fill in Settings tab properties 134 Flush SQL server transaction log 291 Frequently asked questions about archiving 75 Frequently asked questions to federated sites 278 G General 270 Get additional licenses 56 Get started 15 39 Group failover recording serv
252. ice is not Reg failover recording server it typically appears if e the failover recording server is not enabled see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 through the Management Client e the failover recording server s information about the management server address is incorrect see Change the management server address on page 241 e the user account under which the Failover Recording Server service runs has no access to your system To fix this make sure that the user account specified during installation of the failover recording server under which the Failover Server service runs has access to your system with administrator rights To verify this do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and select Roles 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s roles list select the Administrators role 3 Inthe Properties pane s role settings list check that the required user is listed 4 fno add the required user to the Administrators role by clicking Add Also refer to Work with users groups and roles on page 186 Services administration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Manage Recordin Failover ment g Recording Server 1 Server ae Server service CE service icon service icon icon Description Must be authorized by administrator Appears when the Recording Server service
253. icense Agreement Select the accept the terms in the license agreement check box Optionally select the Sign me up for the Customer Experience Improvement Program check box Follow the on screen Read more link for further information on this Consider the following installation methods On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal e Single Server installs all management server components recording server and clients on the current computer You only need to make a minimum of selections and all components are selected in the component list which cannot be edited e Distributed installs all management server components and clients on the current computer However you must install the recording server on a separate machine This means that the recording server is cleared in the component list which you cannot edit e Custom lets you select freely among management server components to install on the current computer The only exception is the management server By default recording server is cleared in the component list but you can edit this Select Single Server A list of components to install appears you cannot edit this list Click Continue Select Files location for the program file In Product language select the language in which your product should be installed Click Install The software now installs When done you see a list of successfully installed components Click Close
254. iew events added after an OnSSI Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 60 USE SEVERAL INSTANCES OF AN EVENT To be able to specify different properties for different instances of an event see Specify event properties on page 130 you are able to add an event more than once The following example is specific to cameras Example The camera in question has been configured with two motion windows called A1 and A2 You have added two instances of the Motion Started HW event In the properties of one instance you have specified use of motion window A1 in the properties of the other instance you have specified use of motion window A2 When you use the event in a rule you are able to specify that the event should be based on motion detected in a specific motion window in order for the rule to be triggered First Select conditions to apply ited time in ctime profile ected time in time profile The ime period lt slarltine gt to endi week i days vent is Iram mation window SPECIFY EVENT PROPERTIES For each event you have added you are able to specify properties The number of properties depends on the item in question In order to work as intended some or all of the properties must be specified identically on the item as well as on the system Even though the following list is not exhaustive you may often be able to specify the fol
255. ific pemi an m Ub tene Lal e Tomo ata Freier e Pataca i femi du fale On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 93 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Add a patrolling profile 1 2 Click New This will open the Add Profile dialog In the Add Profile dialog specify a name for the patrolling profile Tip Use a descriptive name the name may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the item e g when using it in a rule Click OK The new patrolling profile will be added to the Patrolling tab s Profile list You are now able to specify required preset positions and other settings for the patrolling profile Specify preset positions for use in a patrolling profile 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list hoe Daytime Palroling wv Nighttime Patroling l u aakand Pairing 2 Click Add This will open the Select Preset dialog 3 In the Select Preset dialog select the preset positions required for your patrolling profile Select Preset Ed aie Back Dow Ky Canned Foodt Section Dun Pride Sechon cy Fresh Produce Section Pacem Feel Sachen ols Household Goods Sechon p Poultry Sechon Sot Diria Section Di Cancel Click OK The selected preset positions are added to the list of preset positions for the patrolling profile IRAR maaa Frois D agtime Patrolling i ate Back Door T Canned Foods Section t Dary Pro
256. iguration built into the system itself etc 7 In this example we want the event to be activated input Input comes from and is configured on separate hardware rather than on the system itself so we go to the Custom Events group select the event Input Activated and click OK Devices recording server management server link When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link opens the Select Devices and Groups window which lets you specify the devices on which the event should occur in order for the rule to apply In this example the event should occur on an input called Back Door Sensor in order for the rule to apply In the Select Devices and Groups window we therefore drag the input Back Door Sensor to the Selected list and click OK By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Eda the mle descnplion click an underlined ter Perform an action on khoul Activated from Back Door Sensor Click Next to move to step 2 of the wizard 4 On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply 156 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client gt In this example we want the rule to apply whenever input is activated on the back door sensor regardless of time When creating event based rules it is possible t
257. in lt time profile gt First Select conditions to apply v Within selected lime in lime profde Outside selected lime in time profile C Within the time period startime to lt endime gt Day of week is days Based on our selection the wizard prompts us to specify the required time profile in the rule description Next Edit the rule descnption click an underlined item Perform an action in a time interval within selected time in the profife Click the underlined item to specify the exact content of the rule description o gt In this example we click the time profile link select the time profile Daytime and click OK Time Profile Lm Ji ees J i The rule description now reflects our selection Next Godt the mle descnphon click an underlined ten Perform an action in a time interval within Selected time in Daytime Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform gt In this example we want patrolling according to a specific patrolling profile We therefore select the action Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client First Select actions to perform Start recording on lt devices gt Start feed on devices Set live frame rate on lt devices gt Set recordi
258. ince our rule is triggered by an event the wizard automatically suggests that we base our stop action on an event as well In the rule description the wizard even suggests that the stop action is performed when input is 158 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client deactivated on the back door sensor However we want something different so we select Perform stop action after lt time gt First Select stop cntena C Pesform stop action on tevent Pesform stop action alter a lt time gt In the rule description the wizard now prompts us to specify the required time ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor ause patrolling on PTZ Camera and Move PTZ Camera to position PTZ Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 500 erform action time We click the time link specify 15 seconds and click OK Relative Tne BS Select time secs 15 CE Ceres The rule description now indicates the 15 seconds selected ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor ause patrolling on PT Camera and Mowe PTZ Camera to positio PTZ Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 500 erform action 15 seconds after Based on the start action pause patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop actio
259. indows Authentication and Basic Authentication 4 By default you log in with your active Windows account This means that if you are currently logged in as for example JohnSmith by default you log in to the management server as JohnSmith as well 5 Depending on how you wish to log into the management server in the Authentication field select o Windows Authentication current user if you want to log in with your active Windows account this is the default login option o Windows Authentication if you want to log in with a different Windows account o Basic Authentication if you want to log in with a basic user authentication For Windows Authentication and Basic Authentication also fill in the User name and Password fields respectively Tip If you have logged in with a specific user type before Windows Authentication Basic Authentication or both you can select previously entered user names in the user name list 6 Click Connect to open the Management Client software Management Client Menu Overview l je Edt yiew Action Toos He ah Add New Device Group CTRL N qu Edi Device Group Members an Delete Device Group DELETE Rename Device Group F EH Go To Hardware m Refresh FS Action menu items Depending on context Refresh On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Is always available and reloads the requested information from the management serv
260. indows Server 2003 necessary for IIS Application Pools 3 Ensure that the svcOnSS example name only account has system administrator rights on your SQL Database or SQL Server Express either directly or through the BUILTIN Administrators group 4 Setthe identity of the ManagementServerAppPool Application Pool in the IIS to the svcOnSS example name only account 5 Reboot the server to ensure all group membership and permission changes take effect 1 1 One way outgoing domain trust MyDomain local OtherDomain edu Trusting domain user Management server O oa A O N O o A Cc N OnSSI service account T f Trusted domain user IMPORTANT To add trusted domain users to new or existing system roles log in to Windows as a trusted domain user Next launch the Management Client and log in as user of either the trusting domain or the trusted domain If you log in to Windows as a trusting domain user you are asked for credentials for the trusted domain in order to browse for users 254 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Appendix Appendix Ports used by the system If nothing else is stated ports are both inbound and outbound Port 20 and 21 Used by recording servers to listen for File Transfer Protocol FTP information some devices use FTP for sending event messages FTP is a standard for exchanging files across networks Port 25 Used by recording servers to listen for Simple Mai
261. ing this process it will not be possible to play back recordings from the period during which the failover recording server took over Is there a failover solution for failovers In a regular failover setup setting up one failover recording server as backup for another failover recording server is not necessary This is because you do not allocate particular failover recording servers to take over from a standard recording server rather you allocate failover groups A failover group must contain at least one failover recording server but you can add as many failover recording servers as needed Provided a failover group contains more than one failover recording server there will be more than one failover recording server capable of taking over In a hot standby setup it is also not possible to set up a failover recording servers or hot standby servers for a hot standby server For more information about failover setups refer to the description of the Management Client s Failover tab see Failover tab recording server properties on page 74 236 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Failover recording servers regular hot standby Install failover recording servers For information about installing failover recording servers refer to Install failover recording server see Install failover recording server recording server on page 16 Setup and enable failover recording servers If you have disabled the fail
262. ink request to the potential child 2 Depending on administrator settings the child might have to authorize the link request 3 If necessary the child authorizes the link request 4 Relevant info is exchanged 9 The new parent child link is established 214 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture Administrators role and federated sites e Administrator vs non administrator In general you must be an administrator to work with federated architecture However by requesting the adding of children to a top site to which you have administrator rights you can without administrator rights to the other sites create the overall initial infrastructure of a federation But as described in Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 the administrator of each individual child must later authorize the connection before it can take effect e How to become an administrator using Active Directory two possible scenarios How to become administrator of a OnSSI Federated Architecture setup using Active Directory depends on how the management server is installed If it is installed as described in either of the following two scenarios you gain administrator rights of the entire setup Otherwise not o Ifthe management server is installed as a Network Service Both All computers involved must be added as users to each other s administrator role before a parent child link can be established wit
263. installation 29 Manual installation of IIS if needed 28 Multi domain environments 29 Recording server startup fails due to port conflict 27 L Legal Notice iii License information 56 69 Licenses and camera replacement 57 Licenses and OnSSI Federated Architecture 57 Licensing of OnSSI Federated Architecture 277 Limitations when adding Ocularis CS servers 264 Local IP ranges 93 Mail server 271 Manage basic users 248 Manage cameras 40 63 96 97 100 123 130 136 142 144 164 Manage day length time profiles 225 228 Manage hardware on a recording server 78 Manage input 41 63 97 123 130 131 136 142 143 159 164 Manage local IP address ranges 93 272 273 Manage logs 20 172 253 271 294 295 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Manage Microphones 40 97 121 123 130 136 142 145 164 Manage network configuration 267 Manage notification profiles 41 167 171 213 229 271 Manage Ocularis CS servers 44 248 264 Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture 32 37 43 275 276 278 279 281 Manage output 41 63 97 123 130 136 142 143 159 164 Manage registered services 267 Manage roles 41 166 225 235 237 242 Manage rules 41 68 101 108 115 118 124 131 137 143 152 153 157 167 168 209 213 225 229 232 233 234 253 306 Manage Software License Codes 57 277 Manage speak
264. into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client The following rights are available e Visible Determines if the selected role is able to see the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in clients e Modify Determines if the selected role is able to make changes to the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in clients e Delete Determines if the selected role is able to delete the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in clients e Create subgroups and views Determines if the selected role is able to create subgroups and views in the selected view group REMOTE RECORDING RIGHTS Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client The following rights are available e Retrieve remote recordings Determines if users groups with the selected role should be able to retrieve remote recordings see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 SERVERS RIGHTS The next item section is only relevant if you run Ocul
265. ion pane see Panes Overview on page 33 the Management Client uses memory to treat data stored in the individual items Expanded items keep processing even when you expand other items letting you access already expanded items faster When available memory drops to 300 MB the memory indicator numbers turn red When the memory indicator drops to 0 MB you cannot expand any more items and will see a warning dialog asking you to free up memory by refreshing your configuration Click OK to exit this dialog and press F5 on your keyboard or select Refresh in the Action menu 32 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Panes Overview Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable The Management Client contain the following panes 1 Site Navigation Pane and Federated Sites Hierarchy Pane 2 Overview pane 3 Properties pane 4 Preview pane The illustration outlines the Management Client window s default layout the window layout can be customized see Customize the Management Client s layout on page 39 and may therefore be different on your computer Menu and tool bars Provide quick access to often used features Site Navigation pane Your main navigation element in the Management Client Name settings and configurations of the site you are logged into are reflected see Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 here site name
266. ions defined in the preview window In this case the grid is visible The red privacy mask indications will also appear in the preview image on the Motion tab Grid Size On Net Surveillance Systems Inc The value selected in the Grid size list determines the density of the grid regardless whether the grid is shown or not Select between the values 8x8 i e a grid dividing the image into eight sections along the X axis and eight sections along the Y axis 16x16 32x32 or 64x64 With a grid of 8x8 the image will be divided into relatively few sections for you to select for privacy mask regions Each section will be relatively large you will not be able to define very detailed privacy mask regions With a grid size of 64x64 the image will be divided into relatively many sections for you to select for privacy mask regions Each section will be relatively small enabling you to define more detailed privacy mask regions Examples of 8x8 16x16 32x32 and 64x64 grids respectively 91 Management Client Show Grid 92 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES LIT LN LP d T I Q EUDOO TIT ihn aa Lal The four different grid sizes The grid may be visible or hidden depending on whether the Show grid check box is selected or not When the Show grid check box is selected default the preview image will feature a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections The grid may
267. is loaded for the first time Administrators authorize the recording server through EE Recording the Management Client In the Management Client s Server service Site Navigation pane expand the Servers list select only the Recording Server node then in the Overview pane right click the required recording server and select Authorize Recording Server 248 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Virus scanning Virus scanning Virus scanning information In some cases OnSSI recommends that you avoid virus scanning if this is allowed in your organization If you use virus scanning software on e recording data in databases on recording servers e data being archived in archiving see About storage and archiving on page 61 locations It most uses a considerable amount of system resources on scanning This may affect system performance negatively notably scanning of data in databases containing recordings Some virus scanning software may also temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively Virus scanning may even corrupt recording databases and render your surveillance system recordings useless Therefore e Do not use virus scanning on recording server directories containing recording databases by default C MediaDatabase and all folders under that location but note that your organization may have specified different recording paths e Do not use virus scanni
268. is not necessarily saved Instead saving of video in a camera s database i e recording is started only when there is a reason to do so For example when motion is detected when an event occurs or when a specific period of time begins Recording is then stopped after a specified amount of time when motion is no longer detected when an event occurs when a time period ends or similar The term recording originates from the analog video era when video was taped only when the record button was pressed MICROPHONE Lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected microphone Microphones recording and storage settings are completely independent of cameras and speakers SPEAKER Lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected speaker PLAYBACK REMOTE SYSTEM Playback settings are only visible if the selected hardware is part of an OnSSI Interconnect remote system see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 To enable viewing of playback directly from remote sites select Play back recordings from remote system see Enable playback directly from remote site camera on page 60 Selecting this option disables the rest of the Recording settings options on the Record tab see Record tab overview on page 125 RECORDING Recording is by default enabled To enable disable recording for the selected item select clear the Record tab s Recording check box On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 125 Management
269. it properties on your home site and its children On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 223 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 1 In the Management Client in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the relevant site right click and select Properties Aberale Adore em fit pr j systestz 7 wz Adius External Fudd gren K Senace Mo HT AUTHORITTINETHEIRK SER Tiras for nad aisymehronizaben 17 03 2017 Tor TOt TO Stet For lass kyncbrornr ation Deau Heip OK Cancel 2 If needed change the following General tab Information related to the site you are currently connected to e Name Enter the name of the site displayed in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane and the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 e Description Enter a description of the site e URLs Use the list to add and remove URL s for this site and indicate whether they are external or not e Version Version number of the site management server e Service account The service account under which the management server is running e Time for last synchronization Last synchronization date e Status for last synchronization Status of last synchronization It can be either Successful or Failed f failed further information is offered Click OK to save changes Parent Site tab available on child sites only marked in red Non editable information regarding the parent of the child you are c
270. ite name visible at the top of the Site Navigation pane To connect to another site in the hierarchy see Connect to another site in hierarchy on page 222 click the wanted site in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane What if only have one server and don t run federated architecture Your user interface looks the same but when you view the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane you will only see the one server in your setup Federated icons There are a number of icons in federated architecture each representing the different states a site can be in e Top site in the entire hierarchy is operational l gt e Top site in the entire hierarchy is still operational but one or more issues need attention will be shown on top of the top site icon On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 219 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e Normal site not top site is operational QU e Normal site not top site is still operational but one or more issues need attention 2 will be shown on top of the normal site icon e Site awaiting acceptance of inclusion in the hierarchy Ur e Site being attaching but not yet operating i Expand collapse You can expand and collapse a site in the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 to see its children if any Site Navigation pane The name settings and configurations of the highlighted site red arrow are reflected in the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on
271. itself guarantee that your system will work as desired Nor does it guarantee that video feeds or audio feeds will automatically be fed to the system as the default rules may subsequently have been deactivated or modified Default goto preset when PTZ is done rule Ensures that PTZ Pan Tilt zoom cameras go to their respective default preset positions after they have been operated manually IMPORTANT This rule is by default not enabled Even when the rule is enabled you must have defined default preset positions for the required PTZ cameras in order for the rule to work you do this on the Presets tab see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 In case you accidentally delete the default goto preset when PTZ is done rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on PTZ Manual Session Stopped from All Cameras Move immediately to default preset on the device on which event occurred Default record on motion rule Ensures that as long as motion is detected in video from cameras the video is recorded provided recording is enabled see Record tab overview on page 125 for the cameras in question recording is by default enabled IMPORTANT While the default rule specifies recording based on detected motion it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as individual cameras recording may have been disabled for one or more cameras Even when recording is enabled bear in mind that the quality of reco
272. ive at regular intervals Depending on your requirements you are able to configure one or more archives for each of your databases Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by the system for example on a network drive On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 61 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES By setting up your archiving in an effective way you can prune and groom your database storage area usage significantly if needed Often it is desired to make archived recordings take up as little space as possible especially on a long term basis where it is perhaps even possible to slacken image and sound quality a bit Effective pruning and grooming can help ensure this and can be handled from the Storage tab see Storage tab recording server properties on page 69 of a recording server by adjusting several interdependent settings such as e Recording database retention e Recording database size e Archive retention e Archive size e Archive schedule e Encryption e Frames Per Second FPS The size fields define the size of the camera s database exemplified by the cylinder and its archive s respectively M N i l m wN e A By means of retention time and size setting for the recording database exemplified by the white area in the cylinder you define how old recordings must be before they are archived In our illustrated exampl
273. ive upgrade for workgroup If you do not use a domain setup but a workgroup setup you must do the following when upgrading 1 On the recording server create a local Windows user 2 From the Windows Control Panel find the OnSS Data Collector service Right click it select Properties and select the Log on tab Set the Data Collector service to run as the local windows user you just created on the recording server 3 On the management server create the same local Windows user with the same user name and password 4 Inthe Management Client add this local Windows user to the Administrator s group For installing with workgroups see Install your system preconditions on page 13 Installation troubleshooting The following issues may occur during or upon installation of the management server or recording servers For each issue one or more solutions are available Issue Recording server startup fails due to port conflict This is an issue if the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP service is running 26 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal It uses port 25 If port 25 is already in use it may not be possible to start the Recording Server service It is important that port number 25 is available for the recording server s SMTP service since many cameras are only capable of communicating via this port SMTP Service Verification and solutions To verify whether SMTP Ser
274. ize If the slider is not available compression quality is determined entirely by the selected codec Not available for all codecs If you want to use keyframes select the check box and specify the required number of seconds between keyframes in the neighboring field A keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The keyframe Keyframe every contains the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames contain only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of files If the check box is not available or not selected every frame contains the entire view of the camera Not available for all codecs If you want to use a particular data rate select the check box and specify the required number of kilobytes per Data rate second in the neighboring field If the check box is not available or not selected date rate is determined entirely by the selected codec Network The Options see Options on page 207 Network tab lets you specify local IP address ranges Refer to Manage local IP address ranges on page 210 for more information User settings The Options see Options on page 207 User Settings tab lets you specify settings for user preference such as whether a message should be shown when edge recording is enabled Refer to Record tab overview see Record tab overview on page 125 for more information Specify AVI compression settings Outgoing SMTP mail server settings
275. ked according to the camera s view not the excluded region Consequently it is not recommended to use exclude regions with PTZ cameras To use exclude regions select the Use exclude regions check box When done the preview image will be divided into selectable sections by a grid To define exclude regions drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image Pressing down the left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section You are able to define as many exclude regions as you require Excluded regions are shown in blue E 1 1 1 line EL Se ieee eer E E I a b a L m m T3 Jmm 193 RE Un aE LI 7 F mg x Three exclude regions defined in the preview window In this case the grid is visible The blue exclude area indications will only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab not in any other preview images in the Management Client or access clients Grid Size The value selected in the Grid size list determines the density of the grid regardless whether the grid is shown or not Select between the values 8x8 i e a grid dividing the image into eight sections along the X axis and eight sections along the Y axis 16x16 32x32 or 64x64 With a grid of 8x8 the image will be divided into relatively few sections for you to select for exclude regions Each section will be relatively large you will not be able to define very
276. l Transfer Protocol SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system server via e mail SMTP is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers Port 80 While not directly used by the system but by management servers port 80 is typically used by the Internet Information Services IIS Default Web Site for running the Management Server service Port 443 Used by the basic user authentication process where the management server must keep this port open at all times Port 554 Used by recording servers for RTSP traffic which is used for controlling streaming from cameras Port 1024 and above outbound only except ports listed in the following Used by recording servers for HTTP traffic between cameras and servers Port 5210 Used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers when databases are merged after a failover recording server has been running Port 5432 Used by recording servers to listen for Transmission Control Protocol TCP information some devices use TCP for sending event messages Port 7563 Used by recording servers and Ocularis Clients The main entry to the recording server where the Image Server interface is implemented Also used for handling PTZ camera control commands and for retrieving image stream from clients etc Port 7609 Used by the Data Collector Server service and must always be keep o
277. l affect clients use of the selected camera To access the Client tab select the required camera in the Overview pane then select the Client tab in the Properties pane Pranerhes Cieni settings 7 Live micas Dais menaphone Microphone 1 Detail speaker peske 1 C hipcil bo e Clear Cle y Gp Ino Jh Setting id Beam Record ki Events W Cher Motion Client settings 84 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Live multicast Default microphone Default Speaker Shortcut Management Client The system supports multicasting see Multicasting tab recording server properties on page 75 sending of single data packets to multiple recipients within a group thereby saving bandwidth and system resources of live streams from recording servers to Ocularis Clients To enable multicasting of live streams from the selected camera select the check box Remember that for the feature to work multicasting see Multicasting tab recording server properties on page 75 must also be configured for the recording server If multicasting is not possible for example due to restrictions on the network or on individual clients the system will revert to unicasting Sending of separate data packets to separates recipients By defining a default microphone you can determine from which microphone Ocularis Client users should by default hear recordings when they select the camera in q
278. l server you are going to use with your system Type the e mail address you want to appear as the sender of e mail Sender e mail address notifications for all notification profiles Example sender organization org Type the name of the SMTP mail server which will be used for sending e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example mailserver organization org Outgoing mail SMTP server name AVI generation The Options see Options on page 207 AVI Generation tab lets you specify compression settings for the generation of AVI video clip files Specifying these settings is necessary if you want to include AVI files in e mail notifications sent out by rule triggered notification profiles see Manage notification profiles on page 176 Specify the following from Options on page 207 AVI generation tab Select the required codec compression decompression technology Compressor Indeo 5 10 if available generally provides a good compromise between quality and file size You can configure some but not all codecs 208 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Not available for all codecs Use the slider to select the required degree of compression 0 700 to be performed by the codec 0 means no compression generally resulting in high image Compression quality quality and large file size 100 means maximum compression generally resulting in low image quality and small file s
279. lStudio Downloads DownloadaDetails aspx DownloadlD 31723 TLS Transport Layer Security and its predecessor SSL Secure Socket Layer is not supported if the sender belongs on a server that requires TLS or SSL e mail notifications will not work properly Also you may be required to disable any e mail scanners that could prevent the application sending the e mail notifications Prerequisites Before you can create notification profiles you must specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server you are going to use for the e mail notifications Optionally if you want the notification profile s e mail notifications to be able to contain AVI video clips the compression settings for use when generating the AVI files must also be specified 1 Goto the Management Client s menu bar and select Tools gt Options This will open the Options window o For outgoing SMTP Mail Server Specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server see Outgoing SMTP mail server settings on page 209 on the Mail Server tab o For AVI Compression Specify AVI compression settings see Specify AVI compression settings on page 209 on the AV Generation tab Add notification profiles 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and Events right click Notification Profiles and select Add Notification Profile This will open the Add Notification Profile wizard 2 Onthe wizard s first step specify name
280. laris LS Ocularis ES Management Client Occurs when a storage area see About storage and archiving on page 61 for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable Database Storage Area Available see Database Storage Area Unavailable next You can for example use the event to start recording if it has been stopped by a Database Storage Area Unavailable event Occurs when a storage area see About storage and archiving on page 61 for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to a storage area located on a network drive is lost When this Database Storage Area is the case it will not be possible to store recordings Unavailable You can use the event to for example stop recording and trigger a notification profile see Manage notification profiles on page 176 so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Occurs when a failover recording server see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 takes over from a recording server A failover recording server is a Spare recording server which can take over if a standard recording server becomes unavailable Failover Started Occurs when a recording server becomes available again and is able to Failover Stopped take over from a failover recording server see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 Manage rules Rules are a c
281. led is combined with Item is recording since a recording item is also an enabled item Manage input On many devices you are able to attach external units to input ports on the device Input units are typically external sensors Such external sensors may for example be used for detecting if doors windows or gates are opened Input from such external input units is treated as events by the system Such events can be used in rules see Manage rules on page 165 For example you could create a rule specifying that a camera should begin recording when an input is activated and stop recording 30 seconds after the input is deactivated Devices input ports are automatically detected when you add the devices to your system through the Management Client s Add Hardware on page 53 wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use You have two entry points for managing input e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices select Inputs expand the required device group and select the required input If no device groups are available you must first group your input Refer to About Device Groups on page 104 for information about creating groups as well as adding input to your groups On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 109 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select the Recording Server n
282. lf you can e Stop and start each instance individually e View status messages for each instance individually grouped on tabs Upgrade from previous version This information is only relevant if you are upgrading a previous installation IMPORTANT This system no longer supports Microsoft Windows XP see System Requirements on page 9 When upgrading all components except the management server database and if you selected so also your video device drivers are automatically removed and replaced The management server database is the management server s component it contains the entire system configuration recording server configurations camera configurations rules and so on As long as you do not remove the management server database no reconfiguration of your system configuration is needed although you may want to configure some of the new features in the new version On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 25 Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Backward compatibility with recording servers from versions older than this current version is limited You can still access recordings on such older recording servers but to be able to change their configuration they must be of the same version as this current one Therefore it is highly recommended to upgrade all recording servers in your system When you do an upgrade including your recording servers you are asked whether you want to update or keep your video
283. lients will not be able to log in o Already logged in clients can remain logged in for up to an hour When clients log in they are authorized by the management server and can communicate with recording servers for up to one hour If you can get the new management server up and running within an hour many of your users will not be affected o Noability to configure the system Without the management server you will not be able to change system configuration On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 231 Backup restore and move system configuration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Even though some users might not experience loss of contact we recommend that you inform your users about the risk of losing contact with the surveillance system while the management server is down Copy log server database Handle the SurveillanceLogServer database using the same method as when handling system configuration described earlier in this topic The SurveillanceLogServer database name may be different if you renamed the system configuration database contains all your system logs including errors reported by recording servers and cameras The database is located where the Log Server Service is installed typically the same place as your management server Backing up this database is not vital since it does not contain any system configuration but you may later appreciate having access to system logs from before the management server backup restore Install ne
284. lowing properties Determines whether use of the event is enabled Select True to enable Fal j le Enabled select False to disable Enabled is the only property you will always see for microphones Determines whether video should be sent from the camera to the system Include Images when the event occurs Select True if video is required select False if video is not required 130 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Many cameras capable of detecting motion can be configured with different motion detection settings for different parts the camera s images For example if a camera covers a 2 lane road different motion detection settings may have been defined for the right lane and left lane area of the camera s images Such areas are generally known as motion windows Provided one or more motion windows have been defined on the camera device the Motion Window setting lets you specify which motion window to Motion Window use for the event When the camera detects motion within the specified motion window the event will occur When specifying use of a motion window make sure you type the name of the motion window exactly as it has been specified on the camera You can only specify one motion window in the field However you are able to add more than one instance of an event see Use several instances of an event on page 130 Determines the frame rate to be used for prebuffered video
285. m emergencies terror etc In addition to being connected to the city s video surveillance A C M E Industries Inc Downtown Residential and Limestone Center Shopping Mall also want to segment their installation in several sites as they have several physical locations that they want to monitor The segmented architecture offers them greater flexibility during installation and daily usage The city uses federated architecture allowing the entities independent video surveillance while being tied into the city wide surveillance system at the same time On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 217 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Because the police have installations that City Hall should not have access to the Police Headquarters is selected as the top site in the city s federated surveillance hierarchy Each site is then tied into Limestone city s federated hierarchy as follows e Level 1 Police Headquarters o Level 2 Limestone City e Level 3 City Hall and MB Industries as one group o Level 4 Central Station Streets amp Intersections and Parks as one group under City Hall e Level 3 Limestone Center Shopping Downtown Residential Limestone Transportation Ltd and A C M E Industries Inc as one group o Level 4 Shops Branch Malls and Residential area shops as one group under Limestone Center Shopping o Level 4 Branch Office 1 and Branch Office 2 as one group under A C M E Industries Inc Illustration of On
286. management server to which the recording server should be pushes connected This information is necessary in order for the recording server to be able to communicate with the management server Port Port number to be used when communicating with the management server Default is port 9993 You can change this if you need to Port number to be used for handling web server requests for example for Web server port handling PTZ camera control commands and for browse and live requests from Ocularis Client Default is port 7563 You can this if you need to Port number to be used when the recording server listens for TCP Alert server port information some devices use TCP for sending event messages Default is port 5432 You can change this if you need to Port number to be used when the recording server listens for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system server via e mail SMTP is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers Default is port 25 You can change this if you need to SMTP server port Port number to be used when the recording server listens for FTP FTP server port information some devices use FTP for sending event messages Default is port 21 You can change this if you need to Read server service icons management recording and failover The following notification area icons represent
287. me in Daytime start patrolling on Parking Lot E cam 2 using My Patroling Profile with PTZ priority 500 erform an action when time interval ends top patrolling immediately This is exactly what we want we do not need to change it Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window Fie Lam Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 8 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules Creating the Second Rule Patrolling During Nighttime Tip You do not have to create the second rule from scratch you can make a copy of the first rule then change it To copy a rule select the rule in the Rules list right click and select Copy Rule This will open Manage Rule which will display an editable copy of the rule 1 Copy the first rule then make the following changes to the rule o Change the rule name so it better describes the new rule for example to PTZ Camera Nighttime Patrolling o On the time conditions selection step select that the rule should apply not within but outside the time profile lime profle in lime prohle x stathme gt to cendime 154 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client First Select conditions to apply
288. ment Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Registered services settings In the Add Registered Service or Edit Registered Service window specify the following Services type Prefilled field Name of the registered service The name is only used for display Name purposes in the Management Client Description of the registered service The description is only used for Description display purposes in the Management Client Click Add to add the IP address or hostname of the registered service in question If specifying a hostname as part of a URL the host in question must exist and be available on the network URLs must begin with http or URL https and must not contain any of the following characters lt gt amp a Example of a typical URL format http ipaddress port directory where port and directory are optional Note that you can add more than one URL if required Select if the registered service connects to the management server with a External public IP address Select if the registered service should be trusted immediately this is often the case but the option gives you the flexibility to add the registered service and then mark it as trusted by editing the registered service later Note that changing the trusted state will also change the state of other registered services sharing one or more of the URLs defined for the relevant registered service Trusted 206 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Oc
289. ment server hostname and IP address When you move the management server from one physical server to another physical server it is by far the easiest to give the new server the same hostname and IP address as the old one This is due to the fact that the recording server will connect to the hostname and IP address of the old management server In case the new management server has been given a new hostname and or IP address the recording server will not be able to find the management server Manually stop each recording server in your system change their management server URL and when done restart them Move system configuration Moving your system configuration is in reality a three step process 1 First you make a copy of your system configuration identical to making a scheduled backup see Scheduled back up of system configuration on page 226 2 Then you install the new management server on the new server refer to scheduled backup see Scheduled back up of system configuration on page 226 step 2 3 And finally you copy restore your system configuration to the new system refer to restore a scheduled backup see Restore system configuration from scheduled back up on page 227 Copy system configuration from old server step 1 Prerequisite Stop the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 to prevent configuration changes being made This is important since any chan
290. mera On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 123 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save SPECIFY COMMON SETTINGS FOR ALL ITEMS IN A DEVICE GROUP HARDWARE 1 In the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the required recording server to see its device groups Select the relevant hardware under the wanted device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s hardware will be listed P EOE emma mem 2 R ee ae ee ee ee ee ey p Camera 6 dp Input 1 p Output 1 Ais 2100 Camera 10 10 63 4 r 2 You are now able to verify or change both common settings and settings for the individual hardware types within the device group From the menu above the settings list select the required type of hardware Make changes as needed 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save SET UP A SECURE CONNECTION ON ALL ITEMS IN A DEVICE GROUP Tip Some organizations may be required to establish a secure HTTPS connection using SSL Secure Sockets Layer To establish such a connection you must upload a certificate to the hardware device to enable HTTPS support on the hardware device Certificates are generated differently by camera vendors Consult your camera vendor to find out how to get a certificate for your hardware device 1 In the Management Client s
291. mmediately upon installing the system it does not guarantee that audio will be recorded see Record tab overview on page 125 as recording settings must be specified separately In case you accidentally delete the default start audio feed rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All Microphones All Speakers Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately Default start feed rule Ensures that video feeds from all connected cameras are automatically fed to the system IMPORTANT While the default rule enables access to connected cameras video feeds immediately upon installing the system it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as cameras recording settings must be specified separately In case you accidentally delete the default start feed rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All Cameras Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately Events overview Events may be created on the recording server or in Ocularis Base The information discussed here refer to setting events on the recorder When creating an event based rule in the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 165 you are able to select between a number of different events In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they a
292. mote system option see Playback remote system on page 125 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save Note that in a OnSSI Interconnect setup any privacy masking see Privacy Mask tab camera properties on page 89 set on a remote system will be disregarded by the central system Retrieve remote recordings from remote site camera 1 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 60 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system Select the relevant camera 3 Inthe Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Record tab and select the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored option see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save As an alternative you can use rules see Add a rule on page 168 or start remote recording retrievals from the Ocularis Client when needed Note that in a OnSSI Interconnect setup any privacy masking see Privacy Mask tab camera properties on page 89 set on a remote system will be disregarded by the central system About storage and archiving Depending on the recor
293. n devices Set recording frame rate on devices Start patrolling on device spectic prohl Sena notficabion bo profdes ee When selecting the action Send notification to lt profile gt you get the option of selecting the required notification profile You also get the option of selecting which cameras any recordings to be included in the notification profile s e mail notifications should come from send notification to provi fe images from recording device Keep in mind that recordings cannot be included in the notification profile s e mail notifications unless something is actually being recorded If still images or AVI video clips are required in the notification profile s e mail notifications you should therefore verify that the rule you are creating or another existing rule specifies that recording should take place The following example is from a rule which includes both a Start recording action and a Send notification to action Newt Ed amp the mle descnphon Click an underlined Iber Perform an action on ingui Activated from Red Sector Door Sensor start recording 5 seconds before on Red Sector Entrance Carr and Send notification to Security Red Sector Entrance images from Red Sector Entrance Cam Perform action 10 seconds after stop recording immediately For more information about rules in general refer to Manage rules on page 165 Notification profile settings Type a descriptive
294. n You can move a pane into another pane s position so two or more panes share the same position 1 Drag the pane to the center layout element of the pane which position you want to share Tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Tip To view the content of the panes click the tabs on the bottom of the shared position 42 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client gem Li Vr F i ien Pees Piarum i Li Split shared positions If you do not want a pane to share a position with another pane do this 1 Click the tab of the relevant pane and drag it to a new position The pane s new position can be a docked position or a floating pane 2 Release the mouse to place the pane at its current position Use auto hide You can auto hide panes An auto hidden pane is available as a tab to the right or left of the previous position of the pane When you place your mouse pointer over the tab the content of the pane slides out As soon the cursor is positioned outside the pane it slides back To auto hide a pane click the Auto Hide pushpin in the title bar of the pane you want to auto hide mI UB Cpi On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 43 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Do the following to show and open an auto hidden pane again 1 Place your mouse pointer over the ta
295. n resume patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is resumed immediately after the 15 second pause ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor ause patrolling on PTZ Camera and Move PTZ Camera to position PT Camera Back Door immediately with PTZ priority 500 erform action 15 seconds after esume patrolling immediatelv This is exactly what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g 3 seconds Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window ame FLZ Lam eine On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 159 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 8 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules Default Stat Feed Rule PTZ Camera Daytime Patroling PTZ Camera Nighttime Patrolling Default rules Your system comes with a number of default rules ensuring that basic features work without any user intervention being required IMPORTANT Like other rules default rules can be deactivated and or modified as required The fact that default rules are present does therefore not in
296. n the Select Group Members window we therefore drag Camera 1 to the Selected list and click OK By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Edit the mle descnplion cick an underlined tem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 5 Click Next to move to step 2 of the wizard On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply 144 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 7 In this example we want the rule to apply whenever motion is detected on Camera 1 regardless of time When creating event based rules it is possible to bypass the time conditions we therefore want to skip step 2 entirely 6 Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform 7 In this example we want to set a specific live frame rate We therefore select the action Set live frame rate on lt devices gt First Select actions to pertonm Start recording Set live frame rate on devices Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window 4 In this example Based on our selection Set live frame rate on lt devices gt the wizard automatically suggests a rule description in which the frame rate should be set on the device on whic
297. n the Start field specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the End field Tip If required a range may include only one IP address IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 232 0 1 0 IP addresses for multicasting must be within a special range set aside for dynamic host allocation by IANA the authority overseeing global IP address allocation If using IPv4 there is a certain range which goes from 232 0 1 0 to 232 255 255 255 Network tab recording server properties You define a recording server s public IP address on the Network tab To access the Network tab select the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select the Network tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 This description is also valid for failover recording servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 WHY USE A PUBLIC ADDRESS When an access client such as an Ocularis Client connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recordin
298. nagement server address 308 318 Change verify a recording server s basic configuration e 94 Client settings 99 Client tab camera properties 92 97 98 Clients 166 Computer running log server 11 Computer running Management Client 11 Computer running management server 9 Computer running recording server or failover recording server 10 Configurable events devices 144 210 211 257 Index Configurable events hardware 209 Configure individual cameras 97 Configure individual microphones 122 Configure report details 252 Configure SNMP service 322 Configure speakers 129 Connect to another site in hierarchy 282 286 Context menu 284 Copy a role 239 Copy log server database 297 Copy system configuration from old server step 1 296 Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 297 Create a day length time profile 229 Create an archive within an existing storage area 83 88 Create many simple or a few complex rules 217 Create typical rules 143 173 215 222 Customize the Management Client s layout 31 37 44 Customize transitions 112 D Database corruption 310 Day length time profile properties 229 Daylight saving time 323 Deactivate and activate a rule 222 Default goto preset when PTZ is done rule 208 Default record on motion rule 208 Default record on request rule 209 258 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES
299. name for the notification profile The name appears later Name whenever you select the notification profile during the process of creating a rule 178 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Description optional Recipients Subject Message text Time between e mail Number of images Time between images ms Embed images in e mail Time before event secs Time after event secs Frame rate On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Management Client Type a description of the notification profile The description appears when you pause your mouse pointer over the notification profile in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s Notification Profiles list Type the e mail addresses to which the notification profile s e mail notifications should be sent To type more than one e mail address separate addresses with a semicolon Example aa Qaaaa aa bb bbbb bb cc cccc cc Type the text you want to appear as the subject of the e mail notification You can insert system variables such as Device name in the subject and message text field To insert variables click the required variable links in the box below the field Type the text you want to appear in the body of the e mail notifications In addition to the message text the body of each e mail notification automatically contains this information gt What triggered the e mail notification gt The source of any attached still im
300. nce FILL IN PROPERTIES ON THE INFO TAB Lets you view and edit basic information about an input Contains the following fields Name of the input Optional but highly recommended Used whenever the input is listed in the system and clients Does not have to be unique To change the name overwrite the existing name and click Save in the Name toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout the system This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well Description of the input Optional Will appear in a number of listings within the system For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the item s name in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 H Reception Area Description 2 H eel Back L oor Inpul gdp A Ag sector Enhance Input Input by the back door bo red sector To specify a description type the description and click Save in the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 Name of the hardware with which the input unit is connected The field is Hardware name non editable from here but can be changed by clicking Go To next to it This takes you to hardware information where the name is editable Non editable field displaying the unit on which the input can be found on the hardware For hardware capable of having more than one input unit Uni
301. nce Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client ADD A ROLE 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and right click Roles 2 Select Add Role This will open the Add Role dialog 3 Type a name and description of the new role Milestone XProtect Management Client Pm Name Building A Security Siafi Description Security Staff in Building A an 224 High St 4 Click OK 5 The new role is added to the Roles list in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 By default a new role does not have any users groups associated with it 6 You are now able to assign users groups to the role and to specify which of the system s features they should be able to access Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from a role and Specify rights of a role on page 187 COPY A ROLE If you have a role with complicated settings and or rights and need a similar or almost similar role it might be easier to copy the already existing role and make minor adjustments to the copy than to creating a new role from scratch 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security click Roles right click the required role in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select Copy Role 2 Inthe dialog that opens give the copied role a new unique name and description 3 Click OK DELETE A R
302. nce restoring has started it cannot be canceled 228 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Backup restore and move system configuration Restoring 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon and select Restore Configuration 2 Next you are presented with an important note Read the contents of the note Click Restore 3 Inthe file open dialog browse to the location of the configuration backup file select it and click Open 4 The Restore Configuration window will now run showing progress and status information Wait for it to finish and click Close Your restore is finished Select shared backup folder Before backing up and restoring any system configuration you must set a backup folder for this purpose 1 Right click the notification area s management server service icon and select Select shared backup folder 2 Inthe window that appears browse to the wanted file location 3 Click OK twice 4 If asked if you want to delete files in the current backup folder click Yes or No depending on your needs Manual back up of system configuration Important information Your system stays online A backup cannot be used for copying configurations see Move system configuration to new management server on page 230 to other systems Depending on your system configuration your hardware and on whether your SQL server management server and Management Client are installe
303. needed update your Axis cameras with the newest firmware http www axis com techsup firmware php http www axis com techsup firmware php 4 Oneach camera s homepage go to Basic Setup TCP IP and select Enable AVHS and Always 5 From your management server s download web page see Download Manager download web page on page 19 controlled by the Download Manager install the Axis One Click Connection Component to setup a suitable Axis secure tunnel framework 6 From Services search for services msc on your machine start the Axis One Click service Edit Axis Dispatch Service properties 1 The Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 displays relevant dispatch information on the Axis Dispatch Service tab 2 Edit properties see Axis One Click Camera connection properties on page 51 3 In the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save Add edit STSs 1 Doone ofthe following a To add an ST servers right click the Axis Secure Tunnel Servers top node select Add Axis Secure Tunnel Server or b To edit an ST server right click it select Edit Axis Secure Tunnel Server 50 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 2 Inthe window that opens fill in the relevant information see Axis One Click Camera connection properties on page 51 3 If you chose to use credentials when you installed the Axis One Click Connection Component make s
304. newly added user defined event will now appear in the list in the Overview pane 4 lf the user has rights to do so refer to About roles on page 182 the user defined event can now be manually triggered from Ocularis Client Remember to create one or more rules see Manage rules on page 165 specifying what should take place when the custom event occurs Rename a user defined event 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and Events and select User defined Events 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required user defined event 3 Inthe Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 overwrite the existing name 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 181 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Security About security In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you can work with the following under Security e Roles see About roles on page 182 Roles determine which of your system s features users and groups see Manage users and groups on page 182 can use In other words roles determine rights and handles security within the application e Basic Users see About basic users on page 192 Basic users are much like Windows users but specific to a OnSSI Federated Architecture site see About OnSSI Federated Archi
305. ng frame rate on lt devices gt J Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profle gt with PTZ pronty zprionity Pause patrolling on devices Based on the selection of actions the wizard extends the rule description and prompts us to specify the required device patrolling profile and its priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 lext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval vithin selected time in Daytime start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ priority priori Click the underlined items in the extension of the rule description in order to specify their exact contents 7 In this example we first click the device link and in the Select device dialog opening we select a device and click OK Sp Camera H 5 All Cameras 1 Lab Cameras E Paiking lt E Parking Lot E cam 1 Parking Lot E cam 2 H Red Sacto Cameras Real Area PTZ Camera Then we click the profile link and select a patrolling profile in the dialog opening and then click OK Finally click the priority link to set the priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 of the patrolling profile The rule description now reflects our selection lext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval vithin selected time in Daytime tart patrolling on Parking Lot E cam 2 using My Patroling Profile with PTZ priority 501
306. ng if the group contains 400 cameras or more When you click the plus sign next to the device folder your system will load the contents of the device folder which may take a few seconds While expanding the text expanding is displayed next to the folder name Note that if you delete a device group you only delete the device group itself If you wish to delete IP hardware see About hardware on page 55 such as a camera from your system do so on a recording server level The following examples are based on grouping cameras into device groups but the principle applies for microphones speakers inputs and outputs as well ADD A DEVICE GROUP 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the item under which you wish to create the new device group 2 Select Add Device Group Doves ce a p Cam ES iie M G n Add Device Group Ta CTRL N zi i Tenis 543 130i 3 ca m2 Refresh Fo ou The Add Device Group dialog will appear 3 In the Add Device Group dialog specify a name and description of the new device group On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 105 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Add Device Group Eg Name Han Ealing Cameras Descriptor Castres ick irs ep rrr Baers ors 2274 High Sree The description will later appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the device group in the
307. ng on archiving locations e Donot use virus scanning on files with the following file extensions which are all surveillance system related o blk o idx o pic o pgz o StS o tS e Donotuse virus scanning on the management server Your organization may have strict guidelines regarding virus scanning but it is important that the mentioned locations and files are exempt from virus scanning If allowed you should disable any virus scanning of recording servers databases of any archiving locations as well as on the management server Consult your organization s IT system administrator if in doubt On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 249 Tray icon Tray icon The following issues are relevant to tasks accessible from the tray icon 250 Change Software License Code on page 49 Restore system configuration from manual back up on page 229 Select shared backup folder on page 229 Update SQL server address on page 243 Ocularis LS Ocularis ES On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES SNMP SNMP About SNMP support Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Your system supports Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a standard protocol for monitoring and controlling network devices for managing their configuration or collecting statistics etc The system will act as an SNMP agent which can generate an SNMP trap as a result of a
308. nglish French Spanish Restart the Management Client to make language changes take effect Ocularis Client users with necessary user right can manually interrupt the handling of PTZ cameras This setting lets you select how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption The setting applies for all PTZ cameras on your system Timeout for PTZ sessions Ignore device communication errors if communication reestablished before Select how long a communication error may last without the system log logging it or in other words when it is brief enough to be ignored Tip Motion detection is a key element in the surveillance system and is by default enabled for all cameras on the system However motion detection uses a relatively large amount of computing resources If your system features a very large number of cameras and you have enabled motion detection on all cameras the system may be slowed down slightly and adding of new cameras may take longer than usual To add new cameras as quickly as possible you have the option of disabling motion detection while the wizard Add Hardware is in use Server logs The Options see Options on page 207 Server Log tab lets you specify settings for the system s five different management server logs See Manage logs on page 197 for more information Mail server The Options on page 207 Mail Server tab lets you specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mai
309. ngs in the Ocularis Client As long as the archived recordings are stored locally or on accessible network drives you can use the Ocularis Client s many features timeline browser evidence export and so on when browsing archived recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a cameras regular databases The fact that you are viewing archived recordings are completely transparent Remember that individual user rights may prevent particular users from viewing recordings from particular cameras just as is the case when browsing recordings from cameras regular databases Back up archived recordings Many organizations want to back up their recordings using tape drives or similar Exactly how you do this is highly individual depending on the backup media used in your organization However the following is worth bearing in mind Back up archives rather than camera databases Always create backups based on the content of archives not based on individual camera databases Creating backups based on the content of individual camera databases may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving times Tip You are able to view each recording server s archiving schedule in each of a recording server s archives on the Storage tab Knowing archive structure lets you target backups When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain su
310. nguage regional settings 4 To see the location of the entered GPS coordinates in a map click Show Position in Browser will open a browser 5 Click OK Day length time profile properties Set the following properties for day length time profile Name Name of the profile Description Description of the profile optional GPS coordinates indicating the physical location of the camera s assigned GPS coordinates to the profile Number of minutes by which activation of the profile is offset by Sunrise offset sunrise Number of minutes by which deactivation of the profile is offset by Sunset offset sunset Time zone Time zone indicating the physical location of the camera s Manage notification profiles With notification profiles you can set up ready made e mail notifications which can automatically be triggered by a rule see Manage rules on page 165 for example when a particular event occurs You can even include still images and AVI video clips in the email notifications 176 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Note that when using the SMTP Service with NET 4 0 it is not possible to send attachments over 3 MB However two hotfixes must be installed on the management server in the listed order from Microsoft can be found at http connect microsoft com VisualStudio Downloads DownloadaDetails aspx DownloadlD 30226 http connect microsoft com Visua
311. ning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Manage Rule window Retal Area F v Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later Ack 9 Click Finish This will add your new rule to the list of rules Use specific PTZ patrolling profile during specific part of day rule Tip When patrolling stops you can if needed get the PTZ camera to start patrolling immediately after according to another patrolling profile Prerequisites When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it continuously moves between different preset positions Therefore the required preset positions and at least one patrolling scheme must be defined for the PTZ camera in question Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e The camera in question is a PTZ camera e Atleast two preset positions are defined for the camera How to define preset positions To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select Cameras In the Overview pane see Panes Overview 146 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client on page 33 select the required PTZ camera from the list then select the Presets tab in the Properties pane see Panes
312. nput output or None in the right side column IMPORTANT Make sure to map all cameras microphones inputs outputs and so on Contents stored in databases belonging to cameras microphones inputs outputs and so on mapped to None are lost Click Next 6 You are presented with a list of hardware to be added replaced or removed Click Confirm 56 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 7 Final step is a summary of added replaced and inherited devices and their settings Click Copy to Clipboard to copy contents to an external source for for example reporting purposes or and Close to end the wizard Disable enable hardware device Added hardware device is by default enabled In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 under the required recording server enabled disabled hardware devices are indicated this way t Enabled fs Disabled To disable added hardware device for example for licensing or performance purposes 1 In the Overview pane expand the required recording server right click the hardware device you wish to disable 2 From the menu that appears select Enabled to clear it Enable disable individual devices Cameras are enabled by default Microphones speakers inputs and outputs are by default disabled This means that microphones speakers inputs and outputs must be individually enabled before they can be used on the system The reason for
313. ns Specify an end position You are able to specify that the camera should move to a specific preset position when patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Select the Go to specific preset on finish check box This opens the Select Preset dialog 3 Inthe Select Preset dialog select the required end position and click OK Tip You can select any of the camera s preset positions as the end position you are not limited to the preset positions used in the patrolling profile 4 The selected end position is added to the list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profile When patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends the camera will go to the specified end position Specify manual PTZ session timeout Patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted manually by Ocularis Client users with the necessary user rights You may specify how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption 1 Inthe Management Client s menu bar select Tools Options This opens the Options window 2 Onthe Options window s General tab select the required amount of time in the PTZ manual session timeout list default is 15 seconds The setting applies for all PTZ cameras on your system PTZ PRESETS TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES The Presets tab lets you create preset positions to be used for example in rules see M
314. ns happen regularly through all steps of your parent child setup But if you want a current overview of things and do not want to wait for the next automatic synchronization you can refresh When refreshing the home site will display a current overview of the state of things from the home site s point of view Note that only changes saved by the home site since the last synchronization will be reflected changes further down in the hierarchy will not be reflected For this a full scheduled synchronization is needed 1 Inthe Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the home site and click select Refresh Site Hierarchy 2 The Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is refreshed reflecting any changes It is not possible to schedule your own synchronizations Rename site You can rename both your home site and its children when connected to them 1 Inthe Management Client in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the relevant site right click and click Rename Site 2 You can now overwrite the name of the site 3 The Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated reflecting the name change Due to synchronization issues any changes to remote children might take some time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 214 Set site properties You can view and possibly ed
315. nt Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES e For playing back recorded video your organization may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame rate because this will help preserve disk space Example 2 two live videos e For viewing live video from a local operating point your organization may prefer MPEG4 at a high frame rate to have the highest quality of video available e For viewing live video from a remotely connected operating point your organization may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame rate and quality in order to preserve network bandwidth Even when cameras support multi streaming individual multi streaming capabilities may vary considerably between different cameras Refer to camera s documentation for exact information To see if a camera offers different types of streams refer to the Settings tab see Settings tab overview on page 121 Also note that cameras under remote sites in an OnSSI Interconnect setup see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 only support single streams If you select a device group with 400 or more cameras the Streams tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Add a stream 1 On the Streams tab click Add This will add a second stream to the list you cannot have more than two streams Optional In the Name column edit the name of the stream In the Live Mode column select when live streaming is needed In the Default column
316. ntenance Note however that the Management Client is only able to see other sites from the level of the site you are logged into and downwards in the hierarchy What is a top site Your top site is the top level management server of your entire OnSSI Federated Architecture setup On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 215 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES An example an organization could have a top level server called MyCorp Second level servers called MyCorp RegionalServers Third level servers called MyCorp ReginalServers CityNames And so on In this case MyCorp is your top level server There can only be one top level server Tip In a federated hierarchy it is always a good idea to name your servers in a recognizable way for example using regional names or names implying where in what context the server is located Using for example consecutive numbers only might be confusing if you have many servers What is a home site Your home site is the site to which you are logged in Since you may be logged in far down in the hierarchy this is not necessarily the same as your top site but it may be You are only able to see children from the point at which you are logged in and downwards Can a site be both a parent and a child at the same time Yes a parent with children attached can easily be child to another site and vice versa This is because the parent child concept is relative and used only in respect to other
317. nts originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but user defined see Manage user defined events on page 180 events must be added manually To view events added after an OnSSI Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 60 CAMERA In addition to the system s motion detection some cameras can themselves be configured to detect motion If a camera is capable of such detection the camera s detections can be used as events These events can be used when creating event based rules see Events overview on page 161 in the system Technically they occur on the actual hardware device rather than on the surveillance system Events based on signals from input and or output units connected to camera devices are managed elsewhere Refer to Manage inputs see Manage input on page 109 and Manage outputs see Manage output on page 113 In OnSSI Interconnect setups some events originating from remote systems will be predefined in the event list but user defined see Manage user defined events on page 180 events must be added manually To view events added after an OnSSI Interconnect setup is established you must update your remote site hardware see Update remote site hardware on page 60 MICROPHONE Some microphones are capable of creating events themselves These events can be used when creating event based rules see Events overview on
318. number uniquely identifying each device on a network For a video encoder it is the MAC address of the remote site system hardware only relevant for hardware and video encoders Identifies the hardware model For a video en coder it identifies which remote site product the video encoder is communicating with only relevant for hardware and video encoders Identifies the driver handling the connection to the hardware For a video en coder it is the driver handling the connection to the remote site hardware only relevant for video encoders Software license code of the of the remote system only relevant for video encoders Enter Windows user name for access to the remote site only relevant for video encoders Enter Windows password for access to the remote site On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client only relevant for video encoders When clicked this opens a remote Connect connection to the remote site if Windows credentials are approved Settings tab overview If you select a device group with 400 or more items the Settings tab will not be available for editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting Values may be changeable or read only When you have changed a setting to a
319. o Tome Md eect SH 200 1s Succerfully echested recording server bel 1 eich 1777 Dee DU Tad AMI AU TO 73 5enece dated SH 2007 Wes Succerfullo mirad mangement perce pec module SH SOT 103 23 Guen naked recosding serve commiansc shen module So OT 10 Seely Hai rule ieee AM AT 103620 Succertfully initiskred comma processor SR SUT Tose a Sills aed bosse acetic SAN ZO 10313 Succerfully eed chen vernon foeni SMO AT O18 5uccenfull appbed exiemal plugin confsguraiond AMO ZDT 103m 1 amp Ducci rihakred log modas AM AT 103 1E Sucen initiskred secuntg module SHO OO WOE TE Sucher rahakned vials connectn SN ZO ee Wang for SOL server 1n be onde SR 2 Ws Seely aed nos Gord ph AMOUNT 10 3 amp 47 Succertfuly loaded conhgaur ation Abe Aun SOOT 103m Gee ibn Clogs View version information Knowing the exact version of your management server service or recording server service is an advantage if you need to contact product support 1 In Management Client s menu bar select Help menu click About On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 245 Services administration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 2 Asmall dialog opens Depending on server type the dialog shows the exact version of your Management Server service or Recording Server service Recording server settings When you configure Recording server settings specify the following IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the
320. o bypass the time conditions we therefore want to skip the wizard s step 2 entirely Click Next to move to step 3 of the wizard 5 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform In this example we want to two things to happen patrolling should pause and the PTZ camera should move to a specific preset position with a specific priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 We therefore select the actions Pause patrolling on lt devices gt and Move lt device gt to lt preset gt position with PTZ priority lt priority gt jrst Select acbons to perform 7 Start recording on devices Start feed on lt devices gt Set live frame rate on devices gt Set recording frame rate on devices Start patrolling on lt device gt using profiles with PTZ priority lt priority gt J Pause patrolling on devices 7 Move devices to preset position with PTZ priority lt prionty gt Move to default preset on lt devices gt with PTZ pronty lt prionty gt Set device output to lt state gt Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window gt In this example Based on our selections Pause patrolling on lt devices gt and Move lt device gt to lt preset gt position with PTZ priority lt priority gt the wizard automatically suggests an extension to the existing rule description axt Edit the rule description click an underline
321. o connect sites across domains it is very important that these domains are trusted by each other Setting up domains to trust each other has nothing to do with federated architecture but is entirely a matter of Microsoft Windows Domain configuration For further information on how to set up trusted domains see Microsoft website 1 When the domains on which the sites you want to connect to each other in a federated architecture are trusted correctly follow the same instructions as if only one domain was present see Alternative 1 Alternative 3 Connect sites in workgroup s When you connect sites inside workgroups it is an important prerequisite for federated architecture to work correctly that the same administrator account is present on all computers you want connected in the federated architecture This must be in place before installing the system 1 Log in to Windows using a common administrator account 2 Start the management server installation see Installation overview on page 13 and click Custom 3 Select to install the Management Server service using a common administrator account 4 Finish the installation 5 Repeat steps 1 4 to install any other systems you want to connect They must all be installed using a common administrator account On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 213 OnSSI Federated Architecture Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 6 Refer to Add site to hierarchy on page 220 for details on how to proceed
322. o hierarchy on page 220 for details on how to proceed with the federated architecture Typical Installation set up network service on all servers 1 Start the management server installation see Installation overview on page 13 and select Typical let it run till it finishes This will install the management server as a network service 2 Repeat step 1 to install any other systems you want to connect with the federated architecture 3 Using a Management Client connect to the management server you want to have as your parent site 4 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security click Roles and in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 click Administrator 5 Add the child computer to this parent server s Administrator role Refer to Assign remove users and groups to from roles for details 6 Log out of the parent management server and connect to the management server that you just added as a child 7 Once again in the Overview pane click Administrator 8 Add the parent computer to this servers Administrator role Refer to Assign remove users and groups to from roles for details 9 Log out of the management server connect to the parent management server and refer to Manage OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 219 for details on how to proceed with federated architecture Alternative 2 Connect sites from different domains To make it possible t
323. o its logs To verify or change these settings do the following 1 Goto the Management Client s menu bar and select Tools gt Options 2 Inthe Options window select the General tab One of the tab s settings applies for all types of logs o Number of log rows to retrieve per page Lets you specify the number of log rows you want to view on a single log page If a log contains more than the specified number of rows you will be able view the remaining rows on subsequent log pages 3 Goto the Options window s Management Server Logs tab 200 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Optio rni X m SereeLogr Hia Banm Ai Darmen Hobart Log seting EID Lay JESUM F Pu Log T Eriten Cira ka beep krg irimas Rude Log x5 Aare meer ol o ene 100000 H Hh L w tm In the tab s left box select the required log The selected log s settings are displayed in the tab s right box o Log enabled Lets you enable disable the selected log By default all logs except the Event Log are enabled The System Log and Audit Log cannot be disabled by clearing the box o Days to keep log entries Lets you specify how many days the log s information should be kept for Default is 30 days Excess log content will be deleted if the log reaches its maximum allowed size see Maximum number of entries before the specified number of days is reached o Maximum number of entries Lets you s
324. o specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time On lt site gt trigger Relevant mostly within OnSSI Federated Architecture see About OnSSI Federated lt user defined event Architecture on page 212 but can also be used in a single server setup Used for triggering a user defined event on a site normally a remote site within a federated hierarchy No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Create typical rules The following is a brief introduction to examples of typical rules what you can do with them and how they can be constructed Basic rules e Use higher live frame rate on motion Ensures that when motion is detected on a specific camera the system will use a higher than default live frame rate for the camera and return to using the camera s default live frame rate when motion is no longer detected The effect is higher quality live video whenever there is motion When the specified part of the day ends the PTZ camera will stop patrolling PTZ related rules e Use specific PTZ patrolling profile during specific part of day Ensures that during a specific part of the day a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile i e the exact definition of how patrolling should be carried out
325. o ways simultaneously if required e For providing the ability to manually trigger events in the Ocularis Client In this case user defined events make it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in the Ocularis Client So when a user defined event occurs because an Ocularis Client user triggers it manually a rule can trigger that one or more actions should take place on the system e For providing the ability to trigger events through API In this case user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system Using user defined events this way requires that a separate API Application Program Interface a set of building blocks for creating or customizing software applications is used when triggering the user defined event Authentication through Active Directory is required for using user defined events this way This ensures that even though the user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system only authorized users will be able to do it Also user defined events can via API be associated with meta data defining certain devices or device groups This is highly usable when using user defined events to trigger rules you avoid having a rule for each device basically doing the same thing Example A company uses access control having 35 entrances each with an access control device When an access control device is activated a user defined event is triggered in the sys
326. ode then expand the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select the required input Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via Common Gateway Interface CGI script commands Also check the system release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the devices and firmware used ENABLE INPUT When inputs are detected with the Add Hardware on page 53 process they are by default disabled You can activate inputs when needed If a device has several inputs you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the input is placed 3 Right click the required input and select Enabled SPECIFY INPUT PROPERTIES Each input typically has several properties You can access these properties in two ways e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices and select nputs In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required inputs folder and select the required input Of e Inthe Overview pane
327. ods of time defined in the Management Client They can be used when creating rules in the Management Client for example to create a rule which specifies that a certain action should take place within a certain time profile e Notification profiles see Manage notification profiles on page 176 Notification profiles can be used for setting up ready made e mail notifications which can automatically be triggered by a rule for example when a particular event occurs e User defined events see Manage user defined events on page 180 User defined events are custom made events making it possible for users to manually trigger events in the system or react to inputs from the system Actions and Stop actions Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable When using events to create rules in the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 165 you are able to select between a number of different actions First Select actions to perform v Start recording Set live frame rate on devices Set recording frame rate on devices Some of these actions will require a subsequent stop action Example If you select the action Start recording recording will start and potentially continue indefinitely Therefore the action Start recording has a compulsory stop action called Stop recording Manage Rule makes sure you specify such stop actions when necessary stop actions are typically
328. of recordings The one hour split makes it possible to remove only relatively small parts of an archive s data if the maximum allowed size of the archive is reached The sub directories are named after the device followed by an indication of whether recordings come from an edge camera or via SMTP if relevant plus the date and time of the most recent database record contained in the sub directory Naming structure Storage Path Storage name device name plus date and time of most recent recording If from edge camera Storage Path Storage name device name Edge plus date and time of most recent recording If from SMTP Storage Path Storage name device name SMTP plus date and time of most recent recording Real life example F NOurArchiveMArchivelNXCamera 1 on Axis 07404 Video Server 10 100 50 137 2011 10 05T11 23 47402 00wN Even further sub directories are automatically added The amount and nature of these sub directories depend on the nature of the actual recordings For example several different such sub directories will be added if the recordings are technically divided into sequences something which is often the case if motion detection has been used to trigger recordings If you want to back up your archives knowing the basics of the sub directory structure enables you to target your backups Examples If wishing to back up the content of an entire archive back up th
329. of servers This ensures that the system has very little down time If a server in the cluster fails another server in the cluster will automatically take over the failed server s job running the management server The automatic process of switching over the server service to run on another server in the cluster only takes a very short time up to 30 seconds Note that the allowed number of failovers is limited to two within a six hour period If exceeded Management Server services are not automatically started by the clustering service The number of allowed failovers can be changed to better fit your needs Refer to Microsoft s homepage for details on how to do this Is clustering the same as OnSSI Federated Architecture No clustering is not the same as federated architecture Clustering is a method to obtain failover support for a management server on a site With clustering it is only possible to have one active management server per surveillance setup but other management servers may be set up to take over in case of failure On the other hand federated architecture is a method to combine multiple independent sites into one large setup offering flexibility and unlimited possibilities Prerequisites for clustering e Two or more servers installed in a cluster Regarding clusters in Microsoft Windows 2003 refer to Deploying Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 in a cluster Regarding clusters in Microsoft Windows 2008 refer to
330. of the property 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the gray information box below the settings table READ THE OUTPUT LIST S STATUS ICONS The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 input see Manage input on page 109 and output see Manage output on page 113 events in item lists 116 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Item enabled Can communicate with the recording server a and can if required be started stopped automatically through a Item recording 4 qd Speaker being recorded Note that what is being said through j the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed 7 Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no 7B CE d e information is transferred to the system In which case f it is a camera neither live viewing nor
331. often the web page is automatically loaded at the end of the management server installation and the default content is displayed Otherwise the web page can be accessed by entering the URL http management server address port installation admin where management server address is the IP address or host name of the management server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the management server If not accessing the web page on the management server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the management server e One targeted at end users providing them access to client applications with default configuration The content is displayed when the web page is accessed by entering the URL http management server address port installation where management server address is the IP address or host name of the management server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the management server The two web page s automatically has some default content so they can be used right away after the installation process As administrator however by using the Download Manager you can customize what should be displayed on the web page s You are also able to move components between the two versions of the web page i e between the one targeted at system administrators and the one targeted at end users To move a component right click it and select the web page version you
332. oles for Ocularis CS servers e 264 Prerequisites for clustering 23 Principles for setting up federated sites 277 Privacy Mask tab camera properties 70 71 97 105 108 Privacy masking in OnSSI Interconnect 108 Privacy masking settings 106 Product overview 8 Protect recording databases from corruption 94 310 PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties 97 108 115 163 170 181 189 199 PTZ Presets tab camera properties 108 115 163 171 180 189 199 208 PTZ rights 245 PTZ tab video encoders 97 161 R Read and copy logs 253 Read failover recording server status icons 306 Read microphone list s status icons 123 Read recording server icons 93 Read server service icons management recording and failover 59 314 317 Read speaker list s status icons 130 Read the camera list s status icons 97 Read the input list s status icons 136 Read the output list s status icons 142 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Record tab overview 88 97 121 122 129 152 153 168 169 208 209 272 Recording 153 Recording frame rate camera 153 Recording Server 8 Recording server settings 314 315 316 Recording servers 212 Recording failover recording server install properties 15 16 Refresh site hierarchy 277 288 Register new Axis One click camera 59 Registered services 267 Registered services settings 267 269 Remo
333. omain controller on your network the system lets you quickly add users and or groups from Active Directory Only one user is necessary when using the recording component with Ocularis A second user may be required if also using Ocularis OpenSight activate licenses see About licenses on page 47 Why must licenses be activated When installing the system you used a single temporary license The temporary license is only valid for a certain number of days After this initial period ends all recording servers and cameras on your system will require activation of their individual licenses You must therefore activate your licenses before the initial period ends since all recording servers and cameras for which no licenses have been activated will otherwise stop sending data to the surveillance system On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Use the Management Client to Log in to the Management Server Access to the Management Client requires certain user rights Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 1 Click the Management Client desktop icon or in Windows Start menu select All Programs gt OnSSl Management Client This makes the login window appear 2 Inthe Computer field type the name of the computer running the management server leaving out http https in front 3 You have three different options when logging in Windows Authentication current user W
334. on Services IIS 5 1 or newer You normally add users from Active Directory although you can also add users without Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems It identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them If you wish to add users through the Active Directory service a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller must be available on your network 12 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal Installation and Removal Installation overview Note that the Axis One click Connection Component is not installed by the common installer This must be installed from the management server s download website see Download Manager download web page on page 19 controlled by the Download Manager once the management server is installed The same applies to failover recording server s see Install failover recording server recording server on page 16 In general your installation or upgrade scenario is handled by one common installer Depending on your selections this installer installs all or some of the following components e Management Server the center of your system installation Typically installed on a dedicated server e Recording Server used for recording video feeds communicating with cameras via video device drivers see Manage
335. on and Removal Command Ene option reference Installer 2 0 This setup package accepts following command lime switches anguments lt filename gt Sets the argument file in quiet mode language lt lang gt Sets the language for the installer and product e g en US partner_id lt id gt Sets the partner ID Used mostly for the Download Manager dm_W lt id gt Sets the ID forthe Intemet Download Manager quiet Installs the software in quiet mode help Shows this message msilag Enables extended msi logging lagpatha filepath Sets the path to the Ing file acceptstatisticsa 0 12 Enables the Customer Expenence Improvement Program generateargsfile lt path Generates a file with the default arguments in the Folder showconsale Enables console output in quiet mode licenses lt hoensefile gt Sets the path to the license file licensetypes type Sets tha license type 55 rnegestration Registers this installer on the download page When you have installed new components they are by default selected in the Download Manager and are immediately available to users via the web page You can always show or hide features on the web page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure Tip You can change the sequence in which components are displayed on the web page In the Download Manager s tree structure drag component items and drop them at the required po
336. on your surveillance system the recording servers should automatically be listed in the Management Client If your Management Client does not list all the recording servers you have installed the most likely reason is that the missing recording servers have not been correctly configured to On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 79 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES connect to a management server in your system recording servers point to management servers not the other way round The configuration normally takes place during one of the steps in the recording server installation process Here you specify recording server setup parameters among these the IP address or host name of the management server to which the recording server should be connected Fortunately you do not have to re install recording servers in order to specify which management servers they should connect to Once a recording server is installed you can verify change its basic configuration the following way 1 On the computer running the recording server right click the Recording Server icon in the notification area 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Recording Server service Important Stopping the Recording Server service means that you cannot record and view live video while you verify change the recording server s basic configuration Right click the notification area s Recording Server icon again 4 From the menu that appears select Change S
337. ondary failover group Also regular failover servers already part of a failover group cannot be selected as hot standby servers Tip From the Primary Secondary failover server group dropdowns select Add new to create new failover groups and add failover recording servers 4 Next click Advanced failover settings this opens the Advanced Failover Settings window listing all devices attached to the selected recording server 74 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Tip Even if you selected None Advanced failover settings will be available Any selections are kept for later failover setups 5 To specify the level of failover support select Full Support Live Only or Disabled for each device in the list Click OK 6 Finally in the Failover service communication port TCP field edit the port number if needed FAILOVER TAB PROPERTIES None Select a setup without failover Primary failover server group Secondary failover sever group Select a regular failover setup with one primary and possibly one secondary failover server group Also from the attached dropdown select a primary failover group and possibly a secondary failover group Hot standby server Select a hot standby setup Also from the dropdown select a hot standby server Advanced failover settings Opens the Advanced Failover Settings window o Full Support Select to get full failover support for the devic
338. one zoom level per click How to use the axes navigation sliders The navigation sliders let you to move the camera along each of its axes Click inside the sliders to move the sliders red handles to the required positions The slider for the X axis allowing you to pan left right is located immediately below the preview image The slider for the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down is located immediately to the left of the preview image 98 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client The slider for the Z axis allowing you to zoom in and out is located immediately above the preview image The camera will Zoom in when you move the slider towards Tele and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide How to use the iris slider Iris settings are only available for some cameras Iris settings control the amount of light in images The higher the iris setting the lighter images will appear Click inside the slider to move the slider s red handle to the required position How to use the focus slider Focus settings are only available for some cameras Click inside the slider to move the slider s red handle to the required position Use preset positions from device type 2 As an alternative to specifying preset positions in the system preset positions may for some PTZ cameras also be defined on the camera device itself typically by accessing a device specific configuration web page S
339. op up appears Activate Online This wizard will perform an online activation to retrieve an updated license according to the current configuration of your system Tou should always log in as the same user when activating the license Evisting user C Mew user To continue click Mert E Cancel oelect Existing User Select the Existing user radio button It is important to select Existing user DO NOT select New User On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 45 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 9 Click Next Activate Online Enter user information Enter the user name and password User Name e mail address jpesampleceonssi com Password Save password Privacy Statement Click Next to begin the online activation Back Mext gt Cancel Enter OnSSI License Portal credentials Enter the user name email address and password that was emailed to you in step 2 Click Next Once camera licenses have been validated the camera license count will go from Temporary to Activated in the License Information screen If at any point in this license registration process you have questions or receive an error message please contact OnSSI Sales Activate Register Licenses Offline Use this procedure when the management client computer does not have internet connectivity 1 T 8 On the Management Client computer open the Management Client and rig
340. or example it is often a good idea to spend time on testing and adjusting the motion detection sensitivity settings of individual cameras under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather and so on once the system is running The setup of rules which determine most of the actions performed by the system including when to record video is another example of configuration which to a very large extent depends on your organization s needs instal see Installation overview on page 13 the various components of your system vi o in see Use the Management Client to Log in to the Management Server on page 37 to the Management Client authorize use see Authorize a recording server on page 66 of your system s recording servers Why must I authorize recording servers In a surveillance system recording servers point to management servers not the other way round In theory recording servers which you do not want to include in your surveillance system could thus be configured to connect to your management servers By authorizing recording servers before they can be used surveillance system administrators have full control over which recording servers are able to send information to which management servers LJ Detect the hardware devices see Add hardware on page 53 for example cameras and video encoders which should be added to each recording server What is the Add Hardware wizard Add Hardware helps you detect IP
341. orage Retrieves and stores edge recordings from selected devices that support edge recordings from recording see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 Can be set lt devices gt to execute immediately or at a certain point in time No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Note that this rule is independent of the Automatically retrieve remote recordings when connection is restored setting see Remote recording camera remote system on page 128 Save attached image Ensures that when an image is received from the Images Received event see Events overview on page 161 sent via SMTP e mail from a camera it is saved for future usage In future other events might also be able to trigger this action No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Activate archiving on starts archiving on one or more archives When you select this type of action Manage archives Rule will prompt you to select required archives On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 141 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible t
342. ordng Semeri I Basis H Mp Becording Server ine Getting Stated lel Licence Ir ommalian qj Servers ij Recording Sereeet E Failover Servers z qn Devices 7m ameta Backward compatibility with recording servers from product versions older than this current version is limited You can still access recordings on such older recording servers but in order for you to be able to change their configuration they must be of the same version as this current one OnSSI highly recommends that all recording servers in your system are upgraded see Upgrade from previous version on page 25 to the latest possible version IMPORTANT When the Recording Server service is running it is very important that neither Windows Explorer nor other programs are accessing Media Database files or folders associated with your system setup Otherwise the recording server might not be able to rename or move relevant media files Unfortunately this might bring the recording server to a halt If this situation has already occurred stop the Recording Server service close the program accessing the media file s or folder s in question and simply restart the Recording Server service Authorize a recording server When first using the system or when new recording servers have been added to the system you must authorize the new recording servers Why must I authorize recording servers In a surveillance system recording servers point to management servers n
343. ory objects capable of containing several users In this example the Management Group has three members i e it contains three users 88 Management Group Adolfo Rodriguez Karen Otley Wayne Massey Groups can contain any number of users By adding a group to the system you add all of its members in one go Once you have added the group to the system any changes made to the group in Active Directory Such as new members added or old members removed at a later stage are immediately reflected in the system Note that a user can be a member of more than one group at a time ADD USERS NOT USING ACTIVE DIRECTORY While you primarily add users and groups to roles see About roles on page 182 through Active Directory you can also add individual users but not groups without Active Directory If you do not use Active Directory note the following e When you install the management server the user under which the Management Server service runs must be a local PC user on the server e On the computer running the management server simple file sharing must be disabled the following way 1 On the computer running management server right click Start and select Explore 2 In the window that opens select the Tools menu then select Folder Options 3 Select the View tab 4 Scroll to the bottom of the Advanced settings list and make sure that the Use simple file sharing Recommended check box is cleared 5 Click OK
344. ot the other way round In theory recording servers which you do not want to include in your surveillance system could thus be configured to connect to your management servers By authorizing recording servers before they can be used surveillance system administrators have full control over which recording servers are able to send information to which management servers 1 Expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select the Recording Servers node 2 Right click the required recording server in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 From the menu that appears select Authorize Recording Server r E H ar Remove Recording Server EE Authorize Recording Server D zm z i Refresh F5 After a short moment the recording server will be authorized and ready for further configuration View edit a recording server s properties When a recording server is authorized you are able to view edit the recording server s properties including its database storage area settings When you select the required recording server in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 the recording server s properties are displayed in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Expand the required recording server to see which devices are connected to the recordin
345. ou want to include in your report 3 Optional Click Front Page to customize your front page In the window that appears fill in the needed info Remember to select Front page as an element to include in you report otherwise the front page you customize will not be included in your report 4 Click Formatting to customize your font page size and margins In the window that appears select the wanted settings 5 When you are ready to export click Export and select a name and save location for you report Tip Remember not all fonts support all special characters If you have trouble viewing your special characters try selecting a different font On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 195 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Configure report details The following is available when setting up reports o Select All Selects all elements in the list o Clear All Clears all elements in the list o Front Page Opens a dialog allowing you to customize the front page o Formatting Opens a dialog allowing you to format the report o Export Opens a dialog allowing you to select the save location for the report and create the pdf 196 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Server logs Manage logs In the Management Client you are able to view and copy contents from different logs related to the management server The different logs have different purposes e Audit Log records
346. ould be because you gave the database another name during the management server installation View example We will assume that the database uses the default name 226 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Backup restore and move system configuration Enter database name Surveillance ual Leeri Example During management server installation it is possible to change the database name from the default name Surveillance to another name o Make a backup of the Surveillance database and make sure to e Verify that the selected database is Surveillance e Verify that the backup type is full e Set the schedule for the recurrent backup e Verify that the suggested path is satisfactory or select alternative path e Select to verify backup when finished and to perform checksum before writing to media 3 Follow the instructions in the tool to the end Tip Also consider backing up the SurveillanceLog database using the same method Back up log server database Handle the SurveillanceLogServer database using the same method as when handling system configuration described earlier in this topic The SurveillanceLogServer database name may be different if you renamed the system configuration database contains all your system logs including errors reported by recording servers and cameras The database is located where the Log Server Service is installed typically the same place as your management se
347. ounregister a camera under an ST server right click it select Unregister Axis One click Camera 2 Inthe dialog that appears make sure the check mark is selected and click Yes 3 The camera will disappear from under the relevant ST server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 51 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Axis One Click Camera connection properties Camera password Camera user Description External address Internal address Name Owner authentication key Passwords for Dispatch Server Passwords for ST server Register Unregister at the Axis Dispatch Service Serial number Use credentials User name for Dispatch Server User name for ST server 52 Enter Edit Provided with your camera at purchase For further details see your camera s manual or www axis com http www axis com See details for Camera password Enter Edit a description of the item Not compulsory Enter Edit the http address of the ST server where the camera s connect Tip Remember http in front of the address Enter Edit the http address of the ST server where the recording server connects Tip Remember http in front of the address If needed edit the name of the item See Camera password Enter password Must be identical to the one received from your system provider Enter password Must be identical to the one entered when the Axis One Click Connection Component was installed Indicate w
348. our needs see About storage and archiving on page 61 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 35 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 36 What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice Archiving is configured on a per recording server basis Once you have configured the archiving settings for a recording server where to store archives how often to transfer recordings to the archives and so on you can enable archiving for individual cameras When archiving is enabled for a camera the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an archive at regular intervals LI configure any required failover recording servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 A failover recording server is a Spare recording server which can take over if a standard recording server becomes unavailable LI configure each recording server s individual cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 Tip You are able to group cameras and configure common properties for all cameras within a group in one go Tip Motion detection a vital setting on most IP surveillance systems is enabled by default However you may wan
349. over recording server you must enable it before it can take over from standard recording servers Do the following to enable a failover recording server and edit its basic properties 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select Servers Failover Servers This opens a list of installed failover recording servers and failover groups 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required failover recording server Right click and select Enabled The failover recording server is now enabled SB Failover Groups PP Failover Group 1 testb3 stone dk z Tip You can tell a failover recording server s status from its icon The server in the example above has a green tick mark indicating is either waiting or watching Furthermore by hovering over it a tooltip appears containing the text entered in the Description field of the failover recording server You may want to use this to indicate which recording server the failover recording server is configured to take over from 4 To edit failover recording server properties see Failover recording server properties on page 237 go to the Info tab Faikveer server irbomalion aes aver From recording server a Host name test one dk UDP port 0844 Database lpcahlion D Wledial abase W Enable this failover serves 5 When done go to the Network tab Here you can define the failover recording server s pu
350. pace If this limit is reached if data is not deleted fast enough no more data will be written to the database until enough space has been freed The actual maximum size of your database will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 5GB Click the Schedule icon next to the Schedule field to specify an archiving schedule that is the intervals with which the archiving process should start If required you can make archiving take place very frequently in principle every hour all year round or very infrequently for example every first Monday of every 36 months Select the Reduce frame rate check box and set a frame per second FPS in order to reduce FPS when archiving Reducing frame rates by a selected number of FPS s will make your recordings take up less space in the archive On the other hand it also reduces quality since a number of frames are erased leaving only FPS corresponding to the number of FPS selected in the dialog MPEG H 264 will be reduced to minimum key frames Tip The ideal interval to use between each archiving process depends entirely upon your organization s needs Consider your system s recording settings make an estimate of the amount of data you expect to record within for example a day a week or a month then decide on a suitable interval Bear in mind that your organization s needs may change over time It is a good idea to regularly monitor your archiving settings and adjust them if required
351. page 33 Site Navigation a g Right click does not select Because you must be able to delete a site without being connected to it right clicking a site does not select it but offers a context menu which differs depending on where in the hierarchy you are Refer to Action menu see Management Client Menu Overview on page 37 Context menu From the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 a context menu lets you add sites to a hierarchy accept inclusion in a hierarchy rename sites in a hierarchy detach sites from hierarchy work with site properties and refresh site hierarchy Due to the nature of federated sites when the context menu is activated from a parent you cannot accept inclusion in the hierarchy And when it is activated from a child it is not possible to refresh the site hierarchy Add site to hierarchy You can add children to both your home site and to its children when connected to them Prerequisites To add a child to a parent in your hierarchy one of the following two scenarios must be true e The management server is installed as a network service Before a parent child link can be established without the acceptance from the administrator of the child both computers involved parent and child must be added as a user to the other s system administrator role Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles e he management server is installed as a
352. path acceptstatistirsa 0 1 generateargsfile lt path 5haowconsale license lt hrensefile gt licensetynes type 55 rnegestration Install your system on virtual servers Sets the argument file in quiet mode Sets the language for the installer and product e g en US Sets the partner ID Used mostly for the Download Manager Sets the 1D forthe Intemet Download Manager Installs the software in quiet mode Shows this message Enables extended msi lagging Sets the path to the Ing file Enables the Customer Expenence Improvement Program Generates a file wath the default arguments in the Folder Enables console output in quiet mode Sets the path to the license file Sets the license type Registers this installer on the download page You can run all system components on virtualized see Installation overview on page 13 Windows servers such as for example VMware and Microsoft Hyper V Contact your IT department for more information Tip Virtualization is often preferred to better utilize hardware resources Normally virtual servers running on the hardware host server do not load the virtual server to a great extent and often not at the same time However recording servers record all cameras and video streams This puts high load on CPU memory network and storage 18 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal system
353. pecify the maximum size of the log Default is 50 000 entries Excess log content will be deleted if it reaches its maximum allowed age see Days to keep log entries before the specified number of entries is reached For the Audit Log you will also see o Enable user access logging Lets you include detailed information about specific user actions in the audit log e g about users viewing of live video and associated audio PTZ actions activation of output and events export playback of video and audio use of playback features any denied access to features etc o Playback sequence logging length Lets you specify how long a playback sequence may last and still be considered and logged as one sequence Example If you select 60 seconds you may view 60 consecutive seconds of playback video but still only leave one log entry in the Audit Log Specifying a high number of seconds may help limit the number of viewed sequences logged and in this way reduce the size of the audit log o Records seen before logging Lets you specify the number of records to be viewed before logging the sequence 4 Click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 201 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Ocularis CS Manage Ocularis CS servers This section is only relevant if you run Ocularis ES If your organization has Ocularis CS installations you can integrate Ocularis CS servers into your system You do this by adding the Ocularis C
354. pen on the machine running the Data Collector Port 8080 Used for communication between internal processes on the management server only Port 8844 Used for User Datagram Protocol UDP communication between failover recording servers Port 9993 Used for communication between recording servers and management servers Port 11000 Used by failover recording servers for polling i e regularly checking the state of recording servers Port 12345 Used by management servers and Ocularis Client for communication Port 65101 Used between processes on the same machine only i e Inter Process Communication IPC on a single machine only On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 255 Index Index 3 360 Lens tab camera properties 119 A About basic users 235 240 248 About clients 166 About configuration report 247 250 251 About current task 69 164 250 251 About Data Collector Server service 250 About device groups 96 122 124 128 131 137 149 About devices 78 96 About failover recording servers regular and hot standby 40 89 92 158 213 299 305 318 About hardware 56 63 96 125 145 About installer commands 18 21 About licenses 41 55 64 277 About multi streaming 120 About OnSSI Federated Architecture 8 13 33 37 43 57 173 235 248 264 275 281 284 About OnSSI Interconnect 56 62 67 121 152 158 164 About recording servers 75 About remote connect
355. perty you want to change 2 Click the button to the right of the properties column 112 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 3 Change the value of the property 4 Inthe toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the gray information box below the settings table READ THE INPUT LIST S STATUS ICONS The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 input see Manage input on page 109 and output see Manage output on page 113 events in item lists Item enabled Can communicate with the recording server m and can if required be started stopped automatically through a Item recording d 9 d Speaker being recorded Note that what is being said through j the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Item temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when an item is communicating with the system while it is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed P Rule is not active see Managing Rules When stopped no E
356. plete click Next 5 Wait while device specific information is collected for each hardware device A status indicator shows the detection process If collecting hardware information for a device is unsuccessful click the Failed error message to see why the collection of information has failed Once collection is complete click Next 6 Choose to enable or disable successfully detected hardware and cameras Detected hardware such as hardware device camera microphone and speaker is listed individually This allows you to for example add a hardware device s camera without enabling its speaker if needed 7 Select a default group for all device types The devices are listed according to type for example camera microphone and speaker Click Finish Tip The list of drivers that appears when you scan for drives is typically very long and all drivers are selected by default With Select All and Clear All you can avoid having to select clear all check boxes manually Furthermore when hardware is being detected select the Show hardware running on other recording servers check box to see if detected hardware is running on other recording servers Note also that you can only specify IPv4 addresses when using Address Range Scanning Manual The Manual option lets you specify details about each hardware device and OnSSI Interconnect remote systems see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 separately This can be a good choice if you only want
357. ppear In the Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add Time Profile For detailed information about specifying time profiles refer to Manage time profiles on page 173 e The camera in question is a PTZ camera e Preset positions and at least two patrolling profiles are defined for the camera How to define preset positions and patrolling profiles When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it moves between a number of preset positions Thus before you able to define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera the preset positions required for the patrolling profiles must be defined To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 For details of how to define preset positions on the Presets tab refer to Preset Positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 Once you have defined the required preset positions patrolling profiles for the PTZ camera are defined on the neighboring Patrolling tab For details of how to define patrolling profiles on the Patrolling tab refer to Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 Creating the First
358. previously defined patrolling profiles and click OK Select a Profile x gt Al Camera d B Lab PTZ 1 Uh Aetad dues PTZ D agtime Haghitime Saturday Aftermoon mm rm Finally we click the priority link to set the priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 of the patrolling profile By doing this we have further specified the content of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 149 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval ithin the time period 1 00 to 3 00 and day of week is Saturdav tart patrolling on Retail Area PTZ using Retail Area Saturday Afternoon with PTZ priority 50 Click Next to move to step 4 of the wizard 7 Onstep 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started gt In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would start patrolling within the specified time period but never stop it Based on the elements in our rule description the wizard therefore automatically suggests the stop criterion Perform stop action when time interval ends First Select stop ciena 6 Perform stop action when lime interval ends Note that the stop criterion No actions performed on rule end is
359. r Right clicking the recording server icon in the notification area opens a menu with which you can start stop the Recording Server service view recording server status messages and so on Refer to Recording Server service administration see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 for more information Recording server must be authorized Appears when the recording server is loaded for the first time When first using a recording server you must authorize it ED Right click the required recording server icon From the menu that appears select Authorize Recording Server After a short moment the recording server will be authorized and ready for further configuration Ongoing database repair Appears when databases have become corrupted and the recording server is repairing them The repair process may take considerable time if the databases are large IMPORTANT During the database repair it is not possible to record video from cameras Ej connected to the recording server in question Live video viewing will still be possible How can databases become corrupted Databases typically become corrupted if the recording server is shut down abruptly for example due to a power failure or similar Refer to Protect Databases from Corruption see Protect recording databases from corruption on page 242 for useful information about how to avoid corrupt databases If you have installed several recording servers
360. r recording server has taken over from the designated recording server Tip When hovering over the server icon in the Management Client a tooltip appears You can use this tooltip to identify which recording server the failover recording server has taken over from The tooltip text is defined in the failover recording server s Description field see Failover recording server properties on page 237 Connection to the failover recording server is broken Failover Recording Server service When you have installed a failover recording server you are able to check the state of the Failover Recording Server service by looking at the Failover Recording Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the failover recording server The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Failover Recording Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the management server computer s Windows taskbar EN Q E Go 10 33 AM While the Failover Recording Server service is stopped the failover recording server will not be able to take over from standard recording servers 240 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Failover recording servers regular hot standby Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service The Failover Recording Server service starts automatically If you have stopped
361. rding stop action when the time period ends And you can create very simple event based rules involving events on one device only Example gt Very Simple Event Based Rule When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 Camera 1 should start recording action immediately then stop recording stop action after 10 seconds However even though an event based rule is activated by an event on one device you can specify that actions should take place on one or more other devices Example Rule Involving Several Devices When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 Camera 2 should start recording action immediately and the siren connected to Output 3 should sound action immediately then after 60 seconds Camera 2 should stop recording stop action and the siren connected to Output 3 should stop sounding stop action You can of course also combine events and scheduled times in a rule Example 7 Rule Combining Time Events and Devices When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 and the day of the week is Saturday or Sunday time condition Camera 1 and Camera 2 should start recording action immediately and a notification should be sent to the security manager action then 5 seconds after motion is no longer detected on Camera 1 or Camera 2 the 2 cameras should stop recording stop action The required complexity of rules will vary from organization to organization Some may require only a num
362. rdings may be affected by individual camera s recording settings In case you accidentally delete the default record on motion rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on Motion Started from All Cameras start recording 3 seconds before on the device on which event occurred Perform stop action on Motion Stopped from All Cameras stop recording 3 seconds after Default record on request rule Ensures that video is recorded automatically when an external request occurs provided recording is enabled see Record tab overview on page 125 for the cameras in question recording is by default enabled 160 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client IMPORTANT The request is always triggered by a system integrating externally with your system and the rule is primarily used by integrators of external systems or plug ins In case you accidentally delete the default record on bookmark rule you can recreate it with the following content Perform an action on Request Start Recording from External start recording immediately on the devices from metadata Perform stop action on Request Stop Recording from External stop recording immediately Default start audio feed rule Ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the system IMPORTANT While the default rule enables access to connected microphones and speakers audio feeds i
363. re Some hardware is capable of creating events themselves for example to detect motion These can be used as events but must obviously be configured on the hardware before they can be used in the system Events listed here may only be possible on some hardware For example only selected cameras are able to detect tampering or temperature changes Configurable events hardware These configurable events are unknown until they are automatically imported from device drivers As a result they cannot be documented separately or in details in this context Furthermore configurable events are not triggered until they have been added and configured on the Event tab on a hardware or device see Events tab overview on page 128 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 161 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Predefined events hardware Communication Error Hardware Occurs when a connection to a the hardware is lost Communication Started Occurs when communication with the hardware is successfully established Hardware Communication Stopped Hardware Occurs when communication with the hardware is successfully stopped Configurable events devices These configurable events are unknown until they are automatically imported from device drivers As a result they cannot be documented separately or in details in this context Furthermore configurable events are not triggered until they have been added and configured on the Event tab
364. re recordings are retrieved from e Fora camera with local recording storage recording are retrieved from the camera s local recording storage e Foran OnSSI Interconnect remote system they are retrieved from the remote systems recording servers see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 Note that the Retrieve remote recordings from devices rule see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 can be used independently of this setting Events tab overview On the Events tab you can manage events from hardware cameras microphones or OnSSI Interconnect remote systems see About OnSSI Interconnect on page 57 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required item in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Events tab For hardware the Events tab will only be available if the selected item supports events 128 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Conigured Event Ens Hon Stached Hw E General Hobo Shaped Hw Eraba me Vtech reet True Mopbon indo B Prebuller hai per pearl 5 Prebuller secondi Enabled 2 Inthe Configured Events list add the wanted event s on each item on your system Which events you may select and add in the Configured events list is determined entirely by the hardware device in question and its configuration For some types of hardware devices the list may be empty In OnSSI Interconnect setups some eve
365. re your system for this feature during installation There are certain important prerequisites that you must ensure already at the time of installing your management server This can be done in different ways choose between the procedures in alternative 1 3 Alternative 1 Connect sites from the same domain with common domain user and customize the installation of the management server to federated architecture Before installation of the management server a common domain user should be created and used as the administrator on all computers involved in the MFA Depending on whether you select Custom or Typical during installation of the management server make sure to select the appropriate procedure Note that a typical installation requires more configuration on all sites before federated architecture will work properly Custom installation 212 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture 1 Start the management server installation see Installation overview on page 13 and select Custom 2 Select to install the Management Server service using a user account The selected user account must be the administrator on all management servers and must also be used when installing the other management servers in the federated architecture setup Finish the installation 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to install any other systems you want to connect in the federated architecture Refer to Add site t
366. recording server service is stopped your system will not be able to interact with devices connected to the recording server Consequently no live viewing or recording will be possible While the management server service is stopped you will not be able to use the Management Client at all 1 Access the server service on page 244 2 Select either Stop Recording Server service or Stop Management Server service Change recording server settings To change basic settings for the Recording Server service such as which port numbers to use do the following To be able to change settings the Recording Server service must be stopped While the Recording Server service is stopped the system will not be able to interact with devices connected to the recording server Consequently no live viewing or recording will be possible 1 Refer to Access the server service on page 244 2 Select Stop Recording Server service 3 Right click the notification area s recording server icon 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Recording Server Settings window see Recording server settings on page 246 appears Change the appropriate settings View status messages 1 Refer to Access the server service on page 244 2 Select Show Status Messages Depending on the current server type either the Management Server Status Messages or Recording Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages i
367. reflects changes to the federated site made both by you and possibly other administrators This means that you might see changes here caused by other users You might also experience that a site you are connected to is removed from the federated site by another user In this case your site will be removed from the Federated Site Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 but nothing will change in the Site Navigation pane or elsewhere allowing you to continue working Possibilities and constrains of federated sites In principle there is no limit to the number of sites you can add to federated architecture and how these can be linked offering you unlimited scaling flexibility and accessibility Frequently asked questions to federated sites What is a federated site A federated site is basically just an individual system complete with management server SQL server one or more recording server s failover recording server s and cameras To make use of OnSSl Federated Architecture you must connect at least two individual systems The Management Client is used to configure federated hierarchies In principle it lets you connect to any site in the federated hierarchy at any given time if user rights permit using the log in credentials for your home site This offers you a central overview and at the same time lets you zoom in on selected sites by connecting to a specific site to have a closer look make configurations or carry out mai
368. rence between hardware devices and hardware Technically you do not add cameras or microphones to the system rather you add hardware devices This is because hardware devices have their own IP addresses or host names Being IP based the system primarily identifies units based on their IP addresses or host names Even though each hardware device has its own IP address or host name several cameras microphones and so on can be attached to a single hardware device and share the same IP address or host name This is typically the case with cameras attached to video encoder devices You can of course configure and use each camera microphone and so on individually even when several of them are attached to a single hardware device Hardware on the other hand is a general term for cameras microphones and so on For each recording server on your system you have several options for managing added IP hardware Most configuration and management of individual camera settings see Manage cameras on page 82 such as a camera s recording settings input settings see Manage input on page 109 and output settings see Manage output on page 113 takes place on a more detailed level camera input or output level On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 55 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES IMPORTANT When you delete one or all hardware devices on a recording server all its recordings are deleted permanently If you need to add the hardware
369. required plug ins and on which devices to start the plug ins This type of action requires that at one or more plug ins are available on your system No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Stops one or more plug ins When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to select required plug ins and on which devices to stop the plug ins On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client This type of action requires that at one or more plug ins are available on your system No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Apply new settings on Changes device settings When you select this type of action Manage Rule will devices prompt you to select required devices and you will be able to define required settings on the devices you have specified If defining settings for more than one device you will only be able to change settings that are available for all of the specified devices Example You specify that the action should be linked to Device 1 and Device 2 Device 1 has the settings A B and C and Device 2 has the settings B C and D In this case you will only be able to
370. rganization or person living or dead is purely coincidental and unintended On Net Surveillance Systems Inc reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice US patent 8 390 684 B2 for Ocularis Client Patents Applied For in the U S and Abroad On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 3 Contents Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Table of Contents WIcy ME Degg el c c eae aaa aria ak ee feces a bed ee E a eaten avacu A lil TABLE OF CONTENTS xr dooixt aE aaa N ead an Evi seR ved D S E E naan DM MEA E T AE IV INFRODUC TION pct DR 8 PRODUCT OVERVIEW M Vm 8 PROUT UD GAUSS sires cee ec oat ue cedes Soe scia Lebe uci dado iip n tbc i MM LE M iM EUlE 8 Management Sever t e P cR 8 Recording DEIVER eoa PET 8 Manage ment eio eoni a E E E a 9 Download Manager asirthsaitniticanastednatetcl lt uhe sted sonsintt scenes ted aiRun t Last even tuediunenttuienditedoorentsiauka Cel tren Coa med trea bl tas 9 SYSTEM TSEQUIREMENTS 23594 coetu Soak Ae n oN ae ire ete oA Ao ei a 9 Computer running management SELVEL cccceccccssececcesceccseecceececceuececseseeecsuusesseuseessegeeesssesessageeees 9 Computer running recording server or failover recording server cccecceceececeececaeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeaeees 10 Computer running Management CLIONt cccceccccseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeesseeeeesseeeeesaeeesaaeseesaaess 11 Computer running log SCIVGN n ceno nensi a e A E a E E AO seule adesa ves n aet ua TE EDE 1
371. right for your organization The Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition is a lightweight version of a full SQL server It is easy to install and prepare for use and often suffices for systems with less than 300 cameras However if you plan to perform frequent regular backups of your database OnSSI recommends using an existing SQL server on the network you must have administrator rights on the SQL server For large installations 300 cameras or more ONSSI recommends using a full scale existing SQL server on a dedicated machine on the network IMPORTANT OnSSI recommends that you install the database on a dedicated hard disk drive that is not used for anything else but the database Installing the database on its own drive prevents low disk performance IMPORTANT If relevant during the database preparation process you are asked whether you want to create a new database use an existing database or overwrite an existing database For a new installation you would typically select the default option Create new database However if you are installing the database as part of upgrading to a newer version of the system and you want to use your existing database make sure you select Use existing database Select service account In the installer dialogs see Install your system Custom option on page 15 you are asked to select a service account under which the Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server servi
372. ris LS Ocularis ES Note that the License Information page does not list microphones speakers and in and output boxes since these are unlimited In the Site Navigation pane you can activate licenses see Activate Register Licenses Online or Offline on page 44 by expanding Basics and right clicking License Information The cameras for which you do not have a license will not send data to the surveillance system Cameras added after all available licenses are used are unavailable Cameras without licenses will be identified by an exclamation mark symbol when listed in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Tip In the short period until you have obtained additional licenses you can disable some less important cameras to allow some of the new cameras to run instead Refer to Manage Hardware see About hardware on page 55 for more information Where can see how many grace periods have left This information is available from the License Information page When you add a new camera for which you have a license you are granted a new full grace period for the camera in question from the date you added the camera Therefore the end date of the grace period displayed on the License information page is for the first added but not activated camera Get additional licenses What if you want to add or if you already have added more device channels cameras or dedicated input output boxes than you curr
373. rmation Furthermore recording servers also display connection status information Within each view you can find a History link Click it to view historic data and reports to view reports on a camera click the name of the camera For each historic report you can view data for the last 24 hours 7 days or 30 days If you want to save and or print reports click the Send to PDF icon About current task To get an overview of tasks under a selected recording server their begin time estimated end time and progress do the following From the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand System Dashboard and click Current Task In general all information showed in Current Tasks are snapshots and are refreshed by clicking on the refresh button in the lower right corner of the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 About configuration report When creating your pdf configuration reports you can include any possible elements of your system which you want to see in the report Examples of what can be included ranges from licenses over device to alarm configuration and much more Furthermore you can customize your font and page setup and include a customized front page as listed Add a configuration report 1 From the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand System Dashboard and click Configuration Reports This brings up the report configuration page 2 Select the elements that y
374. rom the menu that appears select Show Status Messages The Failover Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages View version information Knowing the exact version of your Failover Recording Server service is an advantage if you need to contact product support 1 Right click the notification area s OnSS Failover Recording Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select About 3 Asmall dialog opens The dialog will show the exact version of your Failover Recording Server service On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 241 Database corruption Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Database corruption Protect recording databases from corruption If a recording server s databases become corrupted the recording server is in many cases able to repair the corrupt databases While the ability to repair corrupt databases is highly valuable it is of course even better to take steps to ensure that your databases do not become corrupted Power outages Use a UPS The single most common reason for corrupt databases is the recording server being shut down abruptly without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly This may happen due to power outages due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server s power cable or similar The best way of protecting your recording servers from being shut down abruptly is to equip each of your recording servers with a UPS Uninterruptible Po
375. roups with the selected role will be able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions SPEECH RIGHTS Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Relevant only if loudspeakers are available on your system The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client The following rights are available e Speak live Determines whether users with the selected role will be able talk through the selected speaker s e Speak priority When several Ocularis Client users want to talk through the same speaker at the same time conflicts may occur This setting lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected speaker s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from Very low to Very high Example You specify that the role Security Manager should have very high priority when talking through a speaker whereas the role Security Assistant should have low priority when talking through the speaker Now if a user with the role Security Manager and a user with the role Security Assistant want to talk through the speaker at the same time the user with the role Security Manager will win the ability to talk If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time the first
376. rt the old configuration again since no change have been committed If restoring fails elsewhere in the process rolling back to the old configuration is impossible As long as the backup file is not corrupted it will however be possible to do another restore Restoring replaces the current configuration This means that any configurational changes since last backup is lost No logs including audit logs see Manage logs on page 197 are restored Once restoring has started it cannot be canceled Restoring 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon and select Restore Configuration Next you are presented with an important note Read the contents of the note Click Restore 2 3 Inthe file open dialog browse to the location of the configuration backup file select it and click Open 4 The Restore Configuration window will now run showing progress and status information Wait for it to finish and click Close Your restore is finished Move system configuration to new management server It can sometimes be necessary to move the management server installation from one physical server to another The management server stores your system configuration in a database If you are moving the management server from one physical server to another it is vital that you make sure that your new management server also gets access to this database The system configuration database can be stored in two different
377. rticular purposes For example port 80 is used for HTTP traffic which is used when you view web pages In your RC L RC E system you must therefore make sure that certain ports are open for data traffic on your network Ports used by the system If nothing else is stated ports are both inbound and outbound e Port 20 and 21 Used by recording servers to listen for File Transfer Protocol FTP information some devices use FTP for sending event messages FTP is a standard for exchanging files across networks e Port 25 Used by recording servers to listen for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system server via e mail SMTP is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers e Port 80 While not directly used by the system but by management servers port 80 is typically used by the Internet Information Services IIS Default Web Site for running the Management Server service e Port 443 Used by the basic user authentication process where the management server must keep this port open at all times e Port 554 Used by recording servers for RTSP traffic which is used for controlling streaming from cameras e Port 1024 and above outbound only except ports listed in the following Used by recording servers for HTTP traffic between cameras and servers e Port 5210 Used for communication between recording
378. rver Backing up this database is not vital since it does not contain any system configuration but you may later appreciate having access to system logs from before the management server backup restore Restore system configuration from scheduled back up Prerequisite To prevent configurational changes being made while you restore the system configuration database stop the e Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 e Event Server Service can be done from Windows Services search for services msc on your machine Within Services locate OnSS Ocularis Event Server e World Wide Web Publishing Service also known as the Internet Information Service IIS Learn how to stop the IIS at http technet microsoft com en us library cc73231 7 WS 10 aspx Open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express from Windows Start menu by selecting All Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server 2008 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express 1 In the tool do the following o When connecting specify the name of the required SQL Server Use the account under which the database was created On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 227 Backup restore and move system configuration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES o Find the Surveillance database containing your entire system configuration including recording servers cameras inputs outputs users rules patrolling profiles etc o Make arestore of
379. rver as the management server and runs as a service Recording Server What Used for recording video and for communicating with cameras and other devices In large installations more than one recording server is often used on the surveillance system Failover recording servers can be set up to take over if a recording server becomes temporarily unavailable Where Recording servers as well as failover recording servers run as services and are typically installed on separate servers rather than on the management server itself 8 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Introductions Management Client What Feature rich administration client for configuration and day to day management of the system Available in several languages Where Typically installed on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Download Manager What Lets surveillance system administrators manage which system related components e g particular language versions of clients your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted web page generated by the management server Refer to Download Manager download web page on page 19 Where Automatically installed on the management server during the installation process System Requirements IMPORTANT This system no longer supports Microsoft Windows XP For easy user group management see Manage users and groups on page 182 OnSSI recommends that you ha
380. rver uses the token to validate the client s token against the local time in the recording server s own time zone The validity of a token expires after a while Therefore it is important that time on your management server and all of your organization s recording servers is synchronized minute and second wise hours may of course be different in different locations around the world If time on the servers is not synchronized you may experience that a recording server is ahead of the management server s time When a recording server is ahead of the management server s time it may result in a client s token expiring on the recording server earlier than intended by the management server Under unfortunate circumstances you might even experience that a recording server claims that a client s token has already expired when it receives it effectively preventing the client from viewing recordings from the recording server How to synchronize time on your organization s servers depends on your network configuration internet access use of domain controllers etc Often servers on a domain are already time synchronized against the domain controller If SO you should be fine as long as all required servers belong to the domain in question 80 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client If your servers are not already time synchronized it will be necessary to synchronize the servers time against a time server pr
381. rview on page 33 select Servers Failover Servers This opens a list of installed failover recording servers and failover groups In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the top node Failover Groups and select Add Group from the menu that appears Specify a name in this example Failover Group 1 and a description optional of your new group Click OK Right click the group Failover Group 1 you just created From the menu that appears select Edit Group Members This opens the Select Group Members window Drag and drop or use the buttons to move the selected failover recording server s from the left to the right side Select Group Members Failover Group 1 EJ Juv isse Selected Fake Geouge E Faka Server 1 M3 Faima Group 1 m roped F ake Seir Ej Faserer Serves 1 0k Cw 1 Click OK The selected failover recording server s now belongs to the group Failover Group 1 you just created m Fallover Groups GSS allover Groupi Failover Server 1 f Unused Failover Servers Next go to the Sequence tab Click Up and Down to set the internal sequence of the regular failover recordings servers in the group Failover group properties The Info tab e Name Name as it appears in the Management Client in logs etc 238 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Failover recording servers regular hot standby e Description Optional description for
382. s 5 ee 4 lf required repeat for other preset positions Customize transitions By default the time required for moving the camera from one preset position to another known as transition is estimated to be 3 seconds During this time motion detection is by default disabled on the camera as irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to be detected while the camera moves between the preset positions Transitions are also known as PTZ scanning Customizing speed for transitions is only supported if your camera supports PTZ scanning and is of the type where preset positions are configured and stored on your system s server type 1 PTZ camera Otherwise the Speed slider is grayed out You can customize the transitions between each of the preset positions in a patrolling profile You are able to customize the following e The estimated transition time e The speed with which the camera will move during a transition e Which plug ins to disable during transition To customize transitions between preset positions in a patrolling profile do the following 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Select the Customize transitions check box Customize transitions This will add transition indications to the list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profile 3 Inthe list select the required transition C Initial Transition o P Canned Foods Secbon e Canned Foods Section gt ere Dairy Products Section
383. s a microphone can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a microphone does not work after enabling it in the Management Client you should verify whether the problem may be due to the microphone being disabled on the device itself CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL MICROPHONES You configure individual microphones by selecting the required microphone in the list then specifying the microphone s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Info see Info tab overview on page 119 The selected microphone s name etc Settings see Settings tab overview on page 121 The selected microphone s general settings Record see Record tab The selected microphone s recording database and archiving storage overview on page 125 settings Events see Events tab overview on page 128 Events VIEW CURRENT STATE OF MICROPHONES When you have selected a microphone in the Management Client information about the current status of the selected microphone is presented in the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 When the microphone is not active it is shown as When the microphone is active it is shown as On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 103 Management Client READ MICROPHONE LIST S STATUS ICONS Ocularis LS Ocularis ES The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 82
384. s storage areas This means that when a storage area becomes available again it will again be possible to save recordings in the storage area However any recordings from the period in which the storage area was unavailable will be lost When creating rules you can use the events Database Storage Area Unavailable and Database Storage Area Available to trigger actions such as the automatic sending of e mail to relevant people in your organization Furthermore information about a storage area becoming unavailable available will be logged How dol ensure that archiving is set up correctly Archives are set up by adjusting several interdependent parameters correctly as described previously Can I create an archive on a network drive Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by the system for example on a network drive What happens when the maximum size of an archive is reached When you create archives from the Storage tab you specify a maximum size limit for the archive in days and gigabytes When either of the two maximum limits is reached recordings in excess of the specified number of days gigabytes will be removed However in order not to remove more recordings than necessary excess recordings will be removed in chunks of approximately one hour s worth of recordings What happens if a scheduled archiving fails If a scheduled archiving fails for example because the
385. s 1 4 to install any other systems you want to connect They must all be installed using a common administrator account This approach however cannot be used when upgrading workgroup installations refer to Alternative upgrade for workgroup on page 26 Install your system Single Server option In an upgrade scenario see Upgrade from previous version on page 25 you might not want to remove the management server database as it contains your system configuration 14 1 If you are installing a version downloaded from the Internet run the RC L RC E exe file from the Ocularis Component Installation page Alternatively insert the software DVD If the dialog does not open automatically run the RC L RC E exe file from the DVD The installation files unpack Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear Accept these and the unpacking continues When done the OnSSI installation dialog appears In the coming steps do the following Select the Language to use during the installation this is not the language your system will use once installed this is selected later Click Continue In Type the location of the license file enter the file path and name of your license file from your Ocularis provider Preferably use the browse function to locate it This file has a lic filename extension The system verifies your license file before you can continue Click Continue Read the OnSSI End user L
386. s and microphones If for example you have created a rule specifying that recording should start when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be useful Such prebuffering is possible since the system continuously receives streams of video and audio from connected cameras and microphones unless the transfer of video or audio from cameras or microphones has in some way been disabled Storing video and audio from before the initial boundaries of a recording is therefore not a problem video and audio passes through the system anyway When prebuffering is enabled for a camera or a microphone the system continuously records video or audio from the camera s or microphones stream and provisionally stores it in the database for a specified number of seconds before automatically deleting it unless the provisionally stored video or audio turns out to be required for a recording in which case it is automatically added to the recording Speakers Unlike video and incoming audio which the system continuously receives from connected cameras and microphones outgoing audio is only transmitted when Ocularis Client users press a button to talk through speakers This can depending on which events or times are used to start recordings mean that there will be very little or no outgoing audio available for prebuffering 126 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management
387. seconds i e once every tenth of a second every 250 milliseconds every 500 milliseconds every 750 milliseconds or every 1000 milliseconds i e once every second Default is every 500 milliseconds The interval is applied regardless of the camera s frame rate settings Detection method Lets you optimize motion detection performance by analyzing only a selected percentage of the image for example 2596 By analyzing 2596 only every fourth pixel in the image is analyzed instead of all pixels Using optimized detection will reduce the amount of processing power used to carry out the analysis but will also mean a less accurate motion detection In the Detection method drop down box select the wanted detection method Exclude regions Lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera s images Parts of images in which motion should be ignored this way are called exclude regions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 87 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Disabling motion detection in specific areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background When exclude regions are used with PTZ cameras and you pan tilt zZoom the camera the excluded area will not move accordingly This might mean that objects originally excluded will be included This is due to the fact that the exclude region is loc
388. seconds before motion is detected on the camera depends on prebuffering being enabled for the camera in question Perform an action on Motion Started from Redd 5 ance tam start recording 5 seconds belo STORAGE AREA In the Storage area you can monitor and edit database settings for the selected item At the top of the Storage area the selected database for the item in question and its status is stated In this example the selected database is Local Default and its status is Active On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 127 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Possible statuses for selected database Active Database is active and running Archives also located in old Database is active and running and has archives located in other storage storage areas as well Data for some of the devices Database is active and running and moving data from one or more selected chosen is currently moving to devices from one location to another another location Data for the device is currently Database is active and running and moving data from the selected device moving to another location is currently moving from one location to another Status information about the database cannot be collected when database Information unavailable in is in failover mode For more information see Manage failover recording failover mode servers see About failover recording servers regular and hot standby on page 234 Further
389. selected speaker s in the Ocularis Client IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived see About storage and archiving on page 61 there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Therefore some of the speaker related rights currently have no effect Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio etc will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible Input related rights o Visible Determines whether information about the selected input s will be visible to users of the Ocularis Client Output related rights Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Setting determines whether On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 189 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES o Visible the selected output s will be visible in the Ocularis Client If visible the output will be selectable on a list in the Ocularis Client o Activate output the selected output s can be activated from the Ocularis Client Outputs are selected and activated from Ocularis Client Why are some check boxes filled with squares Square filled check boxes can only appear if you are specifying role rights for a device group in which case they indicate that the right in question currently applies for some but not all devices within the device group z Live View Recorded vs 8 Expo
390. sequent steps of Manage Rule the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop recording Without this stop action recording would potentially continue indefinitely You also have the option of specifying further stop actions Start feed on Begin video feed from camera devices to the system When the feed from a device is lt devices gt started video will be transferred from the device to the system in which case live viewing and recording of video is possible IMPORTANT While this type of action enables access to selected cameras video feeds it does not guarantee that video is recorded as cameras recording settings must be specified separately When selecting this type of action the Manage Rule wizard see Manage rules on page 165 wizard will prompt you to specify on which devices feeds should be started Tip Your system has a default rule ensuring that feeds are always started on all cameras Note however that the default rule may have been manually deactivated or modified Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of Manage Rule the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop feed You also have the option of specifying further stop actions Note that using the compulsory stop action
391. servers and failover recording servers when databases are merged after a failover recording server has been running e Port 5432 Used by recording servers to listen for Transmission Control Protocol TCP information some devices use TCP for sending event messages e Port 7563 Used by recording servers and Ocularis Clients The main entry to the recording server where the Image Server interface is implemented Also used for handling PTZ camera control commands and for retrieving image stream from clients etc e Port 7609 Used by the Data Collector Server service and must always be keep open on the machine running the Data Collector e Port 8080 Used for communication between internal processes on the management server only e Port 8844 Used for User Datagram Protocol UDP communication between failover recording servers e Port 9993 Used for communication between recording servers and management servers e Port 11000 Used by failover recording servers for polling i e regularly checking the state of recording servers e Port 12345 Used by management servers and Ocularis Client for communication 22 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Installation and Removal e Port 65101 Used between processes on the same machine only i e Inter Process Communication IPC on a single machine only Multiple management servers cluster The management server can be installed on multiple servers within a cluster
392. setup Before backing up and restoring any system configuration you must set a backup folder for this purpose 1 Right click the notification area s management server service icon and select Select shared backup folder 2 Inthe window that appears browse to the wanted file location 3 Click OK twice 4 lf asked if you want to delete files in the current backup folder click Yes or No depending on your needs Important information e Both the user installing and the user doing the restore must be local administrator on the management server and on the SQL server e Except for your recording servers your system will be completely shut down for the duration of the restore which might take some time e A backup can only be restored on the system installation where it was created Furthermore make sure that the setup is as similar as possible to when the backup was made Otherwise the restore might fail e f restoring fails during the validation phase it will be possible to start the old configuration again since no change have been committed If restoring fails elsewhere in the process rolling back to the old configuration is impossible As long as the backup file is not corrupted it will however be possible to do another restore e Restoring replaces the current configuration This means that any configurational changes since last backup is lost e No logs including audit logs see Manage logs on page 197 are restored e O
393. site you are detaching is any site except your home site To detach child from a hierarchy 1 In the Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the site you want to detach except the home site select Detach Site from Hierarchy 222 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture 2 Click Yes 3 The detached site is removed and the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated Tip You do not have to connect to a site to detach it Just point your mouse to the relevant site and right click select Detach Site from Hierarchy Detach home site from parent hierarchy Location Home site which has a parent Prerequisites Your home site must be the child of another site i e have a parent To detach home site from a parent hierarchy 1 In the Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the home site and click Detach Site from Hierarchy 2 Click Yes 3 The Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated your home site becomes the new top site and the normal site icon 9 changes to a top site UP icon 4 Click OK Due to synchronization issues changes might take a little time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 214 Refresh site hierarchy Automatic synchronizatio
394. sition Hide remove Download Manager installer components You have three options e Hide components from the web page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure The components are still installed on the management server and by selecting check boxes in the Download Managers tree structure you can quickly make the components available again e Remove the installation of components on the management server The components will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the components are kept at C Program Files x86 OnSSNOnSS Download Manager so you can re install them later if required 1 Inthe Download Manager click Remove features 2 Inthe Remove Features window select the feature s you want to remove Click OK and Yes e Remove installation files see Remove system components on page 29 for non required features from the management server This can help save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features Device pack installer must be downloaded The device pack containing device drivers on page 233 included in your original installation is not included on the download web page So if you need to reinstall the device pack make the device pack installer available you must first add publish the latest device pack installer to the Download Manager by doing the following 1 Get the newest device pack from www onssi com 2
395. specified on one of the last steps of the wizard First Select stop action to perform Move camera to preset position Set device output to state M Send notification to profile 136 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Each type of action is described additional actions may however be available if your system installation uses add on products special plug ins etc For each type of action stop action information is listed as well Start recording Begin recording i e begin saving video in the database of the selected camera When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to specify when recording should start either immediately or a number of seconds before the triggering event beginning of the triggering time interval as well as on which devices the action should take place This type of action requires that recording has been enabled on the cameras to which the action will be linked Being able to save video from before an event or time interval is only possible if prebuffering is enabled for the cameras in question You enable recording and specify prebuffering settings for a camera on the Record tab see Record tab overview on page 125 Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the sub
396. specified servers See the federated sites illustration see Illustration of OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 218 where site 7 is the parent of site 8 but the child of site 6 What is the difference between logging into and connecting to a site To work with OnSSI Federated Architecture you must always be logged in to a site via the Management Client You can log in to any site if you have administrator rights to that particular site This is called your home site When logged in to your home site you can see all its children if user rights permit From your home site you can also connect to its children if user rights permit Embedded in the connection process is an automated and seamless log in using the same credentials as your home site log in Connecting to a child allows you to see and work with that site if user rights permit However even though technically you log out of your home site when connecting to another site you will still see the site structure as your former home site sees it This means that any changes you make to a child might not be visible until such changes reaches your home site via scheduled synchronization So changes you make in your hierarchy might not be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane until later For more details refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 214 You cannot refresh via a connection to a child this must take place directly from the home site When do I need to
397. ssible sensitivity 0 position The more you drag the slider towards the highest possible sensitivity position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted in green This is because with a very high sensitivity level even the slightest change in each pixel will be regarded as motion Motion slider Determines how many pixels in the camera s images image must change before it is regarded as motion The selected motion level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion indication bar above the sliders The black vertical line in the motion indication serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection Motion indication bar deflection changes color from green to red when above the threshold indicating a positive motion detection Tip Your exact motion slider setting is indicated by a number from 0 10 000 in the right side of the slider This way you are able to compare the exact motion slider setting between cameras Keyframe settings Determines if motion detection should be done on keyframes only or on the entire video stream Select Keyframes only to do motion detection on keyframes only Image processing interval Lets you select how often motion detection analysis should be carried out on video from the camera From the Process image every msec list select the required interval every 100 milli
398. st or automatically depending on settings recordings can be retrieved from remote storages to the surveillance system when the network is re established To save bandwidth it is possible to set up rules regarding when to retrieves recordings With remote systems the principle is the same However recordings are not retrieved from remote cameras edge storages but from remote systems recording servers Direct playback from remote sites on request good network connections The most straight forward setup The central site is continuously on line with its remote sites which send remote recordings on request Central site users play back remote recordings directly from the remote sites This requires use of the Play back recordings from remote system option see Playback remote system on page 125 Rule or Ocularis Client based retrieval of selected remote recording sequences from remote sites periodically limited network connections Used when selected recording sequences originating from remote sites should be stored centrally to ensure independence from remote sites Independence is crucial in case of network failure or network restrictions Configuring retrieval of remote recordings when the network connection is optimal i e not used for other priority data can be done from the Remote Recordings tab see Remote Retrieval tab on page 132 Alternatively remote recordings retrieval can be started from the Ocularis Client when needed
399. stems Inc 89 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES J Piracy masking Mask preview Use lefi and ng mouse buttons to select clear 16x16 7 Show grid Pen sie Ger Show privacy mask E Events G Client ER Privacy Mask 2 Motion ia Red areas indicate the areas masked for privacy When privacy masks are used with PTZ cameras and you pan tilt zoom the camera the selected area masked for privacy will not move accordingly This might mean that objects masked for privacy become visible This is due to the fact that the masked area is locked according to the camera s view not the masked object Consequently it is not recommended to use privacy masking with PTZ cameras Enable and disable privacy masking The privacy masking feature is enabled by default To enable disable the privacy masking feature for a camera select clear the Privacy Mask tab s Privacy masking check box Privacy masking settings When you enable privacy masking the preview image is divided into selectable sections by a grid To define privacy mask regions drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image Pressing down left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section You are able to define as many privacy mask regions as you require Privacy mask regions are shown in red 90 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Three privacy mask reg
400. t Click the underlined items in bold italics to specify their exact content For example clicking the days link in our example would let you select one or more days of the week on which the rule should apply Having specified your exact conditions click Next to move to the next step of the wizard and select which actions should be covered by the rule Depending on the content and complexity of your rule further wizard steps may let you define further information such as stop events and stop actions For example if a rule specifies that a device should perform a particular action during a time interval for example Thursday between 08 00 and 10 30 the wizard may ask you to specify what should happen when that time interval ends Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box Mama My Third Rule Diescnplion nis an Active Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 8 Click Finish To view step by step descriptions of how to create typically required rules refer to Create typical rules on page 142 Edit copy and rename a rule 1 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click the required rule 2 Select either 3 Edit Rule Or Copy Rule Or Rename Rule depending on your needs 9
401. t number attached the unit number will typically indicate the number of the input port to which the input is attached For hardware with for example four input ports the numbers will typically range from 0 to 3 FILL IN SETTINGS TAB PROPERTIES The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the devices in question and may vary depending on the input selected Verify or edit key input settings for a selected input or for all inputs within a selected device group If the selected device group contains 400 or more inputs the Settings tab will be unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Content may vary but you typically see the following property On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 111 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Define whether the input signal should be considered rising on Circuit closed or Circuit open Input rises on The value of this setting is used on the input s Events tab where you define properties for input events nput Rising event Input Falling event and Input Changed event See also the description of the properties of the Events tab see Fill in properties on the Events tab on page 112 The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You can change the values of these settings if needed FILL IN PROP
402. t s Tools menu select Ocularis CS Servers 1 Inthe Add Remove Registered Services window click Network 2 Specify the LAN and or WAN IP address of the management server If all involved servers both the management server and the trusted servers or the required Ocularis CS are on your local network you can simply specify the LAN address If one or more involved servers access the system through an internet connection you must also specify the WAN address T Hetwcrk Configuration ml Server Settings Sero bck ea LAN Serre pid ess fA 3 Click OK Edit Ocularis CS servers From the Management Client s Tools menu select Ocularis CS Servers 1 Select an Ocularis CS server from the list and click Edit in the Add Remove Ocularis CS Servers dialog 2 Editthe relevant settings and click OK 204 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Registered services Manage registered services Occasionally you have servers and or services which should be able to communicate with the system even though they are not directly part of the system Some services but not all can register themselves automatically in the system Services that can automatically be registered are e Log Server service see Management Server on page 8 Automatically registered services are displayed in the list of registered services You can manually specify servers services as registere
403. t to fine tune motion detection settings or disable motion detection for particular cameras Enable and configure microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 if any Enable and configure speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 if any Enable and configure input see Manage input on page 109 if any LJ Enable and configure output see Manage output on page 113 if any LI create rules see Manage rules on page 165 What is a rule Rules are a central element in your system The behavior of the system is to a very large extent determined by rules Rules determine highly important settings such as when cameras should record when PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras should patrol when notifications should be sent and so on Tip When creating rules you may also want to use time profiles see Manage time profiles on page 173 for quickly making rules apply within or outside predefined periods of time or notification profiles see Manage notification profiles on page 176 for quickly making rules send preconfigured e mails with video clips if required to selected recipients laa roles see Manage roles on page 184 What is a role Roles determine which system features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights laa users and or groups of users see Manage users and groups on page 182 Tip If you have a server with Active Directory installed and acting as d
404. t to start patrolling according to a specific patrolling profile We therefore select the action Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt First Select actions to pertorm Start recording on zdevices Start feed on cdevices Set live frame rate on devices Set recording frame rate on devices J Start patrolling on lt device gt using profiles with PTZ priority priority Pause patrolling on lt devices gt Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window 7 In this example Based on our selection Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt with PTZ priority lt priority gt the wizard automatically prompts us to specify the required camera patrolling profile and its priority see Actions and Stop actions on page 136 ext Edit the rule description click an underlined item erform an action in a time interval vithin the time period 1 00 to 8 00 and day of week is Saturday start patrolling on device using profile with PTZ priority priorit We click the device link expand the relevant camera folder select the required camera and click OK Select Device Sb Cameras Lab Cameras Parking lot E amp 3 Red Sector Cameras 3 Retail Area PTZ Cameras Next we click the profile link select the required patrolling profile from our list of
405. ta to what was changed since last backup Furthermore it offers you the ability to quickly restore your system configuration However regularly backing up also has the added benefit that it flushes your Microsoft SQL Server s transaction log If you have a smaller setup and do not feel the need for regular scheduled backup refer to Manual backup and restore of system configuration on page 228 The management server stores your system s configuration in a database When backing up restoring management server s make sure that this database is included in the backup restore Flush SQL server transaction log What is the SQL server transaction log and why does it need to be flushed Each time a change in the system s data occurs the SQL Server will log this change in its transaction log regardless whether it is a SQL Server on your network or a SQL Server Express edition The transaction log is essentially a security feature that makes it possible to roll back and undo changes to the SQL Server database The SQL Server by default stores its transaction log indefinitely and therefore the transaction log will over time build up more and more entries The SQL Server s transaction log is by default located on the system drive and if the transaction log just grows and grows it may in the end prevent Windows from running properly Flushing the SQL Serve s transaction log from time to time is a good idea However flushing it does not in itself make
406. tae MM Mi IE I M M MUI 240 Start and stop the Failover Recording Server service sesssssssssssseseeeee enne 241 6 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Contents Change the management server address ccccccseeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeesaeeeessaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeesseneeesaees 241 view status messages e 241 WIEW version IMTOR MATION eaa a dor tes be eles nel eae aa a edi ted 241 DATABASE CORRUPTION cscececececececececcceeccecacacacacaeacaeacacaeanaeananananaeaeaeanaeanaeanananananaeananananananeeneneaeaees 242 PROTECT RECORDING DATABASES FROM CORRUPTION cccececeeeceeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeataenensnenentns 242 Poweroutages BI 242 Windows Task Manager Careful when ending processes c cseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeessaaeeees 242 Hard disk failure Protect your CIiV S c ccccccccssecccceseecceececceececseuecessuseessueeecsaueeessesseessuseesssaaeees 242 SQL DATABASE ADMINISTRATION nnnm Innen nenne hehehe hehehe hehehe heres senes senes nene nennen 243 UPDATE SOL SERVER ADDRESS 5 iorebicu E Roue tener bata oko uenis Toi ek nU n deer ede SR aEw Diosa pite inue naran E de A nte 243 SERVICES ADMINISTRATION nnnm hehehe nennen hehehe hehehe rena rrr rrr rrr rrr nnne nene 244 MANAGEMENT SERVER SERVICE AND RECORDING SERVER SERVICE cceccececececeececececeaecececuseeaecec
407. tainer for one or more logical groups of such views Manage view groups By default each role you define in the Management Client is also created as a view group When you add a role in the Management Client the role will by default appear as a view group for use in clients e A view group based on a role will by default only be available to users groups assigned to the role in question You may change these view group rights on page 192 e Aview group based on a role will by default carry the role s name In addition to the view groups you get when adding roles you may create as many other view groups as you like You can also delete view groups including those automatically created when adding roles e Even though a view group is created by default each time you add a role see Manage roles on page 184 view groups do not have to correspond to roles You may therefore add rename or remove any of your view groups if required Note that if you rename a View group client users already connected must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible ADD A VIEW GROUP 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the Clients node right click View Groups and select Add View Group This opens the Add View Group dialog 2 Type the name of the new view group then click OK Optionally in the Management Client s Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the
408. tc 119 Settings see Settings tab overview on The selected camera s general settings page 121 Streams see Streams tab camera The selected camera s video streams properties on page 101 Record see Record tab overview on page The selected camera s recording database and archiving storage settings 125 E tab video encoders on The selected camera s preset positions only available if the selected page 131 camera is a PTZ camera Patrolling The selected camera s patrolling profiles only available if the selected see PTZ Patrolling tab camera camera is a PTZ camera properties on page 93 Events see Events tab overview on page Events 128 Client see Client tab camera properties Information which will affect client s use of the selected camera on page 84 Privacy Mask see Privacy Mask tab camera Privacy masking for the selected camera properties on page 89 Motion see Motion tab camera The selected camera s motion detection settings properties on page 85 READ THE CAMERA LIST S STATUS ICONS The following icons are used to indicate status of cameras see Manage cameras on page 82 microphones see Manage Microphones on page 102 speakers see Manage speakers on page 107 input see Manage input on page 109 and output see Manage output on page 113 events in item lists l l _ Item enabled Can communicate with the recording server and P Ja qd op l can i
409. tc through the system Manage cameras on page 82 Manage cameras You can either add see Add hardware on page 53 or replace see About hardware on page 55 cameras Enabling disabling as well as renaming of individual cameras takes place on the recording server hardware management level see About hardware on page 55 For all other configuration and management of cameras expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select Cameras In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you group your cameras for an easy overview of your cameras Grouping also lets you specify common properties for all cameras within a group in one go and add cameras see About device groups on page 104 to that group Devices eui Cameras Lab Cameras z Lab Cam 1 Lab Cam 2 P Lab Cam 3 ap LabCam 5 p Lab Cam B P Lab Cam 7 lt p Lab Cam 8 7B Lab Cam P Lab Entrance Cam Red Sector Cameras gt Fetal Area PTZ Cameras Once you have placed your cameras in groups configuration can begin 82 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client CONFIGURE INDIVIDUAL CAMERAS You configure individual cameras by selecting the required camera in the list then specifying the camera s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Info see Info tab overview on page The selected camera s name e
410. te connect hardware 63 Remote connect services 20 58 Remote recording camera remote system 69 70 128 158 173 247 Remote Recording rights 247 Remote Retrieval tab 69 164 Remove a recording server 78 Remove recording server 30 Remove STSs 59 Remove system components 21 25 29 30 Remove users and groups from role 242 Remove video device drivers 298 Rename a user defined event 234 Rename site 289 Replace a recording server 78 Replace hardware device 57 64 Reset to default layout 52 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Index Resize panes 45 Restore system configuration from manual back up 294 297 321 Restore system configuration from scheduled back up 292 296 Retrieve remote recordings from remote site camera 70 158 Right click does not select 284 Rule that activates deactivates an output 143 Rule that makes an input trigger an action 144 Rule that makes an output triggers an action 144 Rules and events 167 S Scheduled back up of system configuration 291 296 Scheduled backup and restore of system configuration 291 293 Search log 259 Security 235 Select service account 15 16 17 Select shared backup folder 294 321 Select SQL type 15 17 Server logs 253 271 Servers and clients require time synchronization 95 Servers and hardware 61 Servers rights 247 Services administration 313 Set site properties 289
411. tecture on page 212 About roles Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable When you work with roles you must first create the role then add some users groups and if relevant a time profile see Manage time profiles on page 173 One role is predefined in the system and cannot be deleted the Administrators role In addition to the Administrators role you can add as many roles as required in your organization To manage roles in the system go to the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and select Roles For more information see e Manage users and groups on page 182 e Assign and remove users and groups to from roles e Manage roles on page 184 e Specify rights of a role on page 187 Manage users and groups With Ocularis you need only one user on the Management Server to be used to import the system into Ocularis Base The additional content here regarding users and roles is for informational purposes only In the system you define roles see About roles on page 182 first then you add users groups to the roles Roles determine which of the system s features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights Once you have defined roles you can add users and groups See Assign and remove users amp groups to from a role PREREQUISITES A server with Active Directory installed th
412. tem This user defined event is used in a rule to start recording on a camera associated with the activated access control device It is defined in the meta data which camera is associated with what rule This way the company does not need to have 35 user defined events and 35 rules triggered by the user defined events a single user defined event and a single rule are enough When user defined events are used this way you may not always want them to be available for manual triggering in the Ocularis Client Whichever way you choose to use user defined events each user defined event must first be added through the Management Client Note that if you rename a user defined event the Management Server must be Refreshed on the Ocularis Base Also note that if you delete a user defined event this will affect any rules in which the user defined event is used Furthermore a deleted user defined event will not disappear from Ocularis Clients immediately only after the Management Server is Refreshed on the Ocularis Base Add a user defined event 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and Events and select User defined Events 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 right click Events and select Add User defined Event 180 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 3 Type aname for the new user defined event and click OK The
413. tem since your OnSSl Interconnect setup was established or refreshed last Click Confirm to update your central site with these changes Establish remote desktop connection to remote system Preconditions The remote desktop connections to the machine you want to remote to must be up and running and its management application must be open 1 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system In the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Info tab 3 4 Inthe Remote administration area enter the appropriate Windows user name and password 5 Once user name and password are saved click Connect to establish remote desktop connection 6 In the toolbar see Management Client Overview on page 30 click Save Enable playback directly from remote site camera 1 On the central site in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server select the relevant remote system Select the relevant camera 3 Inthe Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Record tab and select the Play back recordings from re
414. tems in the Site Navigation pane gives you quick access to management features Federated Site Hierarchy pane Your navigation element dedicated to displaying OnSSI Federated Architecture sites see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 and their parent child links The parent server you are logged in to your home site is always at the top and adopting its point of view you can view all its linked children and downwards in the parent child hierarchy On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 31 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES What if only have one server and don t run OnSSI Federated Architecture Your user interface looks the same but you only see the one server in your setup Menu Bar The Management Client s menu bar features the following menus see Management Client Menu Overview on page 37 File Edit View Action Tools and Help Toolbar The Management Client s toolbar features the following options r ann w Undo Undo your latest change Save Save changes to your settings _ aa Help Access a help topic relevant to your task e asas f Memory Indicator Contents Access the help system s table of contents Search Access the help system s search feature The memory indicator in the lower left corner of the Management Client states how much memory is available for working with the Management Client Memory free 171 36ME When you expand items in the Site Navigat
415. tentially never be restored You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Begins PTZ patrolling the continuous moving of a camera between a number of preset positions according to a particular patrolling profile the exact definition of how patrolling should be carried out including the sequence of preset positions timing settings etc for a particular PTZ camera with a particular priority What is Priority When several users on a surveillance system wish to control the same PTZ camera at the same time conflicts may occur PTZ priority lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected PTZ camera s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from 7 to 32 000 where 7 is the lowest priority Default PTZ priority is 3000 If your system is upgraded from an older version of the system the old values Very Low Low Medium High and Very High have been translated as follows o Very Low 1000 o Low 2000 o Medium 3000 o High 4000 o Very High 5000 If your system is upgraded to version 4 0 or future versions rule priority settings is a new feature Existing rules created without priority automatically get priority 1 It is strongly recommended to reconsider this lowest possible priority for all affected rules When selecting this type of action Manage Rule will prompt you to select a patrolling profile Only one patrolling profile on one device can be sele
416. th the much more primitive method broadcasting which would send data to everyone connected to the network even if the data is perhaps not relevant for everyone Unicasting Sends data from a single source to a single recipient Sends data from a single source to multiple recipients within a clearly Multicasting defined group Sends data from a single source to everyone on a network broadcasting ECEE OENE can thus significantly slow down network communication WHAT ARE THE REQUIREMENTS To use multicasting your network infrastructure must support IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol an IP multicasting standard You must configure multicasting through the Management Client ENABLE MULTICASTING 76 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client On the Multicast tab select the Live multicast check box If the entire IP address range for multicast is already in use on one or more other recording servers you cannot enable multicasting on further recording servers without freeing up some multicasting IP addresses first ASSIGN IP ADDRESS RANGE In this section you specify the range from which you want to assign addresses for multicast streams from the selected recording server Clients connect to these addresses when viewing multicast video from the relevant recording server In the Start field specify the first IP address in the required range Then IP address specify the last IP address in t
417. the link request this is done from the child site 7 The new parent child link is established and the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane is updated with the l gt icon for the new child Due to synchronization issues any changes made to children located far from your home site might take some time to be reflected in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 214 Accept inclusion in hierarchy You must accept a child link request manually if your administrator settings require this e fthe management server is installed as a network service Computers involved must not be added as users to each other s Ocularis system administrator role but should be added as another non administrator role Refer to Assign and remove users and groups to from roles e fthe management server is installed as a user account This user account must not be a member of the administrator role of the server being linked to Otherwise inclusion will take place automatically Also refer to Administrator role and federated sites see Administrators role and federated sites on page 215 Prerequisites The potential child must have received a link request from the potential parent As a result the child has the awaiting acceptance Uu icon Accept inclusion in hierarchy 1 In the Management Client window of the potential child in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the
418. the management server is installed Updating management server SQL address 1 If your management server is located a together on the same machine and you wish to update both SQL addresses go to the machine where your management server is installed b ondifferent machines and you wish to update the management server SQL address go to the machine where your management server is installed 2 f o aand b goto the notification area of the taskbar a k a Systray Right click the Management Server icon select Update SQL address d 9 m ps ue 3 The Update SQL Server Address dialog appears Select Management Server and click Next 4 Enter or select the new SQL server and click Next 5 Select the new SQL database and click Select 6 Wait while the address change takes place When a confirmation message is presented click OK Updating log server SQL address 1 If your management server and log server are located a together on the same machine go to the machine where your management server is installed b on different machines go to the machine where your management server is installed and copy the directory eProgramFiles sYXOnS SAManagement Server Tools ChangeSq Address with content to a temporary directory on another server 2 f o a go to the notification area of the taskbar a k a Systray Right click the Management Server icon select Update SQL address o b paste the directory you copied to
419. the possible states of the Management Server service Recording Server and Failover Recording Server services They are all visible on the machines where the service is installed not in the Management Client see Management Client Overview on page 30 Running Reg failover recording server it is enabled fu and started and able to take over from standard recording servers a amp Stopped Reg failover recording server it is stopped and no longer taking over from standard recording servers Starting Appears when a server service is in the tj process of starting Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Running a Fi 246 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management kd Ed and Recording Server service only HJ Recording Server service only Recording Server service only On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Services administration Stopping Appears when a server service is in the process of stopping Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Stopped In indeterminate state Appears when the Recording Server service is initially loaded and until the first information is received upon which the icon will under normal circumstances change to Starting and subsequently to the Running Running offline Typically appears when the Recording Server or Failover recording service is running but the Management Server serv
420. the relevant tabs The next item section is only relevant if you run Ocularis ES USERS AND GROUPS RIGHTS Refer to Assign remove users and groups to from roles DEVICE RIGHTS The Device tab lets you specify which features users groups with the selected role should be able to use for each device e g a camera or device group in the Ocularis Client The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half select the item for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half specify which role right should apply for users groups with the selected role in the Ocularis Client Remember to repeat for each required device device group You can also select a device group and specify role rights for the entire device group in one go 188 Camera related rights Depending on the recording component functionality described here may be limited or unavailable Setting determines whether O AUX Commands it will be possible to use auxiliary commands from the Ocularis Client What are AUX Commands AUX is short for Auxiliary Such commands offer the user control of for example wipers on a camera connected via a video server Camera associated devices connected via auxiliary connections are controlled from the Ocularis Client Add it will be possible to add bookmarks in recorded video from the Ocularis Client Delete it will be possible to delete bookmarks in recorded video from the Ocularis Client Edit it will be poss
421. the roles of individual group members 1 Open the Effective Roles window There are three ways in which you can open the Effective Roles window o From the Management Client s menu bar by selecting Tools Effective Roles o From the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 when working with roles by right clicking anywhere inside the pane then selecting Effective Roles o From the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 by expanding Security then right clicking Roles then selecting Effective Roles 2 Inthe Effective Roles window s User name field type the user name of the required user I5 Lisa 3 If you typed the user name directly into the User name click Refresh in the lower part of the window to display the roles of the user If you used Active Directory to browse for the user the user s roles will be displayed automatically Work with users groups and roles To assign or remove Windows users or groups or basic users see About basic users on page 192 to from a role do the following 1 In the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Security and select Roles Then select the required role in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 2 Inthe Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the Users amp Groups tab at the bottom 3 Click Aad select between Windows user or Basic user ASSIGN WINDOWS USERS
422. the transaction log file smaller but it prevents it from growing out of control Your system does not however automatically flush the SQL Server s transaction log at specific intervals You can also do several things on the SQL Server itself to keep the size of the transaction log down For numerous articles on this topic go to support microsoft com and search for SQL Server transaction log Prerequisites SQL Server Express Edition users only Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express a tool download able for free from www microsoft com downloads Among its many features for managing SQL Server Express databases are some easy to use backup and restoration features Download and install the tool on your management server Scheduled back up of system configuration 1 From Windows Start menu open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express by selecting All Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server 2008 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express 2 Inthe tool do the following When connecting specify the name of the required SQL Server Use the account under which the database was created o Find the Surveillance database containing your entire system configuration including recording servers cameras inputs outputs users rules patrolling profiles etc No Surveillance database Surveillance is the default name of the database containing the system configuration If you can find the database but it is not called Surveillance it c
423. ting you install more than one recording server instance see Install multiple recording server instances on page 25 on the current machine Select Failover 4 Specify failover recording server properties see Recording failover recording server install properties on page 16 Click Continue 5 When installing a failover recording server it is mandatory to use a particular user account This account see Select service account on page 17 If needed enter a password and confirm this Click Continue 6 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 14 step 4 5 When the failover recording server is installed you can check its state see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 from the Failover Server service icon and start using it More about installing Recording failover recording server install properties Fill out the following properties when you install a standard recording server see Install your system Custom option on page 15 or a failover recording server see Install failover recording server recording server on page 16 Recording server name A name for the server in question If required you can later change the name The IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of Management server the management server to which the server should be connected If required you address can later change the management server IP address host name
424. tings You are able to specify settings relating to the amount of change required in a camera s video in order for the change to be regarded as motion You are also able to specify intervals between motion detection analysis any areas of an image in which motion should be ignored etc Sensitivity slider Determines how much each pixel in the camera s images must change before it is regarded as motion Drag the slider to the left for a higher sensitivity level and to the right for a lower sensitivity level The higher the sensitivity level the less change will be allowed in each pixel before it is regarded as motion The ower the sensitivity level the more change in each pixel will be allowed before it is regarded as motion This way you are able to allow insignificant changes which should not be regarded as motion Pixels in which motion is detected are highlighted in green in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted 86 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client ighlighted motion in the preview image Tip Your exact sensitivity slider setting is indicated by a number from 0 300 in the right side of the slider This way you are able to compare the exact sensitivity slider setting between cameras Tip If you find the concept of motion detection sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the highest po
425. tivated deactivated work as required e The camera in question is a PTZ camera with the required preset positions and patrolling defined How to define preset positions and patrolling profiles When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it moves between a number of preset positions Thus before you able to define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera the preset positions required for the patrolling profiles must be defined To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 For details of how to define preset positions on the Presets tab refer to Preset Positions see PTZ Presets tab camera properties on page 96 Once you have defined the required preset positions patrolling profiles for the PTZ camera are defined on the neighboring Patrolling tab For details of how to define patrolling profiles on the Patrolling tab refer to Patrolling see PTZ Patrolling tab camera properties on page 93 Creating the Rule 1 Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Rules and Events then right click Rules and select Add New Rule On Net Surveillanc
426. to control the same PTZ camera at the same time conflicts may occur This setting lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected PTZ camera s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from7to32 000 where fis the lowest priority Default PTZ priority is 3000 Example You specify that the role Security Manager should have very high priority when using a PTZ camera whereas the role Security Assistant should have low priority when using the PTZ camera Now if a user with the role Security Manager and a user with the role Security Assistant want to control the PTZ camera at the same time the user with the role Security Manager will win the ability to control the camera If your system is upgraded from an older version of the system the old values Very Low Low Medium High and Very High have been translated as follows O Very Low 1000 O Low 2000 O Medium 3000 190 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client O High 4000 O Very High 5000 Users of the Ocularis Client are able to stop resume a patrolling PTZ camera s patrolling This PTZ feature is not regulated by PTZ priority e Allow activation of PTZ presets Determines if the selected role is able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions o False Users groups with the selected role will not be able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions o True Users g
427. to add a few hardware devices and you know their IP addresses required user names and passwords and so on 1 Select Manual and click Next 2 Specify user names and passwords if your hardware devices are not using the factory default user name and password You can add as many user names and passwords as required by clicking Add Remember to 54 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client select the nclude check box for each required device You must choose to add and include at least one user name and password in order for the wizard to proceed When ready click Next 3 Now select which drivers to use when scanning By default the system will use all known drivers If your organization only uses certain hardware devices and or models you can achieve faster scanning by selecting only the drivers required for those hardware devices When ready click Next 4 Specify information for the hardware you want to add You can also optionally select the type of driver you want to add to speed up hardware detection o Address Specify the IP address of the hardware you want to add o Port Specify the port number to which the camera is added o Hardware driver Select the driver of the hardware you want to add Or select Auto detect to let the wizard detect which driver to install 5 Wait while the hardware is detected A status indicator will show the detection process Select or clear the network rang
428. to step 4 Stop criteria and select a stop action Click Finish RULE THAT MAKES AN INPUT TRIGGER AN ACTION In the Rules feature all registered external input activation deactivation or change is treated as an event Based on an event you are able to specify a wide variety of actions to take To define a rule specifying that an input should result in one or more actions for example the starting of recording on a certain camera do the following 118 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Start Managing Rules In step 1 Type of rule select Perform an action on event gt Click event in the initial rule description In the Select an Event dialog in the Devices Configurable Events group see Configurable events devices on page 162 select the appropriate option for your rule Input Activated Input Changed or Input Deactivated Click OK Click devices recording servers management servers in the initial rule description In the Select Devices and Groups dialog select the required input Click OK Continue to step 2 Conditions and if needed select a condition Continue to step 3 Actions and select one or more actions Continue to step 4 Stop criteria and select a stop criteria Continue to step 5 Stop actions and select a stop action Click Finish Info tab overview The nfo tab lets you view and edit basic information about a selected item in a number of fields The
429. tom A list of components to be installed appears Apart from the management server all elements in the list are optional The recording server is by default deselected but you can change this if needed Click Continue Choose the type of SQL server database you want see Select SQL type on page 17 If relevant also specify the name of the SQL server Click Continue Select either Create new database or Use existing database and name the database see Select SQL type on page 17 If you choose the latter select to Keep or Overwrite existing data Click Continue Select either This predefined account or This account to select the service account see Select service account on page 17 If needed enter a password and confirm this If you are installing a recording server and a recording server is also already installed on the same machine this dialog is shown twice Click Continue Specify recording server properties see Recording failover recording server install properties on page 16 Click Continue On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 15 Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES 7 Ifyou have more than one available IIS website you can select any of these However if any of your websites have HTTPS binding select one of these Click Continue 8 Refer to Install your system Single Server option on page 14 step 4 5 Install failover recording server recording server IMPORTANT During the installation pro
430. top the IIS at http technet microsoft com en us library cc732317 WS 10 aspx This should all be done to the new management server Since second part of a copy is in reality identical to a restore refer to Restoring system configuration from scheduled back up see Restore system configuration from manual back up on page 229 steps 1 2 and rest of the topic for details 232 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Device drivers Device drivers Manage video device drivers Video device drivers are modules used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to a recording server The video device drivers should therefore be installed on each recording server on your system Video device drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your system However new versions of video device drivers are released and made available on our website www onssi com Remove video device drivers Video device drivers are modules used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to a recording server When the video device drivers are removed communication between the recording server and the camera devices will no longer be possible To remove video device drivers use the following procedure on the recording server computer on which the video device drivers are installed The following procedure describes standard system component removal in recent Windows versions
431. u s deco cles a dieu astus ic a egebea ates 53 eve ra Marzio TS i S REN TTE EE I QM r E a HE CORTO CRECEN o3 PATE FAR DS IA Ms RU MUN 55 About OnselIntercormnectuss ri eaa t ek esd seat besa eta Puts 57 ADOUtStOrage and arCNIVINOs dessena a 61 PROWL TS CORGIING SEL VOI S eirean a a a a a a E PUDE 65 Servers and clients require time synchronization cccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesseeeesaeeees 80 Bjmtpszcd ce 82 ADOUEOOVICOS id nier Red eric Tbcn ecd res e bbiduca nd LI Ud e a ba ia cud acad bres re DERE 82 SIE zac d Y 135 PION CUS MS ua spe on aii aac eae enacts add iat edes arva Pitan aired e dun aufod osea ode M atte cuf add aa dde ps 135 PADOUE VIEW CIOUDS m Pm M 135 RULES AND EVENTS iarere a A a waruipdt Oa Sc vested su DARE D bos beu ado o esa tos DDR ME Ou ook bob da vestra co OZ AIDS Cubs meta de 136 ADOULMUIES ANG y 0 r Pee 136 create typical FUSS MT n 142 BI 2 0 TeS fT EEUU tU r 160 EVENS OVOIVIe W ideae Si e wee AM ML MM LIE LM ML RM ele enh ee 161 Manage Tiles iva converrcancede diua eb save Das ec daa Dua Fes Us c da ee sa b aren ud a y eos uu 165 Manage TIME PONE EE REED e 173 Manage day length time profileS cccccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeseaeees 176 Manage notification profiles ccccccccsscccceeseeccene
432. uch device defined presets can subsequently be imported into the system by selecting Use presets from device If importing presets from the camera device any presets you have previously defined for the camera in will be removed this will affect any patrolling profiles in which these presets are used as well as any rules in which the affected patrolling profiles are used If you later wish to edit such device defined presets editing should take place on the camera device Assign a default preset position If required you are able to assign one of a PTZ camera s preset positions at the camera s default preset position Having a default preset position can be useful because it allows you to define rules see Manage rules on page 165 specifying that the PTZ camera should go to the default preset position under particular circumstances for example after the PTZ camera has been operated manually To assign a preset position as the default select the required preset in your list of defined preset positions then select the default preset box below the list Only one preset position can be the default preset position Edit a preset position To edit an existing preset position defined in the system presets imported from a device should be edited on the device itself do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera 2 Click Edit This opens the Edit Preset
433. uestion in their Ocularis Clients The users can subsequently select another microphone if they require so Bear in mind that although you have defined a default microphone for a camera it cannot be guaranteed that all Ocularis Client users will hear audio from the microphone in question Some users may not have speakers attached some users may not have the rights required to listen to audio etc By defining a default speaker you can determine through which microphone Ocularis Client users should by default be able to speak when they select the camera in question in their Ocularis Clients The users can subsequently select another speaker if they require so Bear in mind that although you have defined a default speaker for a camera it cannot be guaranteed that all Ocularis Client users will be able to talk through the speaker in question Some users may not have a microphone attached some users may not have the rights required to talk through speakers etc This field is not in use MOTION TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES The Motion tab lets you enable and configure motion detection for the selected camera Motion detection configuration is a key element in your system Your motion detection configuration may determine when video is recorded when events are generated when external output such as lights or sirens is triggered etc Time spent on finding the best possible motion detection configuration for each camera may therefore help you l
434. ueueaeaeseeeeass 244 Access ne server sepVIoBEe ru v LV LL ME M E n NU EE 244 Start thie server ServiC Gus iod leote E eande tins oL Lt d oL AOT ad elc ee 244 SIOD Ihe Server ServiGB cuite ose actly iios stessi tL LU dera te Eod pgs cu LU aaah e 245 Change recording server SettinGS cccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeas 245 view status INGSSAG CS exercer ana enh iar nando cue cha cor unPei KXPVE dU pe Fa uo dbeni En ca cau AR AR expe ARE SABE nts 245 View version IMTOMMEL ON Succus EE alU UM PLU EMI NN IM EUM E Mg SRL DID C P MM I Me 245 Recording Server SCMINGS PEE EET T P D 246 Read server service icons management recording and failOVEl ccccseccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 246 VIRUS SCANNING di Uode tva duxveo Icd usu eden eiee dut ieee ade a dea Lanlicecwatev desta bes 249 VIRUS SCANNING INFORMA EON iteuncdtk te Ededautepe wel Cope er a SE xe edu epo ek boom eoe sted a a eso cM UR Ebo Oper usua E 249 TRAY ICON a a TROC EORTPOIRE PHONE 250 viu ut NN 251 ABOU SINIMIP lt SUPPOR Tesi aa a pce RT nT T 251 lm Stallv SNMP SCIVICE o etse ate Gl eee qcste water e uin dut tate tual ca earner neal eau Mu I ectmanentulinns 251 Configure SNMP ISSIVIEO u opea cous Aah ee ite ea tod tc Sash coto do econ cee haute cau Aah iain ca id onda cay 251 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME cette aa s
435. ularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client Options Options The Management Client s Options dialog lets you specify a number of settings related to the appearance of the application to logging to mail server configuration etc You access the Options dialog from the Management Client s menu bar see Management Client Overview on page 30 by selecting Tools Options The Options dialog features the following tabs General Specify the following from Options see Options on page 207 General tab Select how many rows to appear on a single log page The default value is 50 rows If a log contains more rows than your selected value it displays the additional rows on additional pages Number of log rows to retrieve per page Select which frame rate to use for the thumbnail camera images displayed in the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Default is 1 frame per second Refreshing the Management Client layout by pressing F5 on your keyboard or selecting Action Refresh from the menu bar is required Default preview frame rate for a change to take effect Note that a high frame rate that is a high image quality in combination with a large number of thumbnail images in the Preview pane may slow the system down You can limit the number of thumbnail images with the Max number of previews setting Select the maximum number of thumbnail images displayed in the Preview pane Default is 64 thumbnail images Refresh th
436. ure to select the Use credentials check box and fill in exactly the same user name and password as used for the Axis One Click Connection Component 4 Click OK Remove STSs 1 To remove an ST server right click it select Remove Axis Secure Tunnel Server 2 Click Yes Register new Axis One click camera 1 To register a camera under an ST server right click it select Register Axis One click Camera 2 Inthe window that opens fill in the relevant information see Axis One Click Camera connection properties on page 51 3 Click OK 4 The camera will now appear under the relevant ST server The color coding of the camera is either Red Initial state registered but not connected to the ST server Yellow Registered connected to the ST server but not added as hardware Green Added as hardware may or may not be connected to the ST server When added status will always be green The connection status see Read server service icons management recording and failover on page 246 is then as normal reflected by Devices on Recording Servers in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 In the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 you may group your cameras for an easier overview If you choose not to register your camera at the Axis dispatch service at this point you can do so later from the right click menu select Edit Axis One click Camera Unregister Axis One click Camera 1 T
437. urrently connected to e Name Shows the name of the parent to be displayed in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane and Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 e Description Shows a description of the parent e URLs Lists URL s for this parent and indicates whether they are external or not e Version Version number of the site management server e Service account The service account under which the management server is running e Time for last synchronization Last synchronization date e Status for last synchronization Status of last synchronization It can be either Successful or Failed f failed further information is offered Due to synchronization issues any changes made to remote children might take some time to be reflected in the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Refer to Basic rules of federated sites on page 214 224 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 225 Backup restore and move system configuration Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Backup restore and move system configuration Scheduled backup and restore of system configuration Regularly backing up your system database is always recommended especially if you have a larger system setup Having a scheduled regular backup provides you with an always up to date backup In case of a disaster recovery scenario regular backups limit your loss of da
438. user account This user account must be a member of the administrator group of the server being linked to before a parent child link can be established without the acceptance from the administrator of the child 220 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES OnSSI Federated Architecture If neither of these criteria are met the administrator of the child needs to accept the request for inclusion in the hierarchy see Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 221 before the link can be established Refer to OnSSl Federated Architecture overview see About OnSSI Federated Architecture on page 212 for more details Add site to hierarchy 1 Inthe Management Client window in the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the relevant site right click and click Add Site to Hierarchy utn cute ale rtr by P me zd ih A La lagu is Tu Add Site to Hierarchy CTRL Insert the URL of the requested child in the Add Site to Hierarchy window Click OK A link to the new child site is added to the Federated Sites Hierarchy pane pr dw w D If you can establish the new child link without requesting acceptance from the administrator see Prerequisites described earlier skip to step 7 If not the new child has the awaiting acceptance icon see Accept inclusion in hierarchy on page 221and its administrator must authorize the request 6 Make sure the child s administrator authorizes
439. ustering failover recording servers you also need a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 2008 Enterprise or Data Center edition Microsoft NET 3 5 SP1 and NET 4 0 and Internet Information Services IIS 5 1 or newer Computer running recording server or failover recording server CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Type Hard Disk Space Operating System 10 Dual Core Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Quad Core recommended Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Onboard GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit color E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 100 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Vista Business 32 or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise 32 or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate 32 or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit On Net Sur
440. vanced failover settings Opens the Advanced Failover Settings window o Full Support Select to get full failover support for the device On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 239 Failover recording servers regular hot standby Ocularis LS Ocularis ES o Live Only Select to get live failover support for the device o Disabled Select to disable failover support for the device e Failover service communication port TCP By default the port number is 11000 This port is used for communication between recording servers and failover recording servers If changed the recording server in question must be running and must be connected to the management server meanwhile Failover related events Your system features two failover related events Failover Started and Failover Stopped which you can use when creating rules see Manage rules on page 165 The two events are further described in the Events overview on page 161 Read failover recording server status icons The following icons represent the status of failover recording servers icons are visible in the Management Client in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 Icon Description The failover recording server is either waiting or watching When waiting the failover recording server is not configured to take over from any recording server yet When watching the failover recording server is configured to watches one or more recording servers The failove
441. ve Microsoft Active Directory in place before you install your system If you add the management server to the Active Directory after installing you must re install the management server and replace users with new users defined in the Active Directory The following are minimum requirements for the computers used Computer running management server CPU Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended Graphics Adapter Onboard GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit color Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster Minimum 50 GB free depends on number of servers cameras rules and Hard Disk Space logging settings On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 9 Introductions Operating System Software Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Standard Web High Performance Computing HPC Enterprise and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2003 32 or 64 bit To run cl
442. veillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Software Introductions Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework IMPORTANT When you format the hard disk of a recording failover recording server device you must change its Allocation unit size setting from 4 to 64 kilobytes This is to significantly improve recording performance of the hard disk You can read more about allocating unit sizes and find help at http support microsoft com kb 140365 en us Computer running Management Client CPU RAM Network Graphics Adapter Hard Disk Space Operating System Software Computer running log server CPU RAM On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Intel Core2TM Duo minimum 2 0 GHz Minimum 1 GB Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 recommended 16 bit color Minimum 100 MB free Microsoft Windows 8 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft Windows Server 2012 64 bit Standard and Datacenter gt Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32 bit or 64 bit gt Microsoft
443. veillance Systems Inc 23 Installation and Removal Ocularis LS Ocularis ES c Repeat steps a and b for all services listed in the Add Remove Registered Services window Click Network d Inthe Network Configuration window change the URL address of the server to the URL address of the cluster This step only applies to the first server in the cluster Click OK Network Configuration X Server Settings Server address LAN https MM yClusher4 Server address WAN 3 In the Add Remove Registered Services window click Close Exit the Management Client 4 Stop the management server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 and the IIS Read about how to stop the IIS at Microsoft s homepage 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for all subsequent servers in the cluster this time pointing to the existing SQL database However for the last server in the cluster on which you install the management server do not stop the Management Server service Next in order to take effect the Management Server service must be configured as a generic service in the failover cluster 1 On the last server on which you have installed the management server go to Start Administrative Tools open Windows Failover Cluster Management In the Failover Cluster Management window expand your cluster right click Services and Applications and select Configure a Service or Application SS Failover Cluster Man
444. vercome this day length time profiles can be created and defined in the system according to the sunrise and sunset in a specified geographical area Via GPS coordinates the system on a daily basis calculates the sunrise and sunset time even incorporating daylight saving time As a result it automatically follows the yearly changes in sunrise sunset in the selected area ensuring the profile to be active only when needed All times and dates are based on the management servers time and date settings In addition you can set a positive or negative offset in minutes for the start Sunrise and end time sunset The offset for the start and the end time can be identical or different Day length time profiles can be used when creating both rules see Manage rules on page 165 and roles see About roles on page 182 Create a day length time profile 1 In the Management Client expanding the Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 s Rules and Events folder select Time Profiles 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 in the Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add Day Length Time Profile 3 Inthe Day Length Time Profile window fill in the needed information In order to deal with transition periods between lightness and darkness it is possible to offset activation and deactivation of the profile Also time and month names are shown in the language dictated by your computer s la
445. vers on page 202 specifically Only relevant if you run Ocularis ES On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client View all roles of a selected user or group see Manage users and groups Effective Roles on page 182 Only relevant if you run Ocularis ES Opens the Options dialog see Options on page 207 which lets you Options define and edit several global system settings Only relevant if you run Ocularis ES View menu items Depending on context Reset the layout see Customize the Management Client s layout on page AGER Aqu M GIO Psy 39 of the different panes in the Management Client to their default settings Toggle the Preview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 on and off when working with recording servers and devices Tip If the Preview pane displays images from many cameras at a high frame rate it may slow down performance To specify the number of preview images you want in your Preview pane as well as their frame rate select Options General from the Tools menu Preview Window By default the information shown with preview images in the Preview pane will concern cameras live streams shown in green text If you want information about recording streams instead select Show Recording Streams Recording stream information will be shown in red text Show Recording Streams Federated Site By default the Federated Site Hierarchy pane is enabled an
446. verview 164 Stop the server service 314 315 Storage and Recording settings 84 Storage area 157 Storage tab recording server properties 71 81 Storage tab properties 81 Streams tab camera properties 97 120 149 System dashboard 250 System Requirements 9 14 26 T Test a preset position 119 Three possible OnSSI Interconnect setups 69 Toggle Preview pane on and off 52 Toolbar 33 Tools menu items 44 Tray icon 321 U Unregister Axis One click Camera 59 Update remote site hardware 70 159 160 Update SQL server address 29 311 321 Upgrade from previous version 13 14 26 76 Upgrade in a cluster 25 Use auto hide 50 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Use different PTZ patrolling profiles for day night rule 188 Use higher live frame rate on motion rule 174 Use preset positions from device type 2 115 118 Use rules to trigger e mail notifications 231 Use several instances of an event 160 161 Use specific PTZ patrolling profile during specific part of day rule 180 Use the Management Client to Log in to the Management Server 39 42 User settings 272 User defined events external 212 Users and Groups rights 243 V Validate rule s 223 View archived recordings 73 View current state of microphones 122 View current state of speakers 129 View effective roles 240 View Group rights 166 247 View lo
447. verview on page 33 expand the relevant camera folder in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 select the required camera and then select the Streams tab in the Properties pane see Panes Overview on page 33 The tab will by default list a single stream the selected camera s default stream used for live video as well as for video which is being recorded for playback purposes Note that while it is possible to set up and use two live streams only one of the enabled live streams is able to record video at a time To change which stream to use for recording use the Record box About multi streaming on page 101 Add a new stream see Add a stream on page 102 About multi streaming You manage multi streaming on the Streams tab The tab is only available when the selected camera or device group supports multi streaming Viewing of live video and playing back of recorded video does not necessarily require the same settings to achieve the best result To handle this your system and some cameras support multi streaming with which you can establish two independent streams to the recording server Either one stream for live viewing and another stream for playback purposes or two separate live streams with different resolution encoding and frame rate Example 1 live and recorded video e For viewing live video your organization may prefer MPEG4 at a high frame rate On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 101 Manageme
448. verview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 then select the Storage tab in the Properties pan see Panes Overview on page 33 e It is not possible to add databases or edit a storage area if the recording server is offline On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 69 Management Client Ocularis LS Ocularis ES dhea nico aides dan 7 dey x et ues Seen sechopa schedule 4 duan menig gidjer ha HU ei e Pon er echsa ocnodule an E backup M oem nins arm 12 my et rv Lej a T A sspe VI Foire e Mac TU Rat STORAGE TAB PROPERTIES Storage configuration list contents Name Description Name Indicates the name of the storage area Click to edit Indicates how many devises use the storage Click the number link to see device details The following devices are using the database Camera zl Microphone 1 on ACT Camera 10 100 64 21 Speaker 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 21 Camera 26 i Microphone 1 on ACT Camara 10 100 64 26 Device Usag e vum aad on ACTi Camera Tid 900 626 Camera 29 Microphone 1 an ACTI Camera 10 100 64 2 Speaker 1 on ACTi Camera 10 100 64 23 Camera 30 Camera 33 Microphone 1 an ACTI TOM TCO WO series 10 100 64 33 Speaker 1 on ACTI TCM TCD VO seres 10 100 64 33 Camera 34 Indicates the default storage that is the storage area in which database Default content is automatically stored unless you specifically define other storage areas for particular cameras Onl
449. vice is installed do the following 1 2 3 4 5 F In In In In rom Windows Start menu select Control Panel the Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs the left side of the Add or Remove Programs window click Add Remove Windows Components the Windows Components wizard select Internet Information Services IIS and click Details the Internet Information Services IIS window verify whether the SMTP Service check box is selected If so SMTP Service is installed If SMTP Service is installed select one of the following solutions Solution 1 Disable SMTP Service or set it to manual startup This solution lets you start the recording server without having to stop the SMTP Service every time 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Administrative Tools 3 Inthe Administrative Tools window double click Services 4 Inthe Services window double click Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP 5 Inthe SMTP Properties window click Stop then set Startup type to either Manual or Disabled Tip When set to Manual the SMTP Service can be started manually from the Services window or from a command prompt using the command net start SMTPSVC 6 Click OK Solution 2 Remove SMTP service Note that removing the SMTP Service may affect other applications using the SMTP Service 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel
450. view of the preview image However under normal circumstances it is highly recommended that you keep the Show regions box selected otherwise exclude regions may exist without you or your colleagues being aware of it The blue exclude area indications will only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab not in any other preview images in the Management Client or access clients Pen size Use the Pen size slider to indicate the size of the selections you wish to make when clicking and dragging the grid to select regions for privacy masking Default is set to small which is equivalent to one square in the grid PRIVACY MASK TAB CAMERA PROPERTIES The Privacy Mask tab lets you enable and configure privacy masking for the selected camera Among other things you can define if and how selected areas of a camera s view should be masked before distribution For example if a surveillance camera films a street in order to protect residents privacy you can mask certain areas of a building could be windows and doors with privacy masking This is even needed in some countries to comply with national legislation As administrator you are also able to see through privacy masked areas and can turn showing of privacy masked areas on and off When viewed via Ocularis Client or any other media privacy masked areas will be represented as black areas and it is impossible to see behind the privacy masking or in any way remove it On Net Surveillance Sy
451. w management server on new server step 2 Installing a management server is divided into three steps During step 2 of the installation on your new management server make sure you select Create a new database for the system configuration database even though you have a backup of the database from your old management server Next see Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 on page 232 overwrite the new and empty database by restoring the backup we just created Since you are going to overwrite the new and empty database it is important that it has the same name as the backed up database if your backed up database has the default name Surveillance just use the default name Surveillance when creating the new database too The password for the database is not significant in this backup restore context but we recommend that you just use the default setting Allow server to control password Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 Prerequisite To prevent configurational changes being made while you restore the system configuration database stop the e Management Server service see Management Server service and Recording Server service on page 244 e Event Server Service can be done from Windows Services search for services msc on your machine Within Services locate OnSS Ocularis Event Server World Wide Web Publishing Service also known as the Internet Information Service IIS Learn how to s
452. wer Supply The UPS works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system administrators etc Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization s environment is an individual process When you assess your needs however bear in mind the amount of runtime you require the UPS to be able to provide if the power fails Saving open files and shutting down an operating system properly may take several minutes Windows Task Manager Careful when ending processes When working in Windows Task Manager be careful not to end any processes which affect the surveillance system If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the Windows Task Manager the process in question will not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is terminated This may in turn lead to corrupt camera databases Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process Unless you are absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance system make sure you click No when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process Hard disk failure Protect your drives Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and as such they are vulnerable to
453. y one storage at the time can be default Recording and archiving configuration list content A c cm defe Haec IU dios EM um ES n e Ro 1 Database name 2 Maximum size of the database and usage also represented graphically by a proportional filling of the database 70 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client 3 Database location 4 Archiving schedule for archiving to the next archive in the list Note that the number of retention days stated for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process Tip If you pause the mouse pointer over a database it shows detailed database information ADD A STORAGE AREA A storage area is always created with a predefined recording database named Recording which you cannot rename Apart from a recording database a storage area can contain a number of archives see Create an archive within an existing storage area on page 71 22225 1 To add an extra storage area to a selected recording server click the B button located below the Storage configuration list 2 This opens the Storage and Recording Settings dialog Specify the relevant settings to continue 3 Click OK If needed you are now ready to create archive s within your new storage area see Create an archive within an existing storage area on page 71 CREATE AN ARCHIVE WITHIN AN EXISTING STORAGE AREA A storage area has no default archive when it is created 1 Tocr
454. y points for managing microphones e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Devices select Microphones expand the required device group and select the required microphone If no device groups are available you must first group your microphones Refer to About Device Groups on page 104 for information about creating groups as well as adding microphones to your groups 102 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Management Client e Inthe Management Client s Site Navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers then in the Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the required recording server expand the required device and select the required microphone Check the product release notes to verify that microphones are supported for the devices and firmware used ENABLE MICROPHONES When microphones are detected with the wizard Add Hardware on page 53 they are by default disabled You can enable microphones when needed If a device has several microphones you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 Inthe Site Navigation pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe Overview pane see Panes Overview on page 33 expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the microphone is placed 3 Right click the required microphone and select Enabled On some device
455. y server see Assign failover recording servers on page 74 In a regular failover setup a failover recording server can be grouped with other failover recording servers in a failover group The entire failover group is dedicated to taking over from any of several preselected recording servers should one of these become unavailable A failover recording server in a hot standby setup is dedicated to take over from one recording server only Because of this they can be kept in a standby mode which means that they are already started with the correct current configuration of their recording server and are ready to take over more quickly than a regular failover recording server AS mentioned hot standby servers are assigned to one recording server only and therefore cannot be grouped Likewise regular failover servers already part of a failover group cannot be selected as hot standby servers A failover group can contain one or more regular failover recording servers Grouping see Group failover recording servers on page 238 has a clear benefit when you later specify which failover recording servers should be able to take over from a recording server you select a group of failover recording servers If the selected group contains more than one failover recording server this offers you the security of having more than one failover recording server ready to take over if a recording server becomes unavailable You can create as many failover groups as
456. ystem configuration ccccccssececceeeeecceseeeceeueecceueeesseeeeseueeeeseueeesseneeesaass 226 Back updog server datab9SO o iiaa ek oir Ebor SaA o2 belio adeo tU Ao S edet Ets aA eia 227 Restore system configuration from scheduled back Up ccccecccceececeececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeesaneeeas 227 MANUAL BACKUP AND RESTORE OF SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 0cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseueesseeesaaeesees 228 Select shared backup folder eee ec ee et eee ea 229 Manual back up of system configuration cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeees 229 Restore system configuration from manual back up ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaenees 229 MOVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION TO NEW MANAGEMENT SERVER esseseeeeeee nennen emen nennen nennen nnns 230 Copy system configuration from old server step 1 essesssesseeneeenm ene 231 What happens while the management server is unavailable ccccccecceceeeeceeeeeaeeeeseeceseeeesanees 231 Copy log server database usce eiae eo dene Ho rane cede atado uc ded ddunie sede ees bre arde decades 232 Install new management server on new server step 2 232 Copy restore system configuration to new server step 3 seeeseseesesseeeseeenn 232 DEVICE DRIVERS 45 p aa A eduliitavs du Mese delis cesis do nada Casgadu N NU Nec duM CO DU pua Me NOE UUUR 233 MANAG
457. ystem uses Coordinated Universal Time UTC which is the official world reference for time UTC is not adjusted to reflect switches either to or from DST Since the system uses UTC no recordings are ever stored with the same timestamp twice not even during the DST change hour Client side handling The client application used for viewing recordings from the system the Ocularis Client also uses UTC when displaying recordings The client takes local time settings time zone and any DST from the computer on which the client is used and converts those time settings to UTC This means that there is a very simple solution for viewing recordings from the DST change hour Viewing DST change hour recordings in clients When you want to view recordings from the last most recent hour of the DST change hour go ahead and view them 252 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis LS Ocularis ES Daylight saving time When you want to view recordings from the first hour of the DST change hour do the following 1 On the computer on which the client is used go to Windows Start menu and select Control Panel 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Date and Time 3 Inthe Date and Time Properties window select the Time Zone tab 4 Make sure the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is cleared then click OK Date and Time Properties AZ Date amp Tire Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Cansda e

Ocularis LS / Ocularis ES

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents